█╒═════════════════════════════════════════════╕ ▄████████████████████
█│ Qmodem - 4.6 Test-Drive │ Professional Communications████
█│ Copyright (C) 1994 Mustang Software, Inc. │ Software for your PC ████
█│ All Rights Reserved World-Wide │ ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄████
█╘═════════════════════════════════════════════╛ ▄███████████████████████████
█████▀ ╒═════How to reach MSI══════╕█████████████████████████
███▀ │ Sales : (800) 208-0615 │█████████████████████████
██ │ Office : (805) 873-2500 │█████████████████████████
█▀ │ Support : (805) 873-2550 │█████████████████████████
▀ │ BBS : (805) 873-2400 │█████████████████████████
│ Fax : (805) 873-2599 │█████████████████████████
╘═══════════════════════════╛█████████████████████████
▄▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▄ ▄███████████████████████████████████████
▄▀████▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄███ ▀▄ ▄██████████████████████████████████████████
▄▀████▄▀ ▀▄████▀▄ ▄████████████████████████████████████████████
█████▄▀ ▀▄█████ ▄██████████████████████████████████████████████
█████ █ ███ ███████▀▀███▀██████▀█████▀███████▀███▀███▀██████
█████ █████ ███████▀██▀██ ██ ▄██ ██ ▄██ ██▄▄▄▄▄██▀█▀██ ██████
█████ ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄ █████ ███████ ▄██ ██ ██ ███ ██ ███ ██▀▀▀▀ ██ █ ██ ██████
█████ ▄▀▀████████▀▀▄ █████ ███████ ▄██▄▄██ ██████ █████▀ ██████▀██ █▄██ ██████
█████▀▄█▄▄▀▀▀▀▀▀▄▄██▀▄████ ██████▄▄▄██████▄▄█▄▄▄▄▄▄█▄▄▄▄▄██▄▄▄▄▄▄█▄▄███▄▄██████
▀▄████▀▄ ▄████▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀███▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀███▀▀▀▀▀
▀▄ ██▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀██▀▄▄ █████████ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ ███
▀▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▀ ▀▀▄▄▄▄▄▄███▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄███▄▄▄▄▄
████████████████████████████████████████████████████████
█████████████████████████████████████████████████████████
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WHAT IS QMODEM TEST-DRIVE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
TECHNICAL SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DISTRIBUTION POLICY AND COPYRIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
COPYRIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TEST-DRIVE DISTRIBUTION POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
REVIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
THE SOURCE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
OPERATING ENVIRONMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
INSTALLING QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
GETTING HELP WHEN YOU NEED IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
UPGRADING FROM A PREVIOUS RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
QINSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
THE INTERNAL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
THE QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE SCRIPT LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . 182
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 1
=================================================================
WHAT IS QMODEM TEST-DRIVE?
This TEST DRIVE version of QMODEM is a full-featured modem
communications program. It is designed to allow the user to be
able to evaluate QMODEM and determine if it meets their needs.
The TEST DRIVE release is not the latest release of the program,
however, and does not include all the features of the REGISTERED
USER VERSION. This TEST DRIVE release includes full documentation
and information on obtaining the REGISTERED USER VERSION.
WHAT DO I GET WHEN I REGISTER?
New Qmodem users can register for $99 and prior Qmodem registered
users can upgrade for only $35. All registered users receive:
- A copy of the latest release of the Registered User Version
packaged as a commercial program with dual media diskettes;
- A more comprehensive, updated, typeset operations manual;
- Free technical support by phone between 9:00am and 5:00pm
Pacific time;
- Automatic notification of any major program updates;
- Additional program updates at a significantly reduced rate;
- Access to proprietary utility programs, written by both MSI
and other authors, which enhance and add features;
- 24-hour access to the private multi-line Registered Users BBS
at Mustang Software.
QMODEMPRO FOR WINDOWS
No other communications software does Windows like QmodemPro!
All the power and performance of QmodemPro communications
software is now ready to plug into the Windows environment.
QmodemPro for Windows is the first communications software
that supports both data and fax communications in one
easy-to-use package. And it offers the widest range of file
transfer options, terminal emulations and user support
features.
With QmodemPro for Windows you can make the Windows
multitasking environment work for you. Use it to download
files or capture data in the background while you work in a
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 2
=================================================================
word processor or spreadsheet application. QmodemPro
includes a built-in .GIF viewer that lets you view .GIF
graphics files and even zoom a .GIF or .BMP file, or mark and
copy portions of the picture to the Windows clipboard. And
QmodemPro for Windows is the first software to support
RIPscrip, the defacto graphics standard for BBS systems
worldwide.
QmodemPro also supports sound cards, so you can assign
Windows Wave soundfiles to specific events in your
communication session. This means you can have a .WAV file
played when you connect to a BBS, when your download is
complete, and during other events like connect, dialing, file
transfer success and failure. QmodemPro is that powerful.
And that versatile.
QmodemPro for Windows contains a brand new Script Language
for QmodemPro (SLIQ) that gives you unparalleled power,
speed, and flexibility. The host mode even allows you to
create a mini-BBS. Based on the BASIC language structure, it
adds extensions for the Windows communications environment
and includes a Quicklearn feature for creating scripts
without learning the language. A compiler is included for
compiling fast, secure scripts. We've also included a
powerful script debugger and full editor.
QmodemPro for Windows supports both sending and receiving fax
documents with any class 1 or class 2 fax modem. You can
send text, .PCX and .BMP graphics, or fax directly from any
Windows application which support printing with our QmodemPro
printer driver. Received faxes are selected from the viewer
as thumbnail sketches, and can easily be expanded, viewed and
printed.
File transfers are made easy with features like live .GIF
file viewing during download and drag-and-drop of files from
the Windows File Manager to the upload window. Information
can be reviewed in the scrollback buffer at the click of a
button. The screen behind the terminal window can be
customized with your favorite pattern or .BMP file.
Terminal emulations include the new RIPscrip graphics
emulation for connection to thousands of BBS systems offering
graphics and full mouse support online. The terminal window
includes a button bar for fast access to menu commands,
including the phonebook, upload, download and more. Up to 40
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 3
=================================================================
programmable macro keys are also available for sending text,
launching scripts, and many other program functions.
Each dialing directory entry tracks up to 5 number and a
default device, emulation, protocol, user ID, password,
script, icon, macros and memo field. Groups of entries can
be saved and dialed either continuously or until a single
contact is made. The directory can be viewed as a list, a
group of icons, or a combined icon/list. A simple double
click is all you need to do to dial, connect and get online.
QmodemPro for Windows brings you to the leading edge of
communications software and lets you enjoy the increasing
versatility of the Windows environment. Plug into your
future of communications. Call Mustang Software at
800-999-9619 to order now. Suggested Retail Price is $99.
QMODEMPRO FOR DOS (with OLX)
Qmodem has been the choice of discriminating modem users since
1982. QmodemPro for DOS carries on that tradition with an
easy to use DOS-based communications program with RIPscrip
graphical user interface terminal emulation and full mouse
support.
QmodemPro for DOS is the first communication software package
to offer a total solution to the needs of today's
telecommunications enthusiast. It lets you take control of
your electronic connectivity needs with a full suite of
emulations, protocols and intuitive commands, and is the first
communications program to also offer integrated electronic mail
management.
In addition to offering dial-out and host capabilities,
QmodemPro for DOS retrieves E-Mail from MCI, CompuServe and
Bulletin Board Systems. Its accompanying mail reader makes
it easy to reply to messages off-line, and features a 124,000
word spell checker. Replies can be sent back to the
originating system or routed to other mail services, BBS
systems or even to a fax machine. The fax send capabilities
of QmodemPro can be used with any class 1 or class fax modem.
Although QmodemPro for DOS incorporates some of the newest
technology in the communications arena, we think you'll find
it the easiest to use program of its kind. From installation
to your first on-line experience, QmodemPro for DOS guides
you through your session with full context-sensitive help and
intuitive mouse support.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 4
=================================================================
You may call our toll-free ORDERS ONLY HOTLINE
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
1-800-208-0615
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
Use your VISA, MasterCard, American Express, or even COD. For
information, please call 805-873-2500. Technical questions
regarding Test-Drive operation may be answered by calling our
support department direct at (805) 873-2550.
QMODEM is also available from most computer software retail
stores including:
* Software Etc. stores nationwide (for the location of the
store nearest you call 1-800-328-4646)
* COMP USA stores nationwide
* Walden Software outlets nationwide
* Egghead Discount Software stores nationwide
* ... and other quality retailers. If your favorite store does
not have QMODEM, ask them to call us at 1-800-208-0615 for
ordering information through our distributor.
Other stocking dealers include:
* On-Line Services (mail order) 1-800-597-6160 and
* BBS Technologies (mail order) 1-209-498-0200.
Dealers and resellers can obtain QmodemPro through our distributors
who sell only to dealers, not to end users. In the USA or Canada
contact INGRAM MICRO; in Scandinavia (Norway, Sweden, Denmark,
Finland) contact PC SECURITY; in France contact MAXOTEX; in
Holland (Netherlands) contact GETRONICS NETWORK SERVICES; and in
the United Kingdom (Great Britan) contact TELESYSTEMS, LTD.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 5
=================================================================
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE was designed for ease of use, and this
manual should contain the answers to most of your questions. Read
it first and check the appendices for trouble-shooting
procedures. If you're still stumped, technical support is only a
phone call away. You may first want to call our BBS system at
805-873-2400 for valuable insight by other QMODEM users. Feel
free to look around, download any files on the system that may be
of use to you, or leave a [C]omment to the Sysop if you need a
question answered. This method of obtaining support is especially
good if you want expert guidance regarding the more advanced
features.
Another alternative is CompuServe where we are a part of the PC
Vendor Support Forum. You reach us by typing GO PCVENA and then
selecting Sub Topic 9. Our PIN is (75236,3312). Support is also
available on GEnie, in the MSI Round Table.
If you are unable to find the answer to a question or just need a
quick explanation, please give us a call between 9:00am and
5:00pm Pacific time. You can reach technical support at
(805) 873-2550. We must, however, limit tech calls to those
problems not resolved after reading this manual. Technical
support is not (and should not be) a substitute for this manual.
Bear in mind that most other software companies will not even
support a product until it is registered. We want to extend
special support to users of this TEST-DRIVE release, but need
your cooperation in checking the manual first.
LIMITED WARRANTY
THIS PRODUCT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
IS ASSUMED BY YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND
NOT MUSTANG SOFTWARE, INC. OR ITS DEALERS) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. FURTHER,
MUSTANG SOFTWARE, INC. DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE
OF THIS PROGRAM IN TERMS OF CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE; AND YOU RELY ON THE PROGRAM AND IT'S
RESULTS SOLELY AT YOUR OWN RISK. MUSTANG SOFTWARE, INC. CANNOT
ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR SYSTEM DAMAGE, LOSS OF PROFIT, OR ANY
OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE RESULTING FROM
THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT.
Mustang Software, Inc., DOES warrant to the original licensee of
a REGISTERED product that the program disk(s) on which the
program is recorded be free from defects in materials and
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 6
=================================================================
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of ninety
(90) days from the date of delivery as evidenced by a copy of
your receipt. Mustang Software, Inc.'s entire liability and your
exclusive remedy shall be replacement of the disk not meeting
Mustang Software, Inc.'s limited warranty.
DISTRIBUTION POLICY AND COPYRIGHT
COPYRIGHT
Qmodem Test Drive software and this document are Copyright
(C)1985-1992 Mustang Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Qmodem
and Qmodem Test-Drive are trademarks of Mustang Software, Inc.
Any specific hardware/software names used in this document are
trademarks of specific manufacturers.
Regardless of the method of marketing, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is
not in the public domain. It is copyrighted by Mustang Software,
Inc. All rights are reserved. Copying, duplicating, selling or
otherwise distributing this product is a violation of the law.
However, we grant you the right, in fact encourage you to make
and distribute as many copies of this TEST-DRIVE version as you
wish, using any acceptable medium of exchange, with the following
provisions:
TEST-DRIVE DISTRIBUTION POLICY
1. Please feel free to distribute this TEST-DRIVE version as
often as you like, to any interested parties.
2. Please do not distribute the program without all of its
original related files, addendum files, documentation and
this notice.
3. Please obtain our written permission prior to distribution
with any "Bundled" software packages.
4. Please do not alter the program or documentation in any
manner.
5. Please do not accept payment for the program.
6. QMODEM Test-Drive is licensed for individual personal use and
evaluation for an unlimited time. Use and evaluation by
businesses, corporations or individuals in a commercial
venture is limited to 60 days, after which time the
REGISTERED version QMODEM must be purchased or the use of
QMODEM Test-Drive must be discontinued.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 7
=================================================================
DISTRIBUTION of the REGISTERED USER version of the program is in
violation of license agreements and copyright law!
REVIEWS
Mustang Software, Inc. is always in need of your opinion on all
our products so that we may continue to improve our software. We
encourage you to evaluate this TEST DRIVE version of QMODEM and
let us know of your findings. Printed reviews by user groups or
other publications may be mailed to us at P.O. Box 2264,
Bakersfield CA 93303-2264 and marked to the attention of Rick
Heming, VP Operations.
THE SOURCE CODE
The source code for QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is not available. This
decision gives us the ability to guarantee the integrity of our
product in this era of software contamination. It is not
available either under the TEST DRIVE concept, or as a Commercial
product.
This document was revised for Qmodem 4.6 Test Drive.
DEFINITIONS
Throughout the documentation, you may run into technical terms or
everyday computer terminology with which you are not familiar.
Following are some text examples you may come across:
ENTER This represents the Return or Enter key on the
keyboard. If you see this in the text, press the
Enter key rather than typing in the string.
ESC This refers to the Esc key on the keyboard.
Alt-[char] Alt- is always followed by a character which means
press and hold the Alt Key and hit the following
letter. Alt-A means hold the Alt key down and press
'A'.
Ctrl-[char] Is executed the same way the Alt- is handled. You
press and hold the Ctrl key and then press the
following letter. Ctrl key combinations may also be
specified by the ^ (carat) as in ^T (Ctrl-T).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 8
=================================================================
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE requires an IBM PC,XT,AT,PS/2 or IBM
compatible computer with at least 384K RAM, a hard drive with a
minimum of 2 megabytes of free space, a Color or Monochrome video
adapter and monitor, and a serial port and modem.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENTS
Three multitasking environments are supported:
* DESQview; from QuarterDeck Office Systems.
* TaskView/OmniView; from Sunny Hill Software.
* Windows version 3.0 and greater from Microsoft.
DESQview and Windows allow QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to run in a
window without requiring the whole screen. TaskView takes a
slightly different approach and gives QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE an
entire screen when the partition is selected. All of these
multi-tasking programs let you be more productive by running
other software at the same time as QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
The Utilities Disk contains special configuration files for
DESQview and Windows.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE may not operate properly when other
background software is running. By other background software, we
mean programs that are loaded in the CONFIG.SYS, or by a BAT file
and remain in memory. Certain screen clock programs, for example,
are known to interfere with serial port operations.
If you experience loss of incoming data or other unpredictable
problems, it is possible that one of these programs is
interfering with QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. Remove these programs or
device drivers from the AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS file one at a
time until you find the offender.
Another method is to start DOS without any resident programs or
device drivers and add them back in, one at a time, until the
culprit is identified. Most expanded memory drivers, mouse
drivers, and hard-disk partitioning software drivers do not
interfere with QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operation.
One program which is known to interfere seriously with serial
port operations is the clock driver supplied with some early
memory and multi-function boards.
Conflicts with QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE may not be caused by a
single program, but by a combination of programs, which, taken
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 9
=================================================================
singly, cause no problems. Therefore, if you suspect some
conflict, you should boot your system with only absolutely
necessary device drivers and resident programs (i.e. a
partitioned disk device driver).
INSTALLING QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
Back up your diskettes! The first thing you should do is back up
your QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE distribution disks. Always backup your
disks! I can't stress this enough! Please refer to your DOS
manual if you are not sure how to backup your disks.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE as originally distributed comes on two
floppy disks labelled INSTALL and UTILITIES, containing the
program files and utility files in compressed format, plus an
INSTALL program which unpacks the files and prepares you to set
up QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE on your hard disk.
It is also distributed by Mustang Software, Inc., in downloadable
form, as two files: QM46TD-1.EXE and QM46TD-2.EXE -- these are
self-extracting executable files which will, when executed,
unpack themselves into an executable installation program, and
archived files containing the program and utility files. The
installation program will unpack and install the program and
utility files into the subdirectories you specify when you
execute the install program.
It is common, however, for Bulletin Board System Operators
(Sysops) to re-compress these files using another archive format,
however, and you may see these two files with extensions such as
.ZIP, .ARC, .LZH, .ARJ, .ZOO, or .PAK -- in this instance, you
will need a copy of the utility used to create the archive in
order to unpack it. Ask the System Operator (Sysop) for
assistance if you do not know how to unpack these files. Or, if
you prefer, you may download the original, unaltered archives
from the MSI HQ! BBS at 805-873-2400.
If you received QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE on floppy disk, place the
install diskette into your floppy drive and type:
INSTALL [Enter]
to begin the unpacking and installation process. You will be
prompted to enter the source drive and to confirm or change the
destination drive and path. The installation program will then
unpack the program files and prompt you to insert the second
diskett, from which it will extract the utility files and move
them all to the directory you've specified for the installation.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 10
=================================================================
If you downloaded QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE from a Bulletin Board
System, your first step will be to extract the files INSTALL.EXE,
PROGRAM.ZIP and UTILS.ZIP from the archives. If they are in their
original self-executing format, you can simply type
QM46TD-1 [Enter]
QM46TD-2 [Enter]
If the archive type has been converted by your Sysop, you will
need to extract the files yourself. Only the files
INSTALL.EXE
PROGRAM.ZIP
UTILS.ZIP
are required to proceed with the installation.
Type INSTALL [Enter] to begin installing QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
When the installation process has completed, you will then be
shown a short message file which contains important last-minute
information on starting and running QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE for the
first time. Please read this file carefully!
To finish installing QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, you should modify
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows:
1. Add the C:\QMODEM subdirectory to your existing PATH=
statement.
2. Add a SET QMODEM=C:\QMODEM (or the name of the subdirectory
you create). This is an environment variable that QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE checks when it is loaded. If it finds one, then it
will also search the defined subdirectory for any of the
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE specific files it requires.
Making these two adjustments allows QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to be
started from any subdirectory without needing a special BAT file.
You could start QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE from your word-processor
directory simply by typing QMODEM at the DOS prompt!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 11
=================================================================
SUBDIRECTORY STRUCTURE
It is said that a picture is worth a thousand words... Here is a
picture of one possible QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE subdirectory setup
on a hard disk:
QMODEM─┬─DOWNLOAD
├─HOSTDIR
└─SCRIPTS
The QMODEM\DOWNLOAD directory will be used to store all uploaded
and downloaded files. A separate directory is optional, but
having it will make it easier for you to see what you have
transferred.
The QMODEM\HOSTDIR is similar to the QMODEM\DOWNLOAD directory,
but is used by the internal Host mode of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Callers to the HOST will be restricted to this directory.
The QMODEM\SCRIPTS directory is used for script file storage.
Keeping scripts in a dedicated directory makes script maintenance
easier. Copy all .SCR files from the distribution disks to this
directory.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 12
=================================================================
GETTING HELP WHEN YOU NEED IT
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE features context-sensitive help. As the
name suggests, relevant help information is available for any
command as you execute it, just by pressing the F1 Help Key.
For example... You have the Alt-K window open and pressed F1. The
help window would look like this:
╒══════════════════════════ Change COM Port (Alt-K) ═══════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ Qmodem can immediately switch between any one of eight communication ports │
│ on computers so equipped. The standard COM1 and COM2 ports are Qmodem │
│ defaults; port definitions beyond COM2 must be specified with the Alt-N/M/P │
│ configuration menu. │
│ │
│ If you have defined additional COM ports, your menu may look something like │
│ this: │
│ │
│ ╒═════════ Set COM Port ══════════╕ │
│ │ Active COM Port is COM1 │ │
│ │ │ │
│ │ 1 COM1 Base(03F8) Irq(04) │ │
│ │ 2 COM2 Base(02F8) Irq(03) │ │
│ │ 3 COM3 Base(03E8) Irq(04) │ │
│ │ │ │
│ │ Your choice : _ │ │
│ ╘═════════════════════════════════╛ │
│ │
│ To select a new serial port, type the desired number from the displayed │
│ list. │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Topic Index AltF1-Previous Topic ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 13
=================================================================
Now, if this isn't what you were looking for or if you wanted to
get a list of Help Topics, just press F1 again. The Topic Index
contains all of the major Alt- commands, and some of the common
procedures you might need. It may look something like this:
╒═══════════════════════════════════ Topics ═══════════════════════════════════╕
│ ■ Help with ONLINE HELP ■ Function Keys (Alt-J) │
│ ■ Moving around in the INDEX ■ Hang Up (Alt-H) │
│ ■ Dialing another System ■ Host Mode (Alt-5) │
│ ─────────────────────────────── Invoice for Ordering (Alt-I) │
│ 8th Bit Toggle (Alt-8) Log File Toggle (Alt-0) │
│ Adding Linefeeds (Shift-Tab) Printer Echo Toggle (Alt-9) │
│ ANSI Music Toggle (Alt-M) Screen Dump (Alt-T) │
│ Backspace <> DEL Toggle (Alt-1) Script File Execution (Alt-F) │
│ Batch Entry Window (BEW) Script Parameters (Alt-F) │
│ Beeps & Bells Toggle (Alt-B) Script QuickLearn (Alt-Q) │
│ Capture File Toggle (^Home) Scroll Back (Ctrl-UpArrow) │
│ Change COM Port (Alt-K) Scroll Back Toggle (Alt-U) │
│ Change Directory (Alt-O) Send BREAK Signal (^End) │
│ Change Drive (Alt-L) Setup - The top menu (Alt-N) │
│ Clear Screen (Alt-C) Split Screen Mode (Alt-S) │
│ Communication Parameters (Alt-P) Status Line Info Toggle (Alt-Enter) │
│ Delete a File (Alt-Y) Status Line Toggle (Alt-Minus) │
│ Dialing Directory (Alt-D) Terminal Emulation (Alt-G) │
│ Directory Display (Alt-W) Translate Tables (Alt-A) │
│ Doorway Keyboard Emulation (Alt-Equal) Upload Protocols (PgUp) │
│ Dos Shell (Alt-R) Video 25-Line Mode (Alt-2) │
│ Download Protocols (PgDn) Video 43/50-Line mode (Alt-4) │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ . for more ═╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Topic Index AltF1-Previous Topic ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
From here, you can jump over to help on other commands, or get
more help on how the Help System works. Help remembers where you
have been, so you can retrace your steps backwards by pressing
Alt-F1 back to the original screen.
The online help is not all-inclusive, which is why you are
reading this paragraph. Although the context-sensitive help is as
detailed as possible, it still is no substitute for this
documentation.
Summary command help is available from the HOME window by
pressing the F1 key, followed by the desired command key
combination. When the F1 key is pressed, the status line changes
to the following display:
░░░░░░░░░░ Select a Command F1-Help ESC-Return to TERMINAL Mode ░░░░░░░░░░
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 14
=================================================================
For example, to get summary help for the Translate Table command
(Alt-A), press Alt-A, and the Translate Table summary help window
will be displayed.
If you pressed F1 by mistake, press ESC to return to the previous
Status Line.
Pressing ESC will exit 99.9% of all windows and QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE functions without making any changes.
UPGRADING FROM A PREVIOUS RELEASE
Please refer to the file README.1ST on the first disk. This
contains specific instructions for upgrading from previous
releases of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS
Certain QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE features are (out of necessity)
implemented via command line parameters and have no terminal mode
or script command equivalents. Command line parameters are not
case sensitive and may be specified in any order.
The following DOS command-line parameters are valid when starting
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE:
m
/HOST
Will invoke the Host Mode immediately after startup. This option
can be used to start an unattended Host system as soon as the
machine is booted, by adding the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE start
command to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
/S=SCRIPT.SCR
Autoexec Script: the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE script file to be
executed immediately upon startup. The script file must be
located in the script directory as specified in Alt-N/D/S or in
the current directory if the Alt-N/D/S field is blank.
/STATS
Shows the technical information while QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is
loading. Such things as: Number of Scroll-back lines, UART
detected and so on.
/VGA=[mode]
Allows users of VGA and EGA cards to switch into a non-standard
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 15
=================================================================
video mode at start-up. As long as your video card allows setting
the AL register to the desired mode, this will do the trick.
/VEGAVGA=[mode]
An Option Specific to the VEGA VGA cards from Video-7 Inc. Allows
setting an alternate text mode (like 132x43) from the command
line. This is different from the normal /VGA= command because the
Video Seven boards have to load the registers in a non-standard
way.
/R
This allows you to restart QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE without being
prompted to send the modem init string if you are already online.
THE STATUS LINE
While in terminal mode, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE displays many of
its operational settings in the Status Line at the bottom of the
screen:
1 2 3 4 5 /-------- 6 --------\ 7
ANSI Offline 38400 8N1 [Home]=Menu FDX 8 LF X B M CP LG . PR 21:25:49
Some of the special characters used in the status line are
unprintable and may cause erratic printer behavior. These
characters were changed to insure proper printing.
The status line is divided into the following areas:
1: The terminal emulation in effect. In the above example, ANSI
emulation is active.
2: The Online/Offline indicator. When connected to another
computer, the word "Online" will be displayed in this area.
When QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is first started, this indicator
should read "Offline". It could also display either "DOORWAY"
or "doorway" if the Alt-= toggle is set ON. The upper case
Doorway means you are Online, while lower case means you are
Offline.
3: The current communication parameters: Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Parity, and Stop Bits. These values will change to reflect
changes made with the Alt-P command, or to reflect the values
defined in the Dialing directory for each number.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 16
=================================================================
4: A short reminder to press the Home key to view the Main Help
Menu, which shows all available commands. Summary help on any
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE command may be obtained directly from
the Main Menu as well.
5: The current Duplex (a.k.a. Echo) state. FDX stands for Full
Duplex and HDX stands for Half Duplex. Refer to the Alt-E
command for a full explanation of Duplex mode.
6: The current state of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Toggles. There are
9 toggles, from left to right:
8 Hi-bit strip toggle. A "7" means that the high bits are
stripped, and an "8" means all bits are used.
LF Add Linefeed Toggle. If "LF", a Linefeed will be added to all
incoming Carriage Returns. If disabled, this area will be
blank.
X XON/XOFF toggle. If "X", Xon/Xoff flow control is active. If
this area is blank, Xon/Xoff flow control is ignored by
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
B Beeps & Bells Toggle (Shown on-screen as a single musical
note). If present, indicates that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will
generate sounds on the PC's speaker when specific conditions
are met. If this is blank, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE produces no
sounds.
M Music Toggle (Shown on-screen as a double musical note). If
present, indicates that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will play ANSI
Music if found. If blank, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will not play
ANSI music.
CP Capture Buffer Toggle. If present, indicates that text is
being captured to a file. If blank, incoming text is not
captured.
LG Session Log Toggle. If present, indicates that the Session
LOG is active. If blank, the session LOG is not active.
^ Scroll-back Toggle (Shown on-screen by an up-arrow). If
present, QMODEM TEST DRIVE is capturing incoming data to the
scroll-back buffer. If blank, the scroll-back feature is not
active.
PR Printer Toggle. If present, screen text is also sent to the
printer.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 17
=================================================================
7: The last item on the Status Line is the System Clock. When
ONLINE, the clock displays Elapsed-Time (the duration of the
call). When OFFLINE, the clock displays the time-of-day.
THE HOME MENU
Pressing the Home key displays the following screen which
describes all available commands:
╒════════════════════════════════ COMMAND MENU ════════════════════════════════╕
│ ─────────────────── BEFORE ─────────────────── ──────── TOGGLES ───────── │
│ Alt-D Phone Book Alt-G Term Emulation Alt-0 Session Log │
│ ─────────────────── DURING ─────────────────── Alt-1 Backspace DEL/^H │
│ Alt-C Clear Screen ^Home Capture File Alt-2 80x25 (EGA/VGA) │
│ Alt-F Execute Script ^End Send BREAK Alt-3 Debug Status Info │
│ Alt-Q QuickLearn PgUp Upload Files Alt-4 80x43/50 (EGA/VGA) │
│ Alt-S Split Screen PgDn Download Files Alt-5 Host Mode │
│ Alt-T Screen Dump Alt-6 Batch Entry Window │
│ . Scroll Back Alt-8 Hi-Bit Strip │
│ ─────────────────── AFTER ──────────────────── Alt-9 Printer Echo │
│ Alt-H Hangup Modem Alt-X Exit Qmodem Alt-B Beeps & Bells │
│ Alt-E Half/Full Duplex │
│ ─────────────────── SETUP ──────────────────── Alt-I Order Information │
│ Alt-A Translate Table Alt-N Configuration Alt-M ANSI Music │
│ Alt-J Function Keys Alt-P Change Baud Rate Alt-U Scroll-back Record │
│ Alt-K Change COM Port Alt-Z XON/XOFF Flow Ctrl │
│ Alt-= DoorWay Mode │
│ ──────────────────── DOS ───────────────────── Alt-- Status Lines │
│ Alt-L Change Drive Alt-V View/Edit File ShTab CR/CRLF Mode │
│ Alt-O Change Directory Alt-W List Directory Alt.─┘ Status Line Info │
│ Alt-R DOS Shell Alt-Y Delete File │
│ │
╘══════════════ Qmodem TEST DRIVE Production Compiled MM/DD/YY ═══════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░ Select a Command F1-Help ESC-Return to TERMINAL Mode ░░░░░░░░░░
The Home Menu is divided into the following areas:
BEFORE Commands you are likely to use before dialing a system
such as setting terminal emulation and getting into the
dialing directory itself.
DURING Commands you are likely to use while online.
AFTER Commands used to end your online session or exit.
SETUP Commands used to change operational parameters.
DOS Commands which interact with your computer, rather than
with the computer you are calling.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 18
=================================================================
TOGGLES Commands that activate or deactivate certain features.
Operating these toggles is usually done by pressing the
corresponding key combination.
Notice that the Terminal Mode status line changes when the Home
Menu is displayed (see above example) As the Home status line
indicates, you can get summary help for any command by pressing
[F1], then the desired command key combination. Pressing [ESC]
returns you to terminal mode.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE updates or replaces the Status Line to
reflect the current environment, the function being performed, or
the command being executed. Check the Status Line often, it may
help you get out of trouble if and when you get stuck!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 19
=================================================================
QINSTALL
Starting QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE for the First Time
If this is your first time, you need to run the program QINSTALL
before you can run QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. This is the
installation program that fine tunes QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Qinstall is started by typing Qinstall and pressing the Enter key
from the DOS prompt.
After the Qinstall opening screen, you are presented with the
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Installation Part 1 screen:
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE INSTALLATION PART 1
The file QMODEM.CNF was not found in the current directory or the directory
pointed to by the Environment variable "QMODEM=", so it is assumed this is
a new installation. A few questions will be asked to determine how Qmodem
should be setup for you. Please follow the directions and this will only
take a few minutes.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Display adapter detected : VGA
Do you have a Color monitor connected ? [Y/N]
Qinstall then examines your hardware and tries to determine which video card you
are using. In the previous example, a VGA card was detected. Other
possibilities include Monochrome (which includes Hercules cards), CGA, EGA and
MCGA. If Qinstall cannot figure out your type of adapter, we sure would like to
hear from you about it.
The next question asks if you have a color monitor attached to your video card.
Monochrome displays may be attached to some color adapters. If this is your
case, reply no to this question.
Setup questions are based on the video adapter in your system. The previous
example applied to EGA/VGA/MCGA adapters. If your system is equipped with a CGA
or Monochrome display, the prompts would have changed:
Display adapter detected : CGA
Press any key to test for video snow > _
Did your screen look fuzzy ? [Y/N] _
Do you have a Color monitor connected ? [Y/N] _
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 20
=================================================================
Early IBM CGA and some CGA clones suffer from snow and flicker when display
memory is accessed. When you press a key, Qinstall will attempt to generate the
snow or flicker on your display. If irregular, fuzzy patterns or dots appeared
on your screen, reply Y to the "Did your screen look fuzzy" question.
Monochrome setups are the easiest. Qinstall simply asks you to press any key
to continue.
NOTE: If this is an upgrade from a previous release, Qmodem will read the
existing QMODEM.CNF and skip these questions.
CONFIGURATION
Configuring QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is simple, whether you are
installing QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE for the first time or upgrading
from a previous release. Seasoned QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE veterans
should read the section on Menu Navigation and Upgrading from a
previous release. First time users should go through the
Installation Section of the manual and ignore the Upgrade
section.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 21
=================================================================
QINSTALL Menu Navigation
The Qinstall Setup Menu will be automatically displayed the first
time QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is started.
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
QMODEM INSTALLATION PART 2
The window above is the "Alt-N Setup Menu". With it, you can customize
almost every part of Qmodem. Go through all of the options now to finish
the installation procedure. When you are through, select Exit/Save to
write out the new configuration file.
Press ENTER to Edit the selected option or open a SubMenu.
Press ESC to abort the changes made or close the SubMenu.
╔═══════════════════╗
║ Option A ║
║ Option B . .──────────────── Selections that are followed by the
║ ╔═════════════════════╗ . character have SubMenus below them.
║ ║ Sub Option B1 ║
╚═║ Sub Option B2 ║
║ Sub Menu Below . ║
╚═════════════════════╝
┌─ The Status Line will always give you help on
│ the option you are changing.
Change the way Qmodem looks to you
The window above is the "Alt-N Setup Menu". With it, you can
customize almost every part of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. Go through
all of the options now to finish the installation procedure. When
you are through, select Exit/Save to write out the new
configuration file.
Press ENTER to Edit the selected option or open a SubMenu. Press
ESC to abort the changes made or close the SubMenu. Selections
that are followed by the . character have SubMenus below them.
The Status Line will always give you help on the option you are
changing.
Qinstall can be started from inside of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE with
the Alt-N command.
The top window is the Alt-N Setup window, which we will refer to
as Setup from here on. Since this is a new installation, it is
invoked automatically. The accompanying text explains how to
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 22
=================================================================
navigate through the Setup Menus.
This text is only shown for first-time installation. Subsequent
calls to Setup only display the Menu Window. As with QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE, you gave the complete Online Help system by pressing
the F1 key!
Items may be selected with two different methods:
1. By pressing the highlighted letter in the desired menu entry,
or
2. By moving the selection bar to the desired item and pressing
ENTER. To move the selection bar, use the cursor keys.
Menu entries followed by a down-pointing arrow have one or more
additional menu levels. When such an entry is selected, another
menu will be displayed from which additional entries or
parameters are configured. Since all Main Setup Window entries
have associated menus, the arrows are omitted.
While in Setup, the status line always displays a brief
description of the currently selected item. If additional
information is needed, press the F1 key for detailed online help.
While changing to an item, pressing ESC restores its original
value. To save the change, press ENTER. Changes to the Setup are
not saved automatically; when done you must use the Exit/Save Top
Menu Option to save all changes in the QMODEM.CNF file.
FIRST TIME SETUP
Now that you can navigate through Setup menus, let's start with
the various setup tasks from left to right. Colors are first...
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘╒═══════════════════╕═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Custom colors . │
│ Blue shades │
│ Purple shades │
│ Red shades │
│ Monochrome shades │
│ LCD Laptop shades │
│ Toggles . │
╘═══════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 23
=================================================================
Alt-N/V Video
The Video Setup option is used to configure QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
screen colors and toggles. You may select one of 5 pre-defined
color combinations, customize the colors to your liking and set
video related Toggles.
The Monochrome and LCD Laptop entries are intended for standard
monochrome displays and Laptop Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)
which can only display shades of gray.
Colors are a cosmetic feature and have no effect on QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE's operation. First-time users should select one of the
predefined color combinations and concentrate on other sections
of the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE setup. Colors may be customized
easily after all other operational parameters.
Alt-N/V/C Custom Colors
Selecting the Custom Colors options yields the following menu:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘╒═══════════════════╕═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Custom colors . │
│╒══ Pick a Field to Color ═══╕
││ Pulldown normal text │
││ Pulldown first letter │
││ Pulldown selection bar │
││ Pulldown window border │
││ Pulldown edit field │
╘│ Window border │
│ Window primary text │
│ Window secondary text │
│ Window Scroll Bar │
│ Screen border │
│ Screen text │
│ Information text │
│ Status Line primary │
│ Status Line secondary │
│ Help border │
│ Help normal text │
│ Help selected xref │
│ Help unselected xref │
╘══════════════ . for more ═╛
This is a Pick List of all the possible fields that can be
customized. You can scroll through the list in several way with
the Arrow keys being the easiest.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 24
=================================================================
When one of the screen elements is selected, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE color selection screen is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘╒═══════════════════╕══════════════╒═════════════ Sample Screen ══════════════╕
│ Custom colors . │ │ Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 │
│ B╒══ Pulldown normal text ══╕ │ ╒════════════════╕╒═══ Help Window ════╕ │
│ P│ │ │ │Field in Edit░░░││ Normal text color │ │
│ R│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │Not in Edit░░░░░││ Selected Xref │ │
│ M│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ ╘════════════════╛│ Unselected Xref │ │
│ L│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │ Highlite text │ │
│ T│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ ╘════════════════════╛ │
╘══│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │AT │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │OK ╒════ Frame Color ═════╕ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │Primary window text │ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │Secondary text │ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │Scroll Bar text │ │
│┌───┐■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ ╘══════════════════════╛ │
││ ■ │■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │
│└───┘■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ ╒═══════ Full Screen Edit ═══════╕ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │ Normal Text │ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ │ Marked Text │ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │ ╘════════════════════════════════╛ │
│ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ │ │Information message text │
│ │ │░░░░ Status Line Primary Secondary ░░░░│
╘══════════════════════════╛ ╘══════════════════════════════════════════╛
ARROWS - Move Indicator ENTER-Accepts ESC-Exit
At the left of the screen is a color chart showing all possible
foreground and background color combinations. To the right is a
sample of all the windows that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE and Qinstall
will display. The top of the left window tells you which
selection you are changing. In the example, the Pulldown Normal
Text is being modified.
To select a color, move the square color selector box in the left
window with the arrow keys. The change is immediately reflected
in the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE mini- screen on the right side of
the display.
Pressing ESC restores the item's original color. To confirm the
color change, press ENTER. All color changes will take effect
immediately.
Color changes must be saved explicitly via the Alt-N Exit/Save
menu option. If the new color settings are not saved, the last
color setup will be restored the next time QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
is started.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 25
=================================================================
Alt-N/V/T Toggles
The Toggles menu lets you set such things as how characters
should be displayed, how windows in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE should
be displayed, and how to handle certain types of incoming data.
The menu looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit
╘╒═══════════════════╕═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
│ Custom colors . │
│ Blue shades │
│ Purple shades │
│ Red shades │
│ Monochrome shades │
│ LCD Laptop shades │
│ Toggles . │
╘══╒════════════════════════╕
│ BIOS video OFF │
│ Linefeed after CR OFF │
│ Snow checking OFF │
│ Growing windows OFF │
│ STatus line ON │
│ Destructive bksp OFF │
│ LIne Wrap ON │
│ Video Restore OFF │
│ Jump Scroll ON │
│ Emulation ANSI │
╘════════════════════════╛
When OFF, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE writes directly to screen memory,
which results in extremely fast screen displays. When ON, all
screen displays are performed via calls to the system's ROM BIOS,
and screen displays are much slower. BIOS Video mode must be ON
when QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operates under DoubleDOS.
This only applies to the text displayed that is received from the
serial port. Qinstall and most windows in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
still write directly to video memory.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is fully DESQview aware. When running
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE under DESQview, set BIOS Video mode to OFF.
With other multi-tasking programs, you should experiment with
this setting to determine the best operating mode.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 26
=================================================================
Alt-N/V/T/L Linefeed after CR
Setting this ON causes QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to add a linefeed
(LF) character after every carriage return (CR) character. This
may be needed if text lines seem to overwrite the previous line
on the screen. This toggle can be changed with the Shift-Tab
command.
Alt-N/V/T/S Snow Checking
Older CGA display adapters (and some CGA clones) may exhibit
"snow" when video memory is accessed. If this is the case, set
this toggle to ON. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will use a different
memory access method which may help alleviate the problem. This
toggle is not used if your system is equipped with an MDA, EGA,
or VGA display.
While running under DESQview, you can set this to OFF for
slightly improved display speed.
Alt-N/V/T/G Growing Windows
Controls the method used to display windows on screen. When ON,
windows will grow or explode onto the screen. When OFF, windows
will pop onto the screen instantly.
Alt-N/V/T/T Status Line
This toggle controls displaying of the status line (the last line
of the physical screen). When OFF, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
status line is not displayed and the last screen line is
available for incoming text display. When ON (the default), the
status line is used to display the status of the Terminal mode
and options of various command windows.
The Screen will clear when this is toggled ON and OFF.
Alt-N/V/T/D Destructive Backspace
This controls whether or not the character to the left of the
cursor is erased when a Backspace character (^H or DEL) is
received. When ON, the character is erased before the cursor is
moved to the left. When OFF, the cursor moves leaving the
character to the left untouched.
Alt-N/V/T/I Line Wrap
This controls how the cursor reacts when it writes a character in
the last column on the screen (usually column 80). When set ON,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 27
=================================================================
the cursor moves the next line down, performing a Line Feed if
the cursor was on the last line on the screen. When set OFF, the
cursor writes the character in the last column, but does not
advance to the next line.
Alt-N/V/T/V Video Restore
When set ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will attempt to restore the
original mode of your video card to the settings prior to
starting QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. If you want to leave the last
video mode that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is using active upon exit,
set this to OFF. Alt-N/V/T/J Jump Scroll
This allows changing the method used to scroll the screen. If you
have a CGA card (the ones that cause snow), you may want to set
this OFF to see if the screen scrolls more smoothly. The default
mode is ON to be compatible with the previous releases of QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Alt-N/V/T/E Emulation
This is the default terminal emulation mode used by QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE. When the cursor is located in this field, pressing
ENTER presents a submenu with the list of available emulations.
Use the up and down arrow keys to select the emulation you need
and press ENTER.
Alt-N/M Modem
Modem-dependent settings affect the interaction between QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE, your computer, and your modem. If you use a
2400bps Hayes Smartmodem (or compatible) attached to COM1, most
of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's default modem parameters are correct.
However, the modem setup must be reviewed to insure that specific
parameters are set properly.
Selecting the Alt-N Modem option yields the following menu:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
│ Toggles . │
╘════════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 28
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/C Communications Parameters
These hardware parameters control the operation of the
communication port and its interaction with the modem.
When the Communication parameters option is selected, the
following menu is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Mo╒═════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Po│ A - Default baud rate 2400 │
│ Qu│ B - Default data bits 8 │
│ To│ C - Default parity None │
╘═══│ D - Default stop bits 1 │
│ E - Command before baud change ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ F - Command after baud change ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ G - Cycle delay 10 │
│ H - Timeout delay 60 │
│ I - Modem command delay 10 │
│ J - Serial port 1 │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/M/C/A Default Baud Rate
The Baud Rate is the speed at which the COM port operates and
should match the modem's speed. Supported speeds are 110, 300,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200. The
default baud rate is 2400.
NOTE: With many error-correcting and high-speed modems, the COM
speed can be set higher than the modem's nominal communications
speed. For example, the USR Courier HST modem, rated at 9600
baud, supports a COM speed of 38400 baud. Consult your modem
manual for additional information on supported COM speeds.
Alt-N/M/C/B Default Data Bits
Characters transmitted over phone lines are made up of data bits.
For systems which support text and binary program file transfers
(IE., most PC- based BBS systems), 8 data bits are required. When
communicating with mainframe or minicomputer-based systems, 7
data bits is often used. Supported settings are 7 and 8. This
setting must match that of the software operating on the remote
computer.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 29
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/C/C Default Parity
Parity is used to insure the validity of the data being
transmitted and received. Parity values are None, Odd, Even, Mark
and Space. This value must match that used by the computer being
called. Most BBS's use None (no parity), the default value.
Alt-N/M/C/D Default Stop Bits
Stop bits are generated by the UART to isolate transmitted
characters. The majority of computer systems require 1 stop bit,
the default value. Supported values include 1 and 2. As with
other parameters, this value must match the other computer's
setting.
Alt-N/M/C/E Command Before Baud Change
This string is sent to the modem before the serial port speed is
changed. The default value is blank. Non-standard modems may
require a different value.
Alt-N/M/C/F Command After Baud Change
This string is sent to the modem after the serial port speed is
changed. The default value is blank. Non-standard modems may
require a different value.
Alt-N/M/C/G Cycle Delay
The Cycle Delay is the number of seconds QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
waits after an unsuccessful dial (IE., a BUSY signal) before
trying the next number in the dialing queue (or the same number
again). The default value is 10 seconds.
Alt-N/M/C/H Timeout Delay
The Timeout Delay is the number of seconds QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
waits for a connection after dialing a number. When this period
has expired, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will instruct the modem to
hang up. The default value is 60 seconds.
Most modems feature an internal timeout delay. When dialing, the
shortest delay will prevail. Make sure that your modem's internal
timeout value is at least equal to the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
setting. In Hayes and compatible modems, the command ATS7=60 will
set the modem's internal delay to 60 seconds. Increasing the
modem's own timeout value allows total control over the dialing
process.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 30
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/C/I Modem Command delay
This is the delay, in milliseconds (1000 = 1 second) inserted
between characters sent to the modem while it is OFFLINE. The
default value is 0. Some high-speed modems may require a non-zero
value if commands are not recognized, or if the modem does not
return an OK acknowledgment. The most common symptoms are the
modem's lack of an OK response when first initialized, or the
modem's inability to dial.
Alt-N/M/C/J Serial Port
This is the port number (1-8) to which the modem is attached. The
default is port 1. For port addresses higher than 2 be sure to
configure the Base address and IRQ in the Alt-N/M/P menu.
The default Speed, Parity, Data bits and Stop bits values are not
fixed. Defaults can be overridden in each dialing directory entry
to match the settings of the remote computer.
Alt-N/M/M Modem Commands
Modem commands define the text of messages sent to the modem to
cause a specific action (IE., dial, hang up), or received from
the modem to acknowledge a command (OK, ERROR), or reflect a
specific condition (BUSY, CONNECT, NO CARRIER).
When the Modem Commands option is selected, the following menu is
displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Po╒════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Qu│ Initialization Command ATE1Q0X1V1S7=60^M░░░░░░░ │
│ To│ Prefix Dial Command ATDT░░░░░░░░░░ │
╘═══│ Suffix Dial Command ^M░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Connect Message CONNECT░░░░░░░ │
│ 1st Error Message NO CARRIER░░░░ │
│ 2nd Error Message BUSY░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ 3rd Error Message NO DIAL TONE░░ │
│ 4th Error Message VOICE░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Abort Dial Command ^M░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Hangup Command ^~^~^~+++^~^~^~ATH^M░░ │
│ Redial Cancel Text RING░░░░░░░░░░ │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 31
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/M/I Initialization Command
Default: AT E1 Q0 M1 X1 V1 S7=60^M
This command resets Hayes and compatible modems to their standard
operating parameters. This command may vary depending on the
modem being used; consult the modem manual.
Alt-N/M/M/P Prefix Dial Command
Default: ATDT
This command is used to tone-dial a number on Hayes and
compatible modems. It is sent to the modem immediately before the
telephone number to be dialed. For pulse-dialing, change this to
ATDP.
The dialing commands may vary depending on your modem brand.
Consult the modem manual for additional information. If your
modem requires a 150 millisecond BREAK signal for dialing, change
this command to the word BREAK.
Adding *70 after the ATDT dial command can be used to disable
call-waiting on some tone-dialing phone systems. Adding 1170
after the ATDP dial command can be used to disable call-waiting
on some pulse-dialing phone systems. Check with your phone
company to see if these features are supported.
Alt-N/M/M/S Suffix Dial Command
Default: ^M
This string immediately follows the number to be dialed. Should
your modem require a different End-of-Command character, you
should place it here.
Alt-N/M/M/C Connect Message
Default: CONNECT
The message returned by the modem when a successful connection
has been established. Most modems will also return the connect
speed as part of the message, IE: CONNECT 2400. Do not include a
speed value as part of this message. Doing so will prevent a
connection if the baud rate is different from the one you
entered.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 32
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/M/1 Error Message 1
Alt-N/M/M/2 Error Message 2
Alt-N/M/M/3 Error Message 3
Alt-N/M/M/4 Error Message 4
Defaults: BUSY
NO CARRIER
NO DIAL TONE
NO CONNECT
These error messages are returned by the modem when the
connection could not be established. Your modem may return
different messages; refer to the manual for additional
information.
Many modems can be set to return Numeric result codes rather than
Verbose result codes. Although either can be used, you should use
the more descriptive verbose messages. If the modem is set to
return numeric codes, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will not be able to
determine the connect speed.
Alt-N/M/M/A Abort Dial Command
Default: ^M
This string will be sent to the modem when a dial request is to
be canceled (IE: pressing ESC from the dialing directory screen
while dialing is in progress). Most modems accept ^M. If the
modem supports dropping DTR as a disconnect method, the word DTR
(Data Terminal Ready)should be entered in this field. Consult the
modem manual for information on this feature.
Alt-N/M/M/H Hangup Command
Default: ^~^~^~+++^~^~^~ATH0^M
This command will cause Hayes and compatible modem to hang up.
Each ^~ pair causes a 1/2-second delay. In the example above, the
+++ modem escape sequence is preceded and followed by a 1.5
second delay. This delay, referred to as escape guard time, is
required for the modem to recognize the escape sequence and
switch to command mode. The ATH0^M command then instructs the
modem to go on-hook (hang up).
For modems which recognize dropping of the DTR signal as a
disconnect method, specify the word DTR in this field. To hang
up, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE disables the DTR signal, pauses, and
then re-establishes it. This hardware-only method, if supported
by your modem, is far more reliable than using a modem software
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 33
=================================================================
command which could easily fail (IE., because of line noise). The
reason the DTR method is not the default is, unfortunately, not
all modems support DTR disconnect control.
Specifying BREAK will send the modem BREAK signal for 150
milliseconds. Some modems attached to PBX (Public Board eXchange,
a.k.a. switchboard) require a BREAK in order to disconnect a
call.
Alt-N/M/M/R Redial Hangup Text
Default: RING
This message text, when received, will cause QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE to stop dialing immediately. If you are sharing a voice
line with your modem, this allows you to answer the phone
personally. If your modem is connected to its own dedicated phone
line, this field can be left blank.
Alt-N/M/P Port Addresses
Port addresses are hardware-dependent values which define the
computer's communications ports. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE allows you
to define up to eight communication ports (COM1 through COM8).
Two COM ports (COM1 and COM2) are standard for most IBM PC, XT,
AT, PS/2 and compatible machines. This does not mean that all
machines have both ports. These are optional. You still have to
verify which ports you have available.
An internal modem takes up a COM port. If you have two ports in
your machine (COM1 and COM2), you CANNOT set the internal modem
to either COM1 or COM2 and expect it to work. You should set the
internal modem to the first available port. (in this example, it
should be configured for COM3)
Because it is possible to install an internal modem or additional
serial port so that it shares an IRQ with another device, you
should declare all the installed serial ports in QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE. This allows QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to disable other ports
that may conflict with the port you are trying to use. If a port
is disabled, it will be enabled if you exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
or select another port with Alt-K.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 34
=================================================================
When the Port Address option is selected, the following menu will
be displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Qu╒═════════════════════╕ │
│ To│ A - COM1 Base 03F8 │ │
╘═══│ B - COM2 Base 02F8 │══╛
│ C - COM3 Base 0000 │
│ D - COM4 Base 0000 │
│ E - COM5 Base 0000 │
│ F - COM6 Base 0000 │
│ G - COM7 Base 0000 │
│ H - COM8 Base 0000 │
│ I - COM1 IRQ 4 │
│ J - COM2 IRQ 3 │
│ K - COM3 IRQ 0 │
│ L - COM4 IRQ 0 │
│ M - COM5 IRQ 0 │
│ N - COM6 IRQ 0 │
│ O - COM7 IRQ 0 │
│ P - COM8 IRQ 0 │
╘═════════════════════╛
Alt-N/M/P/ A-H COMx Base Address
These are the computer's COM port hardware addresses. QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE supports default assignments for two serial ports,
COM1: and COM2:. For PC/XT/AT and compatibles equipped with
IBM-standard adapters, the port address and IRQ assignments need
not be changed.
Non-PS/2 computers can address COM3: through COM8:. Internal
modems usually have the following Base Address assignments:
Port Base IRQ
Number Address
COM3 3E8 4
COM4 2E8 3
Be sure to read your manual that comes with your internal modem
to verify these setting.
CAUTION: If you intend to install an internal modem as COM3 or
COM4, and it is going in a computer that is not EISA or MC
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 35
=================================================================
bussed, then try to set the IRQ to a value other than 4 or 3. On
an AT, try 5 or 2. Not all internal modems allow you to change
the IRQ and this may not apply to you. If you cannot set an IRQ
other than 4 or 3, then be aware that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will
disable COM1 or COM2 while you are using the modem. (IE: if you
have a serial Mouse on COM1 and your internal modem is set for
COM3, then the mouse will be disabled while in QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE.
IBM PS/2 computers also support COM3: through COM8: with the
following assignments:
Port Base IRQ
Number Address
COM3 3220 3
COM4 3228 3
COM5 4220 3
COM6 4228 3
COM7 5220 3
COM8 5228 3
On non-PS/2 machines, port assignments above COM2 are
non-standard. Refer to the adapter or internal modem's
documentation for specific hardware information.
Alt-N/M/P/ I-P COMx IRQ
The IRQ (Interrupt ReQuest) value must be known for the serial
ports to be accessed. When specifying Base addresses for
non-standard COM ports, you must also set the correct IRQ values.
Failure to set the IRQ will prevent QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE from
accessing the COM port and will make communications impossible.
(You also stand a good chance of locking up your computer!
Refer to the previous example for setting up a PS/2 COM3: or
COM4: board.
Alt-N/M/Q Quick Modem Config
This is probably the single most wanted feature in a
communication program... A method to quickly configure your new
modem to work! It's not like the old days where we had just a
handful of modem commands and everybody knew them by heart.
Now we have High-Speed modems with things like MNP and V.32 and
V.42 and Speed Buffering and on and on and so forth. Each modem
maker that enhanced upon the Hayes standard had to come up with
their own new commands. To add to the confusion, some have the
same command(s), but mean different things to different modems!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 36
=================================================================
Enter Quick Modem Config! It takes the worry and confusion out of
setting up your complex modem. Everything in the modem and QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE is setup all at once with a minimum of user
intervention. Like the commercial said, "Set it, and forget it."
The heart of Quick Modem Config (herein called QMC) is the
QMODEM.MDF file. This is the Modem Definition File that QMC uses
to configure your modem and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. As new modems
are added to the MDF file, we post the new version on our BBS.
The QMC window looks something like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
╒══════════ Pick a modem to install ══════════╕
│ Anchor 2400i Internal Half-card │
│ ATI 2400etc (non V.42) │
│ Cermetek INFO-MATE 212A │
│ Everex 12e External (EV-936) │
│ Everex 24e External (EV-945) │
│ Everex Evercom 24+ MNP │
│ Fastcomm FDX 2424 (MNP Class-5) │
│ Fastcomm FDX 2496 │
│ Fastcomm FDX 9696 (V.32 & MNP-5) │
│ Generic 1200 Baud Hayes clone │
│ Generic 1200 Baud Hayes clone (switchless) │
│ Generic 2400 baud Hayes clone │
│ Generic 2400 Baud Hayes clone (switchless) │
│ Hayes SmartModem 1200 External │
│ Hayes SmartModem 1200B Full Card Internal │
╘═══════════════════════════════ . for more ═╛
Your list of modems may differ -- more modem types may have been
added since this manual went to print.
This is another Pick List. You move the Scrollbar to highlight
your modem from the list and press ENTER. If your modem does not
appear in the list, call us. We may have added it to the MDF file
and have it posted for download. In the meantime, you can
probably use one of the Generic entries to get you going.
Depending on the modem, there are up to 4 different windows that
may pop up during the process.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 37
=================================================================
1. Speed Detection.
2. Hardware Notes.
3. Modem Init Commands.
4. Additional Notes.
Just follow the directions in each window as it is displayed.
Ok, your modem is in the list, and you want to get going! Let's
say you have a MultiTech MT224 EH7 external and have selected it.
The screen will look something like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
╒════ Hardware notes for MultiTech MultiModem MT224EH7 (MNP 7) ═════╕
│ Switch Settings on the Bottom of the modem: │
│ 4 Switch Bank 1 2 3 4 │
│ D U D D │
│ 8 Switch Bank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 │
│ U U D U D U U D │
│ │
│ Jumpers that need to be changed -inside- the modem: │
│ CTS/RTS: toward the back of the modem. │
│ ( Tap any key to continue ) │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
If you get a Hardware Notes window (like above), follow the
directions. Do not skip any steps! There is always a reason for
moving jumpers or switches.
After you have done what is asked, just tap any key to continue.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 38
=================================================================
The MultiTech then gets the next window:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
╒═════════════════ Modem Init Commands being sent ══════════════════╕
│AT$A0&B0&BS0&C1$D0&D2$F1^M │
│AT&G0#L0$MI0&M0$R1&R1&S1^M │
│ATB1E1M1Q0R0V1X4&Q0^M │
│AT&E1&E4&E8&E10&E13&E15^M │
│AT$MB2400$SB19200$BA0&W0^M │
│Send these commands to the modem [Y/N] ? _ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
The Modem Init Commands window contains a list of modem commands
that to be sent to the modem. Just in case, there is a prompt to
confirm the sending of these commands. 99.9% of all users should
answer Y to this prompt. Besides, failure to do so will not
guarantee correct operation in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
You should verity that the modem responds OK to each line that is
displayed. Like this:
╒═════════════════ Modem Init Commands being sent ══════════════════╕
│AT$A0&B0&BS0&C1$D0&D2$F1 │
│OK │
│AT&G0#L0$MI0&M0$R1&R1&S1 │
│OK │
│ATB1E1M1Q0R0V1X4&Q0 │
│OK │
│AT&E1&E4&E8&E10&E13&E15 │
│OK │
│AT$MB2400$SB19200$BA0&W0 │
│OK │
│ ( Tap any key to continue ) │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 39
=================================================================
And finally, the Additional Notes window:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
╒════════════════════════ Additional notes ═════════════════════════╕
│ The 224EH7 is now configured for 19200 baud operation. Be sure │
│ to set all your dialing directory entries to 19200 to get the │
│ best speed on all calls. Note: Data compression was enabled with │
│ the &E15 command. Be sure to read your modem manual and double- │
│ check the setup. Remember to Exit/Save to save these changes! │
│ ( Tap any key to continue ) │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
This is a list of parting comments that are specific to your
particular modem. You should at least read it. TA-DA! Your modem
and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE are now set!
Alt-N/M/T Toggles
These Toggles are specific to modem operations. The menu looks
like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘════╒════════════════════════════╕════════════════════════════════════════════╛
│ Communication Parameters . │
│ Modem Commands . │
│ Port Addresses . │
│ Quick Modem Config! . │
│ Toggles . │
╘═══╒══════════════════════════╕
│ Xon/Xoff flow ON │
│ CTS/RTS flow ON │
│ CTS when Writing OFF │
│ FIFO during Shell OFF │
│ Lock DTE Baud Rate ON │
│ High Speed Xmit ON │
│ 16550 UART Enable ON │
│ Init ignores CD OFF │
╘══════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 40
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/T/X Xon/Xoff Flow Control
Xon/Xoff is a software flow control protocol used during normal
text and ASCII transmissions. This toggle can also be changed
from terminal mode with the Alt-Z command.
XOFF and XON are ^S (Ctrl-S) and ^Q (Ctrl-Q) characters,
respectively. Most BBS and mainframe systems use XOFF and XON as
a method of pacing text data transmissions. If the XON/XOFF
toggle is ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will send the XOFF character
when its receive buffer is almost full, and will display the
following message on the Status line:
Buffer FULL - Keyboard Input Suspended - Please Wait
As text is displayed, the receive buffer empties and can accept
more data. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE then sends the XON character to
resume transmission and restores the normal status line.
The XON/XOFF software flow control is not used during Binary file
transfer protocols.
Alt-N/M/T/C CTS/RTS Flow Control
When set to ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE implements hardware
handshaking between the modem and computer. This is required for
high-speed and error-correcting modems. Since additional signals
are required to implement hardware handshaking, make sure that
your external modem cable (if any) supports the CTS and RTS
signal lines.
Alt-N/M/T/W CTS when Writing
This toggles controls CTS/RTS hardware flow control when writing
to disk during a binary file download. When this toggle is OFF,
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE drops the RTS signal while writing data to
the disk, and raises RTS after the data has been written.
When this toggle is ON, the RTS signal remains on during the disk
writes. This allows QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to overlap disk and
serial port activity while downloading data on systems equipped
with hardware-handshaking modems (IE, high-speed or MNP modems).
For this option to work properly, the Alt-N/M/T/C flag must be
ON.
Normally, the RTS (Request To Send) signal line is dropped low
(turned off) whenever a block of data is being written to disk.
This stops the modem from sending data to the computer during
that time, which could cause data loss due to a missed interrupt.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 41
=================================================================
If your computer and hard disk are fast enough, you can gain a
small but measurable increase in download speed by using this
option.
If you are downloading across a network to a file server drive,
it is strongly recommended that you do NOT use this option.
Alt-N/M/T/F FIFO during Shell
This toggle only applies to systems with serial adapters equipped
with a 16550 or 16550A UART, which feature a First-In, First-Out
(FIFO) data buffer. When ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE leaves the
16550/16550A UART in FIFO mode. When OFF, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
disables the FIFO buffer, and the 16550x UART runs in 16450
compatibility mode.
Some external transfer protocols may require this toggle to be
OFF for correct operation. If your external transfer program
aborts immediately upon startup, try setting this to OFF and
execute the external again.
This toggle only works if QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE detects the
16550/16550A UART in your system at startup.
In testing QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, FIFO buffer operation improved
performance in systems running under DesqView and equipped with
high-speed modems.
Problems may occur when upgrading from an 8250 or 16450 UART to
the newer 16550/16550A chips. While they are pin-compatible, the
16550 series are a superset of the older chips and require
additional connections not used in the older components. Some
serial adapters made specifically for the older chips may not be
able to operate properly with the newer chips.
Alt-N/M/T/L Lock DTE Baud Rate
When set to OFF, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will set the serial port
speed to the connect speed identified in the modem's CONNECT
message. When ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE maintains the serial port
speed defined in the phone book entry being dialed.
Alt-N/M/T/H High Speed Xmit
When set ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE uses an interrupt driven
transmit routine for better performance. When set OFF, a "brute
force" method of sending data is used (and as such, is a tad
slower). Some UART-CPU combinations may not be able to handle the
faster ON mode and you should leave this set OFF.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 42
=================================================================
Alt-N/M/T/1 16550 UART Enable
When set ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE enables the 16550 (and 16550A)
FIFO Buffer for both transmit and receive. We can't imagine why
you would want to disable this feature if you have the 16550, but
here is the toggle anyway.
Alt-N/M/T/I Init Ignores CD
When set ON, the Modem Init String (Alt-N/M/M/I) will be sent on
startup regardless of the detection of a Carrier. Some modems
always default to reporting Carrier Detected (CD) until told to
report the true state of carrier. Unfortunately, this causes a
catch-22. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE paused asking whether or not to
send the Modem Init if Carrier was present, and the Modem Init
String may have a command to override this. If you have such a
modem, you will surely appreciate this switch!
Alt-N/D Directories
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE directories are defined in the Directories
Menu. When selected, the following window is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘══════════════╒═════════════════════════════════════════════╕═════════════════╛
│ Upload D:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Download D:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Scripts D:\QMODEM\SCRIPTS\░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ SWAP D:\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ 1st Batch D:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ 2nd Batch D:\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ 3rd Batch D:\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ AltW Pick D:\DL\*.*░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════╛
Note that all the fields in this menu are added and edited
manually, following the procedures outlined earlier in this
section.
Alt-N/D/U Upload
The default drive:\directory which will be searched for files
which are uploaded to the remote computer. If this field is left
blank, the current directory will be searched. This directory
will be displayed in the file allocation window following the
PgUp upload command for non-batch protocols. If you exchange many
files with remote computers, you may want to assign the same
directory for uploads and downloads.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 43
=================================================================
Alt-N/D/D Download
The default drive:\directory into which downloaded files will be
stored. If this field is left blank, files will be stored into
the current directory. This directory will be displayed in the
file allocation window following the PgDn download command. If
you exchange many files with remote computers, you may want to
assign the same directory for uploads and downloads.
Alt-N/D/S Scripts
The drive:\directory path which will be searched for all QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE script files. If this directory is not defined
correctly, scripts files will not be accessible.
Alt-N/D/W SWAP
The drive:\directory path where the Shell to DOS will write a
SWAP file if there is insufficient EMS memory, or EMS has been
disabled (via Alt-N/O/R/E). If left blank, then the current
drive:\directory will be used.
The filename created is called QMODEM.$$$ and is marked
Read-Only/Hidden. This is to remove temptation to delete the file
while shelled to DOS. Doing so will likely cause a lockup.
Alt-N/D/1 1st Batch
Alt-N/D/2 2nd Batch
Alt-N/D/3 3rd Batch
These three drive:\directories are the defaults for the Alt-6,
Batch Entry Window. This is to save time if you are always doing
Batch Uploads from the same directory or directories. For more
information on how they are used, refer to the Alt-6 command.
Alt-N/D/A Alt-W Pick
This is the default drive:\directory\picture-mask for the Alt-W
command. You can set the default to your download directory, your
word processor documents directory or even your spreadsheet WKS
directory.
An example might be: C:\WORD\DOCS\*.DOC
The above are all DEFAULT directories. Uploads, downloads, and
script commands all use the standard File Allocation Window (FAW)
which allows directory specifications to be changed before the
commands are executed.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 44
=================================================================
The Batch directories can also be overridden in the Batch Entry
Window (BEW) at runtime.
Alt-N/H Host
If you plan on using QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's Host Mode, be sure
to read the Host documentation section completely. When the Host
option is selected, the following menu is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════╒═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╕════════════╛
│ Type of System OPEN │
│ Download Dir ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Upload Dir ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Maximum Time 60 │
│ DOS Password PASSWORD │
│ Shutdown Password PASSWORD │
│ Init Command ATE1Q0V1M1H0S0=0^M░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Answer Command ATA^M░░░░░░░░░ │
│ OK Message OK░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Ring Detect RING░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Busy Command ATM0H1^M░░░░░░ │
│ # Rings & Answer 1 │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
The QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Host mode operates as a mini Bulletin
Board System, complete with electronic messages, sysop chat, and
file transfer capabilities.
Alt-N/H/T Type of System
Press ENTER to cycle through the 3 possible settings: OPEN,
CLOSED and CALLBACK.
An OPEN system is easiest to setup and get running. As new
callers log in, the Host Password (.PWD) file is automatically
updated. All new users are assigned a security level of 0 (zero).
In a CLOSED system, authorized callers' names and passwords must
be defined in the Password file before callers are given access.
If the caller's name is not on file, the Host issues a polite
"Sorry, this is a closed system" message and hangs up.
CALLBACK mode is similar to a CLOSED system in that it requires
the callers' name and passwords to be in the Password file. In
addition, CALLBACK requires that the callers' DATA Phone Number
also be on file. When callers log on successfully, they will be
instructed to hang up and place their modem into Auto-Answer
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 45
=================================================================
mode. The Host will then hang up and immediately dial the
caller's data phone number. CALLBACK is a very secure system
since it insures that all communications originate from known
locations.
Alt-N/H/D Download Dir
This is the Host Mode equivalent of the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
default download directory. Any valid DOS directory may be
entered in this field. All files available for download from the
Host must be stored in this directory. The Host "File List"
command will produce a list of the files in this directory.
Example: C:\QMODEM\HOSTDIR\
Alt-N/H/U Upload Dir
This is the Host equivalent of the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE default
upload directory. Any valid DOS directory may be entered in this
field. All uploaded files will be stored into this directory. If
the Upload and Download directories are the same, all uploaded
files become public and are available for download.
Example: C:\QMODEM\HOSTDIR\UPLOADS\
Alt-N/H/M Maximum Time
This defines the maximum time allowed per call, in minutes. The
default value is 60 minutes, or 1 hour. The maximum time allowed
is 999 minutes (16 hours 39 minutes).
Alt-N/H/O DOS Password
The password required to "Drop to DOS" from remote. If this field
is left blank, all callers may drop to DOS.
Alt-N/H/S Shutdown Password
Used to restrict access to the Host Shutdown command. It is
strongly recommended that the Shutdown Password be unique and
given out only to your most trusted friends. If the correct
password is entered, the system hangs up immediately and Host
mode is terminated.
Alt-N/H/I Init Command
This command string is sent to the modem each time Host mode is
initialized and after each call. The Host Initialization string
should set Verbose result codes (Q0V1), no Auto-Answer (S0=0),
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 46
=================================================================
and on hook waiting for call (H0). The commands in parentheses
are valid for Hayes and compatible modems.
Alt-N/H/A Answer Command
The Answer Command string is sent to the modem when an incoming
call (RING) is detected. For Hayes and compatible modems, use the
"ATA^M" command.
Alt-N/H/K OK Message
The modem returns an "OK" message when the last command was
received and executed successfully. For Hayes and compatible
modems, use "OK". For modems which do not return a response to
the Initialization command, leave this field blank.
Alt-N/H/R Ring Detect
When an incoming call is detected by the modem, it returns a
special "Ring Detect" message. For Hayes and compatible modems,
this is the word "RING". When the ring detect message is
received, the Host sends the Answer Command to the modem.
Alt-N/H/B Busy Command
This allows you to place the modem Off-hook when you log in as
the local Sysop. Your phone line will return a busy signal
preventing callers from connecting to the host system.
Alt-N/H/# # Rings and Answer
This is exactly what it sounds like. The Answer command is sent
after it received this many Ring Detect message. In layman terms,
it counts the number of RINGS and then answers.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 47
=================================================================
Alt-N/P Protocols
When selecting the Protocols option, the following menu is
displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════╒═══════════════════╕════════════════════════╛
│ 0 - │
│ 1 - │
│ 2 - │
│ 3 - │
│ 4 - │
│ 5 - │
│ 6 - │
│ 7 - │
│ 8 - │
│ 9 - │
│ ASCII Options . │
│ Toggles . │
╘═══════════════════╛
The Protocols section allows you to customize QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE by adding additional external transfer protocols. These
protocols can then be called from an upload or download and used
as if it were built into QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. The ASCII Options
are used for customizing the built-in ASCII transfer protocol.
The Toggles menu handles Internal transfer protocol specifics.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 48
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/0-9 Protocol Revisions
External protocols must be defined in numerical order; with no
blanks between. When selecting a number from 0 to 9, the Protocol
Definition window will be displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════╒═══════════════════╕════════════════════════╛
│ 0 - │
╒═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Select character ░ │
│ Protocol ░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Upload BAT ░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Download BAT ░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Filename Prompt . │
╘═════════════════════════════════╛
│ 8 - │
│ 9 - │
│ ASCII Options . │
│ Toggles . │
╘═══════════════════╛
The following fields must be defined for each external protocol:
Alt-N/P/x/S Select Character
The letter or digit used to select this protocol for a file
transfer.
Characters A,X,C,R,O,Y,F,G and Z are internal protocol
definitions. If you define an external protocol with one of these
letters, it will disable the internal protocol.
Alt-N/P/x/P Protocol
The written name of the protocol as it will appear in the
upload/download Protocol Selection Window.
Alt-N/P/x/U Upload BAT
The name of the upload batch file for the external protocol. In
addition, be aware that four batch file parameters are passed as
%1, %2, %3, and %4.
%1 Serial Port speed. (Computer to Modem)
%2 Serial Port # (Current COM Port number)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 49
=================================================================
%3 Connect MSG speed (as reported by Modem, CONNECT xxxxx)
%4 Filename (if required. otherwise blank)
Alt-N/P/x/D Download BAT
The name of the download batch file for the external protocol.
The same batch file parameters that are passed in the Upload
Batch file are also passed to the Download Bat file.
Alt-N/P/x/F Filename Prompt
Specify "N" for external protocols which include filename as part
of the transferred data (IE, Zmodem), and "Y" for protocols which
must know the name of the file being received. When "Y" is
specified, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE passes the filename to the
download batch file as the 4th command-line parameter (%4).
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE passes the COM Speed, Serial Port #,
current DTE Baud rate and the optional Filename to the protocol
batch file as parameters %1, %2, %3 and %4 respectively.
Installing an external protocol
Because of their changing nature, and to insure that you use the
latest versions, external protocol drivers are not distributed
with QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. We will use Zmodem as an example to
illustrate the various steps required in installing an external
protocol.
Files you will need:
1. The DSZ.COM program. Usually found on most BBS's as
DSZmmdd.ARC. "mmdd" represent the release date of the current
release.
In the case of DSZ, new releases can appear on a daily or
weekly basis; the one you downloaded today may be obsolete
tomorrow.
2. The RZ.BAT (Receive Zmodem) batch file, used for Zmodem
downloads.
3. The SZ.BAT (Send Zmodem) batch file, used for Zmodem
downloads.
4. The DSZ.DOC documentation file without which you will be
lost.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 50
=================================================================
You may now select the first unassigned entry in the Alt-N/P
menu. The Revise window will be displayed. Edit the fields to
make the above example.
Next, edit the RZ.BAT file as follows, using the QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE Internal Editor (or your own favorite):
Echo OFF
DSZ port %2 handshake on rz c:\qmodem\download
The download directory specified in the DSZ command line should
match the download directory defined in the Alt-N/D/D setup menu.
If none is specified, the file will be saved in the current
directory.
Edit the SZ.BAT file as follows:
Echo OFF DSZ port %2 handshake on sz %4
One last step... Make sure the DSZ.COM program is in your QMODEM
directory or in a directory in the DOS PATH= so it is accessible
by QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Installation of other external protocols is similar. Refer to the
protocol documentation to insure that upload and download batch
file commands are coded correctly.
Alt-N/P/A ASCII Options
The ASCII Options are used to define the parameter which control
ASCII (text) file transfers.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 51
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/A/R ASCII Receive
When you select the ASCII Receive option, the following menu is
displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════╒═══════════════════╕════════════════════════╛
│ 0 - │
│ 1 - │
│ 2 - │
│ 3 - │
│ 4 - │
│ 5 - │
│ 6 - │
│ 7 - ╒════════════╕
│ 8 - │ Receive . │
│ 9 -╒════════════════════════════════════╕
│ ASC│ Use INPUT Translate Table OFF │
│ Tog│ Carriage Return Handling NONE │
╘════│ LineFeed Handling NONE │
╘════════════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/P/A/R/U Use INPUT Translate Table
When ON, all incoming data will be translated. Translation
criteria are defined in the Alt-A INPUT Translate Table. If this
parameter is OFF, the data is not translated and is received
exactly as it was sent.
Alt-N/P/A/R/C Carriage Return Handling
This option has three setting:
No special treatment of the CR. (Decimal 13) STRIP All CR's are
removed from the file as it is saved. ADD LF Adds a trailing LF
(Decimal 10) after each CR.
Alt-N/P/A/R/L LineFeed Handling
This option also has three settings:
NONE No special treatment of LF. (Decimal 10)
STRIP All LF's are removed from the file as it is saved.
ADD CR Adds a CR (Decimal 13) before each LF.
Example: Lines of data sent by a Mainframe end with a single LF
(linefeed). You wish to save the data to a file and edit it with
an editor or word processor. In this case, a carriage return
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 52
=================================================================
character should be added in front of each trailing LF and the
ASCII receive options should be set as follows:
╒════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Use INPUT Translate Table OFF │
│ Carriage Return Handling NONE │
│ LineFeed Handling ADD CR │
╘════════════════════════════════════╛
If the text lines ended with CR/CR/LF, you would set the
following options:
╒════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Use INPUT Translate Table OFF │
│ Carriage Return Handling STRIP │
│ LineFeed Handling ADD CR │
╘════════════════════════════════════╛
The above options will remove (strip) both incoming CR, and add a
leading CR to each LF (exactly what the doctor ordered!)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 53
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/A/T ASCII Transmit
When the ASCII Transmit options is selected, the following menu
is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════╒═══════════════════╕════════════════════════╛
│ 0 - │
│ 1 - │
│ 2 - │
│ 3 - │
│ 4 - │
│ 5 - │
│ 6 - │
│ 7 - ╒════════════╕
│ 8 - │ Receive . │
│ 9 - │ Transmit . │
│ ASC╒═════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Tog│ Use OUTPUT Translate Table OFF │
╘════│ Carriage Return Handling NONE │
│ LineFeed Handling NONE │
│ Pacing Speed 0 │
│ pAcing Character NONE │
│ Blank Line Expansion ON │
│ End of Line Character 10 │
╘═════════════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/P/A/T/U Use OUTPUT Translate Table
When set to ON, outgoing data is translated. Translation criteria
are defined in the Alt-A OUTPUT Translate table. When OFF, the
data is not translated and is sent "as is".
Alt-N/P/A/T/C Carriage Return Handling
This option has three settings:
NONE No special treatment of the CR. (Decimal 13)
STRIP All CR's are removed while the file is transmitted.
ADD LF Adds a trailing LF (Decimal 10) after each CR.
Alt-N/P/A/T/L LineFeed Handling
This option also has three settings:
NONE No special treatment of the LF. (Decimal 10)
STRIP All LF's are removed while the file is transmitted.
ADD CR Adds a leading CR (Decimal 13) before each LF.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 54
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/A/T/P Pacing Speed
Pacing controls the speed of the data transfer to the remote
computer. If the remote computer is able to receive text data at
high speed, this value should be zero, the default. If you
experience problems sending ASCII data without any pacing, insert
a delay between each transmitted character by increasing the
Pacing Speed value. Pacing Speed is expressed in milliseconds
(1000 = 1 second). 25 milliseconds (1/40 sec) is a good starting
value.
Alt-N/P/A/T/A Pacing Character
If a pacing character is specified, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will
wait until that character is received before it sends the next
line of text. If NONE is specified, the transfer will not pause
between lines of text. Use this only when you are sure that the
remote system always prompts for each line of text with the same
character. To change the setting, use the Up and Down arrow keys
to move through the ASCII character set and press ENTER when the
desired character is displayed.
In some cases, you may want to control transmission pacing
yourself. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE allows you to do just that by
setting the pacing character to ASCII 255 (or any other character
which you know will not be received by the other system). When
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE pauses after sending each line, press any
key to send the next line. Repeat this procedure until the entire
file has been transmitted.
See also: End Of Line Character.
Alt-N/P/A/T/B Blank Line Expansion
This option controls whether or not blank lines (lines which only
contain a CR and/or LF and no other text) should be expanded to
include at least one SPACE as a leading character.
Many online systems and BBS's interpret a blank line, as defined
above, as an end-of-message indication. If your text contains
blank lines, the first one will cause the other system to stop
receiving message text, issue an end-of-message prompt, and wait
for your input. Since additional message text is still being
sent, unpredictable results can occur. Setting Blank Line
Expansion ON will eliminate this problem.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 55
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/A/T/E End Of Line Character
Often referred to as EOL, this is the character that your text
editor uses as the last character in a line. Most often (IE.,
with the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Internal Editor), this is a
LineFeed character (ASCII 10), which is usually preceded by a
Carriage Return (ASCII 13). If your text editor or word processor
uses a different EOL character, you should define it here.
Setting this value incorrectly results in a jerky or incomplete
transmission.
Example:
You want to upload a message to your local BBS system. The
message text was created with the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Internal
Editor (a good combination).
Most BBSs start each message line with a colon ":", which we can
use as the pacing character. Most also terminate message entry
when a blank line is received. To successfully upload the
message, the ASCII transmit options should be set as follows:
╒═════════════════════════════════════╕
│ Use OUTPUT Translate Table OFF │
│ Carriage Return Handling NONE │
│ LineFeed Handling NONE │
│ Pacing Speed 0 │
│ pAcing Character : 58 │
│ Blank Line Expansion ON │
│ End of Line Character 10 │
╘═════════════════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 56
=================================================================
Alt-N/P/T Protocol Toggles
These are toggles specific to the file transfer protocols. The
menu looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════╒═══════════════════╕════════════════════════╛
│ 0 - │
│ 1 - │
│ 2 - │
│ 3 - │
│ 4 - │
│ 5 - │
│ 6 - │
│ 7 - │
│ 8 - │
│ 9 - │
│ ASCII Options . │
│ Toggles . │
╒═══════════════════════════════╕
│ Overwrite Files OFF │
│ Auto-Increment Filename OFF │
│ Save Partials OFF │
│ Clear Batch Screen ON │
│ Zmodem Autostart OFF │
╘═══════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/P/T/O Overwrite Files
Alt-N/P/T/A Auto-Increment Filenames
These two toggles work in tandem to control how downloaded files
are treated. The rules are not that complicated and will be
discussed in detail. One of the combinations will be the right
one for you.
To keep confusion to a minimum, the exception to the rule is the
Zmodem protocol and will be discussed in a moment.
When you are prompted for a filename in one of the download
protocols, a check is made to see if the file already exists. If
it does, the Auto-Increment flag is checked. If it is set ON,
then the filename entered gets incremented and the transfer
begins.
If the Auto-Increment flag is set OFF, then the Overwrite Files
flag is checked. If this is set ON, the existing file is deleted
and the transfer begins. If it is set OFF, then you will be
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 57
=================================================================
prompted for a different filename before the transfer can begin.
The Exception to the rule: Zmodem
When downloading using any protocol except Zmodem (yes, there is
always an exception to the rule), the Auto-Increment flag is
checked first, and then the Overwrite flag. With Zmodem, there is
another possibility called Crash Recovery. This will override the
above mentioned flags under certain specific conditions.
If the file you are downloading already exists and the file on
disk is smaller than the one being downloaded, there is a
possibility that the file on disk is a Partial (see below).
Zmodem then attempts to use Crash Recovery to pick up where the
you left off.
If it turns out that the two files are not the same, then the
original rules apply. IE. A check of the Auto-Increment flag, and
then the Overwrite if Auto-Increment is OFF. If Overwrite is also
OFF, the file is SKIPPED by the Zmodem download.
Alt-N/P/T/S Save Partials
A Partial is created when the Save Partials flag is set ON and a
download aborts. The portion that has been received successfully
is not deleted. If it is set OFF, then any partially downloaded
file is erased when the transfer aborts.
Alt-N/P/T/C Clear Batch Screen
This is the only toggle that deals with Uploads. All the others
affect Downloads. One of the new features in QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE is support for Batch Uploads. The Batch Entry Window (BEW)
has the ability to retain the entered information so you can do
the same batch upload to several different systems without
retyping the entire BEW screen.
When a Batch upload completes, this flag is checked to see if the
BEW information should be cleared. The default is ON. Even if you
leave this set OFF, you can still clear the old information in
the BEW with a press of the F4 key.
Alt-N/P/T/Z Zmodem Auto-Start
Zmodem Autostart When this parameter is ON, Zmodem file downloads
are started automatically whenever a Zmodem download transfer
header is received. If this parameter is OFF, Zmodem downloads
must be started manually with the PgDn command.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 58
=================================================================
Alt-N/F Files
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE requires access to specific files and
programs which must be defined in the Files menu:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘══════════════════════════╒═════════════════════════════════════════════════╕═╛
│ Online Help QMODEM.HLP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Screen Dump SCREEN.DMP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Capture CAPTURE.CAP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Log QMODEM.LOG░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ BackScroll SCROLL.SAV░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ View ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Printer ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ Time/Date Stamp ON │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/F/O Online Help
This is the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE online help file, distributed
as part of the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE program. The default name
for this file is QMODEM.HLP.
If you use QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE from different subdirectories,
then you should edit this and include the full drive:\directory
where the HLP file is located.
Example: C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.HLP
Alt-N/F/S Screen Dump
This is the file to which QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE screen dumps
(Alt-T) are saved. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE automatically appends
the .DMP suffix to the specified filename if one is not included.
Example: C:\QMODEM\SCREEN.DMP
Alt-N/F/C Capture
This is the file where session data is recorded when Capture
(Ctrl-Home) is ON. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE automatically appends
the .CAP suffix to the filename if one was not specified.
Example: C:\QMODEM\CAPTURE.CAP
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 59
=================================================================
Alt-N/F/L Log
This is the file where QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE logs all activity.
The QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Log can be started automatically
(Alt-N/O/T/U -- aUto Log Start) or explicitly with the Alt-0
command. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE automatically appends the .LOG
suffix to the filename if one was not specified.
Example: C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.LOG
Alt-N/F/B Back-scroll
This is the file to which the scroll-back buffer is copied.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE does not assign a default suffix to this
file.
Example: C:\QMODEM\SCROLL.SAV
Alt-N/F/V View
This is the path and filename of the program which is executed by
the Alt-V command. Any valid program can be executed by Alt-V,
making this a powerful function.
Example:
│ View C:\UTIL\LIST ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
Two special keywords may also be specified as a View option: @FSE
and @EDITOR. If @FSE if specified, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
Internal Editor will be used for all file viewing and editing.
Example:
│ View @FSE ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
The @EDITOR keyword, if specified, causes the QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE Internal Editor to be replaced with an external program of
your choice.
Example:
│ View @EDITOR QEDIT ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
If "@EDITOR" is not specified, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Internal
Editor will be used for internal editing of scripts or note files
attached to phone book entries.
NOTE: The @EDITOR and @FSE commands should always be followed by
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 60
=================================================================
a space. (as shown in the above examples).
Alt-N/F/P Printer
This is the default used when specifying a printer. It can be a
printer device such as PRN, LPT1, or LPT2. Or, it can also be a
drive:\path\filename like the others in this menu. If left blank,
it will default to PRN (the default DOS printer).
Example: PRN
NOTE: QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will append new data to the screen
dump, capture, log, and back-scroll files if they exist. If they
do not, a prompt for their creation will be displayed when the
corresponding command is issued. File names may be changed when
these recording features are invoked.
Alt-N/F/T Time/Date Stamp
This toggle does not have a separate sub-menu. (what? for only
one toggle? nah...) When set ON, the Screen Dump, Capture and
Scroll back files will have Time and Date Stamp headers placed
above the appended data. This is appended each time the file is
opened, not between each line added to the file. When set OFF, no
header is placed before the appended data.
Alt-N/O Options
The Options Menus define run-time parameters which control the
operation of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. These parameters fall into
the following categories:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
│ Sounds . │
│ Delays . │
│ Characters . │
╘══════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 61
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/T Options Toggles
Toggles is a list of feature switches which control the remaining
toggles that do not fit under Video, Modem or Protocols. The menu
looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
╒═══════════════════════════╕ │
│ Beeps & Bells ON │ │
│ ANSI Music OFF │ │
│ DEL/^H Backspace OFF │ │
│ Auto-Start LOG OFF │ │
│ Keypad emulation OFF │══╛
│ ENQ response OFF │
│ Guard Alt-H OFF │
│ 0xE0 Doorway Codes OFF │
│ Alt-D FON Book . │
╘═══════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/O/T/B Beeps & Bells
Activates or deactivates the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE audible
signals produced when connecting to another computer, or at the
completion of a file transfer. This toggle can be changed with
the Alt-B command.
Alt-N/O/T/A ANSI Music
Setting this ON will permit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to play ANSI
music if found in the incoming data stream. This toggle can be
changed via the Alt-M command.
Alt-N/O/T/D Del/^H Backspace
This toggle defines the character which is generated when the
[BACKSPACE] key is pressed. When OFF, a ^H (standard backspace
character) is generated. When ON, a DEL is generated. This toggle
can be changed via the Alt-1 command.
Pressing [Ctrl-Backspace] will send the reverse of this toggle.
For example, if ON, ^backspace will send a ^H character.
Alt-N/O/T/U Auto Start Log
When this toggle is ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will automatically
record activity in the LOG file defined in Alt-N/F/L when first
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 62
=================================================================
started. If set to OFF, activity logging must be started
explicitly with the Alt-0 command.
Alt-N/O/T/K Keypad emulation
This toggle controls numeric keypad operation when the keyboard
NumLock toggle is ON. When Keypad emulation is ON, pressing a
cursor key will send the correct cursor control sequence, as
defined in the Terminal Emulation section of the manual. When set
to OFF, the keypad functions normally.
Refer to the Alt-G Emulations sections for a complete description
of the keypad.
Alt-N/O/T/E ENQ Response
This toggle controls the action taken when an ENQ ^E is received.
If set ON, then the contents of Function Key Alt-F12 is sent out
the serial port. When set OFF, the ^E is processed as a normal
incoming character. Refer to the Alt-J command on editing the
text for Alt-F12.
This toggle can act as ENQ/ACK flow control. If the characters ^F
are stored in Alt-F12 and this is set ON, then every time the
remote system sends the ENQ, an ACK (^F) will be sent back.
Alt-N/O/T/G Guard Alt-H
This toggle controls how the Alt-H Hangup command is processed.
If this is set ON and press Alt-H, a window will open confirming
your wanting to hangup. When set OFF, the Hangup command is acted
upon immediately.
Alt-N/O/T/0 0xE0 Doorway Codes
This toggle controls whether or not the enhanced 101-key E0 (hex)
codes are transmitted. When set ON, the special 3-byte code is
sent for any of the enhanced keys. When set OFF, the E0 keys are
converted to their 84-key keyboard equivalent.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 63
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/T/F Alt-D FON Book
The Alt-D FON Book menu was created under Toggles to make it easy
to find all the toggles relating to the Alt-D command. The menu
looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
╒═══════════════════════════╕ │
│ Beeps & Bells ON │ │
│ ANSI Music OFF │ │
│ DEL/^H Backspace OFF │ │
│ Auto-Start LOG OFF │ │
│ Keypad emulation OFF │══╛
│ ENQ response OFF │
│ Guard Alt-H OFF │
│ 0xE0 Doorway Codes OFF │
│ Alt-D FON Book . │
╘═╒═══════════════════════════╕
│ Tag Advance ON │
│ AutoStart OFF │
│ Clear tags on FKey ON │
│ Write FBK file ON │
╘═══════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/O/T/F/T Tag Advance
When set ON, tagging entries with the SPACBAR in Alt-D will make
the Scrollbar move down to the next entry. When set OFF, the
Scrollbar does not move automatically.
Alt-N/O/T/F/A Auto Start
When set ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will come up in the Alt-D
screen initially. When set OFF, the TERMINAL mode is the default
screen.
If you start QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE with the /S= or /HOST command
line options, the Auto Start toggle is ignored and defaults to
OFF.
Alt-N/O/T/F/C Clear tags on FKey
When set ON, using one of the FKeys to tag and dial will do an
implied U- Untag All command first. When set OFF, pre-existing
tags remain, and any new tags are added.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 64
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/T/F/W Write FBK File
When set ON, any changes to the FON book will result in writing
an FBK Backup file to disk. This Backup is the same size as the
original. When set OFF, no FBK file is written to disk.
This could be very handy for floppy disk users where they do not
want the extra FBK file written to disk. It does take a lot
longer to write this to floppy, not to mention the extra 23K (or
so) disk space required.
Alt-N/O/R Options Runtime Parms
Runtime Parms consist of 6 parameters which can be set ON or OFF
to control specific aspects of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operation.
These are similar to the TOGGLES menu and replace previously used
Command Like Parameters. To change the toggle setting, type the
toggle's highlighted letter or cursor to the entry and press
<Enter>.
The menu looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
╒═════════════════════════╕│
│ EMS for Overlays ON ││
│ Int16 Enable ON ││
│ Share IRQ's OFF ││
│ Optimum Shell ON │╛
│ -- Disk Shell ON │
│ Calibrate DELAY OFF │
╘═════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/O/R/E EMS for Overlays
This controls whether or not to use EMS memory in QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE. If set ON, the QMODEM.OVR file will be loaded into EMS
memory. Also, EMS memory will be used to store the SWAP file (see
Alt-N/D/S) when shelling to DOS.
Use of EMS memory will significantly improve performance by
eliminating overlay-related disk activity. The amount of EMS
memory required to store the Overlay is slightly higher than the
size of the QMODEM.OVR file. Other aspects of QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE may draw on the available EMS memory as needed.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 65
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/R/I Int16 Enable
When set ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE uses an internal Interrupt 16
handler to access the 101-key enhanced keyboards. This usually
allows the F11 & F12 keys to be used if they are present. When
set OFF, the normal DOS interrupt handler is used and you will
not be able to use the F11 & F12 keys.
Some keystrokes in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE do require this to be
set ON to be used. F11 & F12 have already been mentioned.
Alt-Enter, to toggle the Status Line information is another.
If you do not have an enhanced keyboard, or the BIOS does not
support one, you cannot toggle this to the ON position.
Alt-N/O/R/S Share IRQ's
When ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will correctly share interrupts on
PS/2 and EISA bus equipped computers. When set OFF, QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE will not pass interrupts on to the previous interrupt
handlers if any were present. If you are running a PC, XT or AT
based system, then this should be set OFF.
Alt-N/O/R/O Optimum Shell
When ON, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will attempt to remove all but 5K
of itself from memory before all shell operations (external
transfer protocols, Alt-R drop to DOS, etc.) If the EMS USAGE is
set ON, then it first tries to store the copy into EMS memory. If
there is not enough free EMS or the EMS USAGE is OFF, then it
tries to swap to DISK. If there is not enough DISK space, the
Optimum Shell is disabled.
Alt-N/O/R/D Disk Shell
This toggle works only when the Optimum Shell toggle is set ON.
If OFF, this toggle has no effect. Assuming the Optimum Shell is
ON, this toggle controls whether or not the Swap file can be
placed on Disk.
If ON, then a Disk file will be attempted if you have
insufficient EMS memory to hold the Swap file (or the Use EMS
toggle is set OFF). If OFF, and you have run out of EMS, then the
Optimum Shell is disabled.
Alt-N/O/R/C Calibrate Delay
Calibrate DELAY When set ON, the internal timer routine will
automatically calibrate itself periodically. This could be
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 66
=================================================================
necessary if running under multitaskers or running on a network
server. (the latter is strongly discouraged however).
Alt-N/O/M Options Memory
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE allows user-specified memory allocations
for three storage areas: The scroll-back buffer, the download
buffers and the Overlay memory allocation. These values can be
changed to meet varying requirements.
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
╒════════════════════════════╕
│ Lines of Scroll-back 1000 │
│ Download Buffer 8 │
│ Overlay Buffer (K) 40 │
╘════════════════════════════╛
Alt-N/O/M/L Lines of Scroll-back
Memory is allocated as the maximum number of lines which can be
stored in the Scroll-back buffer. Values from 0 to 1000 are
valid.
Alt-N/O/M/D Download Buffer
Downloaded data is stored into the download buffer. When the
buffer is full, it is copied to disk. Each buffer is 128 bytes,
and from 8 to 240 buffers can be allocated. When receiving to a
fast hard disk or to a RAM disk, use the smallest allocation (8).
A low allocation when downloading to a diskette will reduce
transmission efficiency. Large allocation are at the expense of
system RAM.
Alt-N/O/M/O Overlay Buffer
The default value is 30K. Increasing this value will reduce disk
activity during the loading of program overlay files at the
expense of memory. Anything above around 64K is just wasting disk
main memory.
If QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE seems slow, this value should be
increased in 5-10K increments until execution speed is
satisfactory.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 67
=================================================================
Memory available to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE may vary greatly
depending on the operating system's own requirements, and
resident programs (TSRs) loaded. If QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is
unable to find sufficient memory, it will re-allocate it using a
best-fit algorithm and will issue a warning message to that
effect.
Alt-N/O/S Options Sounds
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE can generate various sounds to signal a
successful connect or the completion of a file transfer. Whether
or not sounds are generated is controlled by the Alt-N/O/T/B
toggle, or the Alt-B command in terminal mode. These sounds can
be customized in the Options Sounds menu:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
│ Sounds . │
│╒══════════════════════╕
││ Connect tones . │
╘│ Upload tone 1200 │
│ Download tone 1200 │
╘══════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 68
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/S/C Options Sounds Connect Tones
This multi-note jingle has its own custom menu.
Alt-N/O/S/U Upload tone
Alt-N/O/S/D Download tone
This is the frequency in Hertz of the beeps that are produced at
the completion of each file transfer. A sample will be heard as
you change these. The default frequency for the file transfer
completion tones is 1200 Hz
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
│ Sounds . │
│╒══════════════════════╕
││ Connect tones . │
╘│ Uplo╒═══════════╕200 │
│ Down│ 1 - 1200 │200 │
╘═════│ 2 - 1400 │════╛
│ 3 - 1600 │
│ Max 3 │
╘═══════════╛
Alt-N/O/S/C/1 Connect Tone 1
Alt-N/O/S/C/2 Connect Tone 2
Alt-N/O/S/C/3 Connect Tone 3
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE produces a 3-note jingle following a
successful connection. The default frequencies for the three
notes are 1200, 1400, and 1600 cycles.
These can be changed to suit your taste. All 3 notes are played
following each change. To change a value, type the desired
number, type in the new value, and press ENTER.
Alt-N/O/S/C/3 Max Repeats
This entry is under the Connect Tones menu. It controls the
maximum number iterations of the Connect tones when you get
connected via the Alt-D Phone Book. Remember, this is the maximum
number. You can always cancel the tones with a press of any key.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 69
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/D Options Delays
Delay values affect the timing of certain QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
operations:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
│ Sounds . │
│ Delays . │
│╒═════════════════════╕
╘│ Status window 100 │
│ File transfers 10 │
│ BREAK timing 500 │
│ DTR timing 500 │
╘═════════════════════╛
Alt-N/O/D/S Status Windows
Most toggles or immediate commands have an accompanying window
showing the change in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's status. The value
in this field, expressed in hundredths of a second, controls the
duration of time these status windows are displayed.
The default is 300, for a 3 second duration.
Alt-N/O/D/F File Transfers
File transfer errors such as Short/Long blocks can occur on
high-speed, buffered modems when the COM port rate is fixed at a
high value. Adding a file transfer delay of up to 20 seconds (or
more, depending on the system you are communicating with) will
correct this problem.
This should be set to a non-zero value any time the serial port
baud rate exceeds the actual connect baud rate.
Alt-N/O/D/B BREAK Timing
This is the number of milliseconds that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
will hold the BREAK signal high when Ctrl-End is pressed or
specified in the Dialing setup options. Values from 0 to 2000 (2
seconds) are valid.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 70
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/D/D DTR Timing
This is the number of milliseconds that QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
will hold the DTR signal low when specified in the Modem setup
options. Values from 0 to 2000 (2 seconds) are valid.
Alt-N/O/C Options Characters
Special characters and field masks are used to change the way
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE looks and acts. The first four characters
are more cosmetic than anything. The picture masks are cosmetic
in addition to being functional.
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════════════╕═╛
│ Toggles . │
│ Runtime Parms . │
│ Memory . │
│ Sounds . │
│ Delays . │
│ Characters . │
╒═══════════════════════════╕
│ Beeps & Bells 13 │
│ ANSI Music 14 │
│ Status Line Filler ░ 176 │
│ Phone Book Tag √ 251 │
│ Notes Tag ≡ 240 │
│ Date Mask mm-dd-yy░░ │
│ Time Mask hh:mm:ss░░ │
│ Elapsed Mask hh:mm:ss░░ │
╘═══════════════════════════╛
To change a separator or indicator value, select the desired
character and press the direction keys to select another
character values. When the desired character is highlighted,
press Enter. Press Esc to leave the character as it was.
The Character Select Pick List looks like this:
╒═══════════════════════════╕
│ Beeps & Bells 13 │
│ ANSI Music 14 │
│ Status Line Filler ░ 176 │
╒════════════════════ Character Select Window ════════════════════╕1 │
│ í ó ú ñ Ñ ª º ¿ ⌐ ¬ ½ ¼ ¡ « » ░ ▒ ▓ │ ┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ╝ ╜ ╛ ┐ │0 │
│ └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ╧ ╨ ╤ ╥ ╙ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌ █ ▄ ▌ ▐ ▀ │y │
│ α ß Γ π Σ σ µ τ Φ Θ Ω δ ∞ φ ε ∩ ≡ ± ≥ ≤ ⌠ ⌡ ÷ ≈ Φ Θ Ω √ ² ■ . │░ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════ . for more ═╛░ │
╘═══════════════════════════╛
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 71
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/C/B Beeps & Bells
Default: Single note (ASCII 13)
This also happens to be the Decimal representation of a carriage
return so it cannot be accurately represented in this document.
This is the character used in the Status line to show that the
Beeps & Bells is toggled ON.
You may want to change this to another character to prevent
problems with the DOS Print Screen function if you like to use
the PrtSc key!
Alt-N/O/C/A ANSI Music
Default: Double note (ASCII 14)
This is the character used in the status line to show that ANSI
Music is toggled ON.
You may want to change this to another character to prevent
problems with the PrtSc function. The double musical note
character causes Epson and compatible printers to switch to
compressed print mode.
Alt-N/O/C/S Status Line Filler
Default: Hash block (ASCII 176)
This is the character used as an area separator in the Status
line.
Alt-N/O/C/P Phone Book Tag
Default: Check mark (ASCII 251)
This character is used in the Alt-D Phone Book to indicate that
an entry has been tagged for dialing or other functions.
Alt-N/O/C/N Notes Tag
Default: Triplet (ASCII 240)
This character is used in the Alt-D Phone Book to indicate that
an entry has an attached Note file.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 72
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/C/D Date Mask
Alt-N/O/C/T Time Mask
Alt-N/O/C/E Elapsed Mask
To allow the maximum amount of flexibility and to insure that the
DATE, TIME and ELAPSED TIME routines can be used internationally,
you can specify a picture mask to indicate how a given string
should be formatted.
For example, let's say that a date variable contains January 2,
1990 and you want to display it. There are several possible
picture masks you could use:
Picture Result
mm/dd/yy 01/02/90
MM/dd/yy 1/02/90 (note the Case difference)
m/dd/yyyy 01/02/1990
mm-dd-yyyy 01-02-1990
dd/mm/yyyy 02/01/1990
DD-mm-yyyy 2-01-1990
In Picture masks, the CASE of the letters is significant. If the
letter are Upper case, then any leading zeros are substituted for
the SPACE character. If the letters are lower case, then leading
zeros are left in place. This applied for both DATE and TIME
masks.
Time strings are handled in a similar fashion, except that
special formatting characters are available for working with
times in am/pm (12-hour) format as well as military (24-hour)
format.
For example, lets say it is 1:02pm and you want to display this
in a different format. Here are some possible picture masks:
Picture Result
hh:mm:ss 13:02:00
hh:mm 13:02
hh:mm te 01:02 pm
HH:mmt 1:02p
HH:mm:ss 13:02:00 (note the Case difference)
HH:mm:sste 1:02:00pm
Note that string representations of time are always assumed to be
in military format unless a 't' appears in the picture mask. An
'e' (em) in the mask should always be accompanied by a
corresponding 't' (time).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 73
=================================================================
Now that you have a general idea of what picture masks do, let's
look at the characters that can appear in them. The following
special characters are meaningful in masks:
Char is replaced by
'm', 'M' Month (date fields only)
'd', 'D' Day (date fields only)
'y' Year (date, notice 'Y' is a literal)
'h', 'H' Hour (time fields only)
'm', 'M' Minutes (time fields only)
's', 'S' Seconds (time fields only)
't' 'p' or 'a' (time dependant)
'e' 'm' (usually follows the 't')
Any character other than shown above is treated as a literal and
displayed without substitution.
Elapsed times use the same format as regular Time masks. However,
most of the elapsed times count from 00:00:00 as a base.
Therefore, it is recommended that you do not include the t or e
codes to make it use 12-hour am/pm format.
Alt-N/E Exit
You should always exit the Setup Menu with this option if you
want changes to be saved in the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
configuration file.
The Configuration Exit Menu has two options:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Setup Menu ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Video Modem Dirs Host Protocols Files Options Exit │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╒══════════════╕
│ Save Changes │
│ Abandon │
╘══════════════╛
Alt-N/E/S Save Changes
Save the changes to the QMODEM.CNF file and exit.
Alt-N/E/A Abandon
Leave the configuration menu and do not save the changes.
Pressing ESC while at the main menu level has the same effect.
This allows changes to be tested before being saved with Alt-N/S.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 74
=================================================================
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE COMMANDS
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE features a wealth of commands, many of them
with multiple options, and used for different purposes and under
different circumstances. This section of the documentation
describes all the commands in detail and -- mostly -- in
alphabetical order.
Alt-A Strip/Replace Tables
Strip/Replace is more commonly known as character translation.
Translation may be necessary when communicating with another
computer whose ASCII codes (the computer's alphabet) do not match
those used by your PC. There are 256 ASCII characters, ranging in
value from 0 to 255. "Stripping" a character causes that
character to be removed from all incoming text data.
The initial menu looks like this:
╒══════ Table Selection ══════╕
│ │
│ Select Table to Edit │
│ │
│ 1 - INPUT │
│ 2 - OUTPUT │
│ │
│ Your Choice ? │
╘═════════════════════════════╛
Pressing either 1 or 2 displays a screen containing the ASCII
values 0 through 127 and their respective translations. Since
character translation is not performed by default, all values are
the same the first time you use the Alt-A command.
Above the translate table are the original and translated
representations of the current value. Characters which have been
translated will appear highlighted until changed back to normal.
This is a quick visual cue showing what has been changed.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 75
=================================================================
╒═════════════════════════ INPUT Strip/Replace Table ══════════════════════════╕
│ In Character | | Out Character | | │
│ [ 0- 0] 16- 16 32- 32 48- 48 64- 64 80- 80 96- 96 112-112 │
│ 1- 1 17- 17 33- 33 49- 49 65- 65 81- 81 97- 97 113-113 │
│ 2- 2 18- 18 34- 34 50- 50 66- 66 82- 82 98- 98 114-114 │
│ 3- 3 19- 19 35- 35 51- 51 67- 67 83- 83 99- 99 115-115 │
│ 4- 4 20- 20 36- 36 52- 52 68- 68 84- 84 100-100 116-116 │
│ 5- 5 21- 21 37- 37 53- 53 69- 69 85- 85 101-101 117-117 │
│ 6- 6 22- 22 38- 38 54- 54 70- 70 86- 86 102-102 118-118 │
│ 7- 7 23- 23 39- 39 55- 55 71- 71 87- 87 103-103 119-119 │
│ 8- 8 24- 24 40- 40 56- 56 72- 72 88- 88 104-104 120-120 │
│ 9- 9 25- 25 41- 41 57- 57 73- 73 89- 89 105-105 121-121 │
│ 10- 10 26- 26 42- 42 58- 58 74- 74 90- 90 106-106 122-122 │
│ 11- 11 27- 27 43- 43 59- 59 75- 75 91- 91 107-107 123-123 │
│ 12- 12 28- 28 44- 44 60- 60 76- 76 92- 92 108-108 124-124 │
│ 13- 13 29- 29 45- 45 61- 61 77- 77 93- 93 109-109 125-125 │
│ 14- 14 30- 30 46- 46 62- 62 78- 78 94- 94 110-110 126-126 │
│ 15- 15 31- 31 47- 47 63- 63 79- 79 95- 95 111-111 127-127 │
│ │
│ │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░ ARROWS-Movement S-Swap SPACEBAR-Change F10-Save ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░
To change (translate) an incoming ASCII value:
1. Move the half-box cursor to the desired ASCII value/character
you want to strip or replace. The number to the left of the
dash is the original ASCII value; the number on the right is
the translated character which you will see when the original
character is received.
2. Press the Space Bar once. A prompt will appear at the bottom
of the screen asking for an number between 0 and 255. To
strip the character, replace the number on the right with a 0
(ZERO).
3. Press [ENTER] to complete the change.
The original ASCII specification was a 7-bit code allowing for
128 characters (0-127). All modern-day computers add an 8th bit
in front of the original 7 to allow another 128 characters. This
8th bit is also referred to as the High Bit. Pressing the [S] key
will alternate the translate table display between the lower 128
(0-127) and higher 128 (128-255) characters.
Note that although a standard exists for most "lower" ASCII
characters, this is not true of the "upper" 128 values. These
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 76
=================================================================
High-Bit values are assigned freely by each computer
manufacturer. For example, Apple, IBM, and Commodore use
radically different standards in assigning characters to these
higher values (the IBM PC uses the high-bit values for the
international character set, symbols, and line/box-drawing
characters).
When you are finished, press [F10] to save the changes (if any)
or [ESC] to abort the changes and return to the terminal screen.
If you do make a change, and press [ESC], you will be asked if
you want to save your changes. Respond with [Y] if you do want to
save the changes or [N] if you really don't.
Alt-B Beeps and Bells Toggle
The speaker is used as an audible warning when certain events
occur (i.e., successful connection, or completion of a file
transfer). Since the speaker volume cannot be adjusted, you may
wish to turn it off. You can toggle the noise on and off with
Alt-B.
Alt-C Clear Screen
This command clears the screen of all information and resets
default colors; a very useful feature. For example, those ANSI
color screens displayed on certain Bulletin Boards can utterly
mess up your screen colors, sometimes leaving your screen
black-on-black which is hard to read. Using Alt-C will reset the
color on your screen back to your configuration selections; a
real lifesaver.
If screen colors were changed while executing a Script command,
the new screen colors will only remain in effect until the script
terminates. Once the Script has ended, default colors are
restored (but may require an Alt-C to invoke them).
In VT100 emulation mode, Alt-C only clears the active screen area
between the top and bottom margins. This area is referred to as
the Scrolling Region.
Alt-D Dialing Directory
The Dialing Directory can hold up to 200 entries, each containing
information such as: name, number, communications parameters,
auto-logon script name, date of last connect, total connections,
default transfer protocol, and duplex mode.
Each directory entry has the ability to have "Note Files"
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 77
=================================================================
attached. This file is a standard ASCII text file intended to
hold all information relating to that entry: information about
the System being called, hours of operation, Sysop name, and so
on.
The size of this text file is limited only by the amount of
memory not allocated or 60K, which-ever comes first. Entries with
attached Notes are identified in the Dialing Directory with a
triple-bar symbol (or Alt-N/O/C/N if you have changed the
default) immediately following the entry's number. Entry #1 in
the following snapshot has an attached Note File.
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > BC │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 ≡ MSI HQ BBS System 1-805-873-2400 38400 8N1 │
│2 38400 8N1 │
│3 38400 8N1 │
│4 38400 8N1 │
│5 38400 8N1 │
│6 38400 8N1 │
│7 38400 8N1 │
│8 38400 8N1 │
│9 38400 8N1 │
│10 38400 8N1 │
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delete Tagged/Bar Edit L - Load │
│ ^R/R - Revise Tagged/Bar E - Edit Prefixes O - Other Info │
│ T - Tag Multiple N - Attached Note ^P/P - Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░ ..,PgUp/Dn,^PgUp/Dn-Move Scroll Bar ENTER-Dial ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░
The Dialing Directory screen is divided into 2 sections: The
upper section displays directory entries, the current page, the
number of tagged entries (more on this in a moment), the number
of pre-defined Dialing Prefixes, and the actual entries on the
page. The lower screen section displays all available Dialing
Directory commands.
If your PC has EGA or VGA display capabilities, or is able to
display at least 43 lines on the screen, the directory will
display an additional 10 lines entries per screen!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 78
=================================================================
What this snapshot does not show is the scrollbar cursor, a
screen-wide highlight identifying the current directory entry.
Instructions on moving the scrollbar cursor are shown in the
Alt-D status line.
MOVEMENT COMMANDS
Up/Down - PgUp/PgDn - ^PgUp/^PgDn
The Up and Down arrow keys move the scrollbar cursor one line at
a time in the corresponding direction.
Pressing [PgDn] displays the next directory page unless the last
page is displayed. Pressing [PgDn] while in the last directory
page causes wrap around back to the first directory page. The
same principle applies to the [PgUp] key, but in the opposite
direction of course.
[^PgUp] will position the scrollbar cursor to the FIRST entry in
the directory (#1), while [^PgDn] positions the cursor at the
LAST entry (#200).
^SP/SP Spacebar Tagging entries
A number of Dialing Directory commands operate on tagged entries.
Therefore, it is important to understand what tagging is. We will
then be able to describe how it is done.
Basic dialing directory commands such as Revise, Delete, and
Dial, act only on entries that are tagged. For example, to Delete
one or more entries, you first tag the entries to be deleted,
then select the Delete option. To build a dialing queue, tag the
desired entries, and press [ENTER]. As you will see, there are
many methods to accomplish the same things, each having its
advantages. The rest of the commands are there to make QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE easier to use.
There are three methods used to tag entries; Pressing the
[Spacebar] or [^Spacebar], the [Q] key, and a third method called
implied tagging. The Spacebar is the most commonly used tagging
method. "Q" tagging will be briefly discussed here, but will be
covered in more detail later on. Implied tagging will be
discussed under the Deleting Entries heading.
Tagged entries are identified in two different ways:
1. They are displayed in a different color (provided your color
setup defines them as such), and
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 79
=================================================================
2. They are preceded by the special check-mark character "√",
"Q" or "P".
"What is the difference between the "√" , "P",and the "Q" tags? "
Good question. If the Script field is blank or contains a Script
name and the Script exists, then the "√" tag is used. If a Script
name is specified for that entry, but the script file does not
exist, the letter "Q" is used as a tag character instead. If your
phone entry uses Prefix modifiers, it is possible to dial the
entry without them by using the ^Spacebar. This puts the letter P
where the Q would have been.
"So why the letter "Q", anyway?"
Another good question. "Q" stands for "QuickLearn", the automatic
script building part of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. As the connection
is established, QuickLearn records your interaction with the
remote computer and creates a Script file which exactly
replicates these actions the next time you call. As a result, the
logon process becomes automated. A complete description of the
QuickLearn facility is included later on in this manual. We think
that QuickLearn sure beats a poke in the eye with a sharp stick.
It is a neat feature, well worth paying for.
"I now have entries tagged... now what?"
Now you can Dial them, Revise them, or Delete them!
Un-tagging an entry is as simple as tagging it; use the Spacebar
again. With the cursor on a tagged entry, pressing the Spacebar
removes the tag.
I, Ins Insert New Entry
Adding new entries has never been easier! Simply move the
Scrollbar to where you want to place the new entry and press
either [I] or [INS]. All entries from the Scrollbar down are
moved downward and a new blank entry is inserted.
When you insert a new entry, another entry must be deleted. The
phone book is searched from bottom to top to find the first blank
entry, then deleted. If there are no blank entries, then the
Insert command is aborted. You have to delete an entry before
inserting another one.
After the entry has been inserted, you can then use the Revise
command to modify it.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 80
=================================================================
^D/D, Del Deleting Entries
Deleting multiple entries requires that they first be tagged.
Does this mean that you must tag a single entry before you revise
or clear it? No, not quite.
If there are no tagged entries, it is assumed that the command
applies to the entry at the cursor. Internally, the current entry
is tagged, then the requested command is executed. This is the
implied tagging method mentioned earlier, which requires no
specific tagging action on your part. Thus, to perform operations
against single entries, you do nothing more than issue the
command; QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE does the rest. To clear a single
entry, move the scrollbar cursor to it, and press either [D] or
[Del].
Implied tagging cannot be used when multiple entries are tagged
explicitly. To clear multiple entries, tag them first with the
Space Bar, then press [^D]. The scrollbar cursor will move to the
first tagged entry and will display the Delete Entry menu.
If multiple entries are already tagged as the result of a
previous operation (i.e., dialing), and you wish to delete a
single entry, REMOVE ALL TAGS FIRST by typing "U". Since tagged
entries may be elsewhere in the directory, and not visible in the
current page, it is easy to assume that implied tagging will
work, when in fact it will not. It is advisable to check the Tag
Count displayed at the top of the dialing directory screen before
attempting any "implied-tag" commands.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 81
=================================================================
Now that you understand the difference between explicit and
implicit tagging, let's look at an example. In the screen below,
entry #5 was tagged, and [^D] was pressed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of Z:\docsfon.FON │
│ Total Tags > 1 Prefixes > ABC │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 ≡ Test Node at MSI 1-805-555-1212 38400 8N1 TESTING.SCR │
│2 MSI HQ BBS System 1-805-873-2400 38400 8N1 MSI.SCR │
│3 38400 8N1 │
│4 38400 8N1 │
│5 ≡√ Old BBS to Delete 555-1212 1200 8N1 │
│6 38400 8N1 │
│7 GEnie Local 2400 access # `B555-1212 2400 8N1 GENIE.SCR │
│8 38400 8N1 │
│9 ╒═ Delete Entries and/or Notes ══╕400 8N1 │
│10 │ │400 8N1 │
╞═══════════════════════│ 1. Notes Only │═════════════════════╡
│ Entries │ 2. Entries & Notes │ FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-U│ ESC. Return to Directory │ F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New │ │ A - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delete Tagg│ Your Choice ? │ L - Load │
│ ^R/R - Revise Tagg╘════════════════════════════════╛ O - Other Info │
│ T - Tag Multiple N - Attached Note ^P/P - Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░ ..,PgUp/Dn,^PgUp/Dn-Move Scroll Bar ENTER-Dial ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░
The Delete Entry window serves a dual purpose. It can delete
Attached Notes from an entry, or it can delete both the Notes and
the entry itself. Entries cannot be deleted without Attached
Notes being deleted as well.
In the example above, entry #5 has an attached Note. Selecting
option #2 from the menu would delete the Note file as well as the
entry. If entry #5 did not have an attached Note and we selected
Option #1, no action would be taken.
The menu option you select is applied to ALL tagged entries. To
clear "Notes only" from certain tagged entries cannot be done and
requires a separate operation.
The complete Phone Book is backed up prior to deleting entries if
you have the Alt-N/O/T/F/W set ON. In either case, the Note files
are never backed up. Once Notes are cleared, they cannot be
restored.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 82
=================================================================
^R/R Revise Tagged/BAR
The Revise command is used to edit directory entries. Multiple
entries can be revised in a group. Simply tag all the entries you
want to revise and press [^R]. If no entries are tagged, pressing
[R] will revise the current entry (implicit tagging). If multiple
entries are tagged and you press [R], only the entry under the
Scrollbar will be revised.
The Revise Entry window looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of D:\QMODEM\DOCSFON.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > ABCEF │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 ≡ Test Node at MSI EF555-1212 38400 8N1 │
│2 ╒═════════════ Revise Entry ══════════════╕ 8N1 │
│3 │ Name Test Node at MSI░░░░░░░░░░░ │ 8N1 │
│4 ≡ Executive N│ Number 1-805-873-2400░░░░░ │ 8N1 │
│5 │ Password ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ 8N1 │
│6 │ Script ░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ 8N1 │
│7 GEnie Local│ Baud Rate 38400░ │ 8N1 │
│8 │ Data Bits 8 │ 8N1 │
│9 │ Parity N │ 8N1 │
│10 │ Stop Bits 1 │ 8N1 │
╞═════════════════│ Duplex F │══════════════════╡
│ Entri│ Protocol X │ FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P│ Last Call 08-09-90 │- Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Inser│ Times On 0░░░░ │- Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delet╘════════════════════════════════F1 Help══╛- Load │
│ ^R/R - Revise Tagged/Bar E - Edit Prefixes O - Other Info │
│ T - Tag Multiple N - Attached Note ^P/P - Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░ Change the NAME field [F10] Save [Esc] Exit ░░░░
This is one of the several Multi-field Edit windows in QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE. You simply move the cursor to where you want and make
the change. Several fields in the menu allow popping up a Pick
List by pressing [F2] when the cursor is in the field. Check the
Status line as you cursor through the fields.
Once you have completed changing the information, press [F10] to
save the changes. In the unlikely event you made a mistake,
pressing [ESC] will restore the entire entry.
When revising multiple tagged entries, the Revise Menu will
display the entries one at a time, in sequence. As each entry is
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 83
=================================================================
saved (or you exit the Revise Menu via [ESC]), the next entry
will be displayed, until all tagged entries have been processed.
If you're new to the world of modems, BBSs, online services and
telecommunications, you might at this point be wondering how to
find numbers to add to your dialing directory. To help get you
started, we've included the file WCLIST.TXT on your QModem disks.
This contains an up-to-date list of Wildcat! BBS systems, sorted
by area code. Chances are there's a Wildcat! BBS in your area
that would welcome your call.
T Tag Multiple
Tag Multiple is used to tag entries based on their entry number
or the text content of their Name, Number field, or Attached Note
file. In addition, Tag Multiple can be used to add or delete
Prefix codes from entry phone numbers.
Pressing [T] will display a small prompt window in the Command
area:
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░ Enter line #'s, P[prefixes]#[suffixes], T-Text ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░
Let's review the options displayed on the status line.
Enter line #'s
Used to tag entries based on their number in the directory. To
tag entries 1, 22, 23 and 40, you would type:
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > 1 22 23 40░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
This feature is reminiscent of earlier releases of QMODEM which
prompted the user for the numbers to be dialed.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 84
=================================================================
P[prefixes]#[suffixes]
A prefix or suffix may be added to, changed, or deleted from an
entry's phone number by preceding that entry's number with the
letter 'P'.
For example, to dial entry #1 and add the prefix modifier 'A' to
the beginning and 'B' to the end of the number, you would type:
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > PA1B░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
The 'P' modifier means that one or more prefix codes will precede
or follow the entry number, and that these are to be added to the
entry's phone number. In the example above, the prefix 'A' is
added before the number, and 'B' following it.
To REMOVE Suffix 'B' from entry #1, we would type:
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > PA1░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
Since the 'A' prefix is kept, it is typed. 'B' was not included,
so the 'B' suffix is removed. Taking this one step further, to
remove all prefixes/suffixes from entry #1, we would type:
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > P1░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
T[text]
Allows tagging of entries based on a text search:
1. NAME field,
2. NUMBER field, and
3. Attached NOTE files
Each text string to be searched is preceded by the letter 'T'.
Using the previous phone book example, let's tag all the entries
in the 319 area code, as well as those using V9600 modems (we
kept the modem information in the Attached Note Files):
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Select Entries ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Numbers to TAG > T319 TV9600░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 85
=================================================================
The leading 'T' is not case sensitive and text search arguments
must be separated by at least one space. Also, text search
arguments may not contain imbedded spaces. The space, the letter
'T', and the end of the prompt line are text search delimiters.
Tag Multiple is a powerful tool in the Alt-D arsenal.
U Untag All
Pressing [U] will remove all tags in the directory.
When you are about to use an "Implied Tag" command on the current
entry, make sure other entries are not tagged (the tag count is
displayed at the top of the directory screen). If entries are
tagged, you may want to use Untag All to remove the tags before
proceeding with the command.
Q QuickLearn
Pressing [Q] toggles the QuickLearn tag for the current entry if
the Script field is non-blank. Connecting to a Q-tagged entry
activates the QuickLearn Script Recorder.
You can force QuickLearn by using the letter "Q" to tag the entry
instead of the Spacebar. When you connect, QuickLearn starts
rewriting the Script for you!
The QuickLearn feature is described in detail under the Alt-Q
command.
Dialing
ENTER - Start dialing
Pressing [ENTER] will begin dialing tagged entries in numerical
order starting from the current scrollbar position. If no entries
are tagged, the current entry will be tagged and dialed
immediately. The Redialer will cycle through the tagged entries
until a connection is made or you press [ESC] to halt the
process.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will not dial entries with blank phone
numbers. Also, the information in the number field is not checked
for validity.
Following is the Redialer window:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 86
=================================================================
╞══════════════════════════════════ Redialer ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ │
│ Name : MSI HQ BBS Last On : 08-09-90 │
│ Number : 873-2400 Total # : 10112 │
│ Script : MSI.SCR Attempt : 1 │
│ │
│ Modem : ATDT266-0540 Start : 22:49:34 │
│ Status : 50 Seconds remain until Cycle Current : 22:49:34 │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ C-Cycle K-Kill X-Extend Timer ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The Dialer screen is divided into four areas, each containing
information relating to the call in progress and to the entry
being dialed.
The upper left identifies the dialed entry by name and phone
number, and the name of the attached Script, if any. The lower
left tracks the commands sent to the modem and the responses
received from it. The status line displays timely information on
the call in progress. The upper right displays the date of last
connect, the total number of successful connections to the entry
being dialed, and the number of dialing attempt during the
current session. The lower right displays the time at which the
dialing session was started, as well as the current time of day.
While in the dialer window, the following commands are valid:
[C]ycle Pressing [C] cancels the current call and start
dialing the next tagged entry.
[K]ill Pressing [K] cancels the current call and untags
it, effectively removing it from the dialing
queue.
[X]tend Timer Pressing [X] key increases the dial cycle delay
by 5 seconds. The cycle delay is the amount of
time the Redialer waits for a connection before
dialing the next entry (or the same entry if
only one is being called). This delay is defined
in the Alt-N/M/C/H setup menu.
[ESC] Pressing [ESC] cancels the current call and
exits the dialer. Explicitly tagged entries
remain tagged.
The Status message area reports messages from the modem and the
redialer. Modem messages are returned in response to dialing
commands and may include codes such as BUSY, NO CARRIER, VOICE,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 87
=================================================================
and so on.
Extended responses such as BUSY, VOICE, and RINGING may not be
implemented by your particular modem. Check your modem manual to
determine which return codes are available. Modem responses are
defined in the Alt-N/M/M setup menu.
The Dialer may return the following status messages:
Manual Cycle
You pressed [C] to Cycle.
Number has been un-tagged
[K] was pressed to remove the entry.
[ESC] pressed, Dialing aborted
[ESC] was pressed, and you are returned to Command mode.
Dial timing period expired
The cycle delay expired before a connection was made.
Line busy or modem timed out
One of the four modem Error messages (Alt-N/M/M) was
returned and the call was canceled.
CONNECTED, press a key to continue
The modem returned the Connect message (Alt-N/M/M/C) and
is now on-line. If the entry has an attached script, this
message will be immediately erased, you will exit the
dialer, and control will be passed to the script. If no
script is attached to the entry, press any key to return
to the terminal screen to view the on-line session.
Redial pausing XXX
The previous attempt was unsuccessful and the dialer is
waiting before placing the next call.
Dialing halted. Incoming call detected
The Redial Cancel message (Alt-N/M/M/R) was received
between dial attempts, indicating that a call is being
received at the same time dialing is attempted.
XXX Seconds remain until Cycle
The current call is in progress. After XXX seconds, the
call will be canceled if a connection is not established.
The original delay is specified in the Alt-N/M/C/H setup
menu.
Most modems have an internal timer which will cause the unit to
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 88
=================================================================
hang up after waiting for a specific time for a connection to be
made (most have a 60 second default). If the modem hangs up
before the delay expires, your modem's delay is shorter than the
Alt-N/M/C/H setting. It is advised that you set the modem's delay
to a value high enough not to conflict with the QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE setting. Parameters passed to Scripts
Prior to passing control to a linked script, the redialer updates
the values in the following pre-assigned string variables:
$BOARD the name of field.
$NUMBER the number called.
$SPEED the current baud rate.
$COM the parity, data and stop bits.
$PASSWORD the password field.
$PROTOCOL the default transfer protocol.
$SCRIPT the name of the linked script.
$NOTEFILE the name of the attached Note file.
These variables remain in effect for the duration of the script.
For more information on scripts and string variables, refer to
the Script Language Section in this manual.
M Manual Dial
When a number is not in the dialing directory, it can be dialed
manually. Pressing 'M' displays the Manual Dial window:
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del -╒═════════════════ Manual Dial ══════════════════╕ Load │
│ ^R/R -│ Phone number > ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ Other Info │
│ T -╘════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Enter the phone number to call ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Manual dial commands may contain up to 30 characters and/or
digits. The number is not checked for validity. The data typed in
the Phone Number field will be passed to the modem as if it was
attached to a real entry. Any Prefix modifier will be substituted
accordingly.
{F2}-{F12} Speed Dialing
Another new feature is Function Key Speed Dialing. Eleven
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 89
=================================================================
function keys, [F2] through [F12], can be added to the Name
Field, or the Attached Notes to allow for dialing 1 or a groups
of numbers. Alt-N/O/F/C , Clear on FKey, controls whether or not
the Untag All command is executed before tagging the entries
linked to the FKey.
You use the left and right curly braces { } to surround the FKey
name. Like this:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of Z:\QMODEM.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > ABC │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 Sub Line 7 {F9} 555-6035 38400 8N1 MSI │
│2 Home Qmodem Host 555-5555 38400 8N1 QHOST! │
│3 ≡ Sub Line 2 {F11} 555-6157 38400 8N1 SYSOP2 │
│4 Sub Line 3 {F10} 555-6256 19200 8N1 SYSOP2 │
│5 Sub Line 4 {F10} 555-6324 38400 8N1 SYSOP2 │
│6 Sub Line 5 {F10} 555-6006 2400 8N1 SYSOP2 │
│7 Sub Line 6 {F10} 555-9834 38400 8N1 │
│8 Exec-Net {F3} 1-914-555-5566 38400 8N1 EXECNET │
│9 Sub Line 1 555-1453 38400 8N1 SYSOP2 │
│10 GEnie_Local 555-7623 38400 7E1 GENIE.F2 │
In the above example, 4 FKeys are used as hot-keys. {F3}, {F9}
and {F11} each dial a single entry in the FON book. {F10} on the
other hand, will tag 4 entries all at the same time! Remember,
the FKey definition does not have to be in the Name field. It can
be quietly tucked away in the attached Note file of an entry too!
E Edit Prefixes
Prefix characters are used at the beginning or end of phone
numbers (or anywhere between) to add standard and repetitive
dialing information to the numbers as they are dialed. A prefix
may be as simple as "Dial 9 to get out" or "Dial 1 for long
distance", or it may hold a 7-digit SPRINT or MCI local access
number. When used at the end of a number, the prefix becomes a
Suffix which may be used to store a PBX access code, for example.
In special cases, prefixes may even be used to store Alternate
Dialing Commands.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 90
=================================================================
Pressing [E] displays the Prefix edit window:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of D:\QMODEM\DOCSFON.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > ABCEF │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 ≡ Test Node at╒═════════ Revise Prefixes ═════════╕38400 8N1 │
│2 │ A ATDT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│3 │ B AT&M0DT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│4 ≡ Executive Ne│ C AT&M4DT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│5 │ D ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│6 │ E 555-1212,,░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│7 GEnie Local │ F 1234567,░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ 2400 8N1 │
│8 │ G ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│9 │ H ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
│10 │ I ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │38400 8N1 │
╞══════════════════│ J ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │═══════════════════════╡
│ Entrie╘═══════════════════════════F1 Help═╛ FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delete Tagged/Bar Edit L - Load │
│ ^R/R - Revise Tagged/Bar E - Edit Prefixes O - Other Info │
│ T - Tag Multiple N - Attached Note ^P/P - Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░ Edit Prefix Characters F10-Save ESC-Exit with no changes ░░░░░░░░░
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE allows up to 10 Prefix codes, assigned the
letters A through J. Each prefix code can store up to 30
characters.
In the example above, 5 Prefix codes have been defined. Also note
that the phone number for entry #1 contains codes E and F. You
can use multiple Prefix codes in any position of the Number
field.
Do NOT define a phone number using its Alpha representation.
Numbers such as "1-800-DECDEMO" may be a valid telephone number,
but the Dialer will substitute the prefix values of letters A-J
in any phone number. For all we know, 1-800-DECDEMO might get you
connected with Outer Mongolia ($98.55 a minute).
Make sure that the total length of the dialed number AND
prefix(es) does not exceed your modem's maximum command length.
This maximum should be listed in your modem's operation manual.
Most modems limit dialing input to 40 characters.
If you have a Hayes-compatible modem, you will notice that Prefix
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 91
=================================================================
codes A, B, and C look amazingly similar to the Modem Dialing
Command defined in Alt-N/M/M/P. That's because these prefixes are
dialing commands.
To use these alternate dialing commands, precede the desired
prefix with the special character ` (left tick mark or single end
quote). When it detects that special character, it will use the
prefix code which immediately follows instead of the Alt-N
default dialing command.
Example:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > BC │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 ≡ The MSI HQ BBS System `A873-2400 38400 8N1 │
│2 Test Node #2 `C1-805-305-0650 38400 8N1 │
│3 Test Node #3 `B555-1212 38400 8N1 │
│4 38400 8N1 │
The example above assumes a modem with an MNP error-correction
mode that is enabled with the AT&M4 command, and it is disabled
with the AT&M0 command. The DT "Dial Tone" command tells the
modem to tone-dial the number which follows.
In the example above, entry #2 will be dialed with an AT&M4DT
command, which enables MNP error-correction and dials the MSI HQ
BBS (which operates a few HST modems). Entry #3 will be dialed
with an AT&M0DT command, which disables MNP error-correction and
dials 555-1212. Entry #1 will be dialed with a standard ATDT
command which will not affect the current state of MNP error
correction.
If you use the ` modifier to enable or disable one or more of
your modem's features, be sure to set the default dialing prefix
(Alt-N/M/M/P) to the mode which you use most often. By doing
this, you only need to override entries that do not conform to
the default mode. In the previous example, your default dialing
prefix should be "AT&M4DT". Prefix `B would be used to dial
non-MNP systems.
N Attached Notes
Textual information can be "Attached" to each directory entry and
retrieved with a single keystroke. The data is stored in special
Note Files which can be edited with the Internal Editor or any
editor of your choice (as defined in Alt-N/F/V).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 92
=================================================================
To create a note file, update an existing note, or view one, move
the Scrollbar to the entry and press "N". The Note command is an
immediate command and does not affect the tagging of other
entries. When you press "N", the current entry's Note File will
be edited.
The following example demonstrates the use of the Internal
Editor:
╒════════════════════ Notes for The Forbin Project WILDCAT! ═══════════════════╕
│ Line 1 Col 1 Indent D:DOCSFON.1 │
│NAME: Forbin BBS │
│DESC: John Friel │
│BBS : WILDCAT! 4.00 (Alpha test site) │
│BAUD: 1200-38400 │
│MODM: Hayes Optima 28.8 │
│HRS : 24 hrs/day │
│NETS: Internet, SmartNet, ILINK │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Help F2-Save F3-New F9,ESC-Abort F10-Save & Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░
The internal editor screen overlays the command area at the
bottom of the screen. The current entry's name is shown in the
editor window's label.
In the example above, the note is used to store useful
information which cannot be stored into the dialing directory
itself. Using this method to document directory entries allows
the use of the Text Search function (or a text search argument in
a Tag command) to locate entries based on BBS software, the type
of modem in use, or supported baud rates.
The names assigned to Note Files are transparent to the user.
These names are assigned permanently when the directory is
created. Note files have the same file name as the directory to
which they are attached, and their file extension is a number in
the range 1..200, corresponding to the entry to which that
specific note file is attached. The name of each note file is
stored in each directory entry, which allows sorting of the
directory without losing the Note File linkage.
If you use an external editor, make sure that is creates standard
CR/LF-delimited ASCII files to insure that text search commands
work properly.
If an entry has an attached Note, a special symbol will be
displayed immediately following the entry number in the
directory.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 93
=================================================================
The Attached Notes identifier can be changed via the Alt-N/O/C
setup menu.
V Linked Scripts
"Linked Scripts" are executed when a connection is established.
These are commonly referred to as "Logon Scripts". Pressing "V"
allows editing of linked scripts, much in the same way as the
Revise Entry command. The "V" command operates the same way as
the "N" command in that it is immediate and does not affect the
tagging of other entries. When you press "V", the current entry's
linked script will be edited.
When editing a linked script, the Internal Editor uses the entire
screen area.
The Script field cannot be blank for the editor to be invoked.
Following is a sample Linked Script Edit Screen (using the
Internal Editor, of course):
╒══════════════════════════════ Full Screen Edit ══════════════════════════════╕
│ Line 1 Col 1 Insert Indent D:FORBIN.SCR │
│; │
│; QuickLearn Script generated at 12:16:09 on 02-20-89 │
│; May require editing before use. │
│; │
│TurnON 8_BIT │
│TurnOFF LINEFEED │
│TurnON XON/XOFF │
│TurnOFF NOISE │
│TurnOFF MUSIC │
│TurnON SCROLL │
│TurnOFF PRINT │
│TurnOFF ECHO │
│TurnOFF SPLIT │
│TurnOFF BS_DEL │
│; │
│TimeOut 30 ; Set Waitfor timeout to 30 seconds │
│Waitfor "[N]onstop ?" │
│Delay 100 │
│Send "n^M" │
│ │
│Waitfor "What is your first name ?" │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Help F2-Save F3-New F9,ESC-Abort F10-Save & Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 94
=================================================================
F Find Text
The Find Text command is used to quickly scan the dialing
directory for a specific text string. Entry Names, Phone Numbers
and Attached Notes are searched starting with entry #1.
Following the search, the Scrollbar will be positioned on the
first matching entry. Unlike the Tag Multiple command, matching
entries are not tagged Also unlike Tag Multiple, you may only
specify one search argument. With the Find Text command, search
arguments may contain imbedded spaces.
Pressing "F" displays the Find Text prompt:
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delete ╒═══════════════ Find Text ════════════════╕oad │
│ ^R/R - Revise │ Search for > ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ther Info │
│ T - Tag Mul╘══════════════════════════════════════════╛rint 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Enter the text to scan for ESC- Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Remember that the text search also scans Note Files. As a result,
if the text is not found, the search could take a few seconds. In
addition, it is possible that the matching text is in a Note
File, rather than and in the entry's name or number. If that is
the case, press "N" to see the note file. Don't go off the deep
end thinking that the text search command is broken; it isn't.
If the last entry is reached before a match is found, the message
"Text not found" will be displayed.
A Find Again
The Find Again command repeats the last Find Text command from
the next entry forward. If no additional matches are found, the
message "No more matches" will be displayed.
L LOAD
The "L" command is used to load an alternate phone book. If the
new phone book does not exist, you will be prompted to create it.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 95
=================================================================
Pressing "L" displays the following window:
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ╒═════════════════════════ FON File Allocation ═════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ │ │
│ ^│ > D:\QMODEM\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ │ │ │
│ ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
To load a new phone book, type its name (with optional drive and
path information) in the prompt window and [ENTER]. The .FON
extension is not required and will be forced on if not entered.
If the file does not exist, a new one will be created
automatically using the default parameters defined in the
Alt-N/M/C Setup Menu.
All phone book files must have a .FON extension. Should you use
pre Version 4.2 phone books with a different file extension, they
must be renamed with the mandatory .FON file type (the filename
may have to be changed as well to prevent duplication). This was
made necessary when Attached Notes were added. Since the Note
Files are assigned the same name as the directory they are
attached to, duplicate phone book filenames would present
conflicts.
This restriction can be circumvented if phone books reside in
separate sub- directories as long as the phone book file
extension is .FON. (i.e., QMODEM.FON)
O Other Info
Pressing "O" alternates the dialing directory display and allows
viewing of the "right half" of the directory. Following is a
display after the "O" key was pressed. Note the new information
shown:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 96
=================================================================
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of D:\QMODEM\DOCSFON.FON │
│ Total Tags > 0 Prefixes > ABCEF │
│[D] Name Password LastCall Total P D │
│1 ≡ The Forbin Project WILDCAT! 08-09-93 10112 G F │
│2 - - 0 F │
│3 - - 0 F │
│4 ≡ Executive Network-InterLink 12-02-93 21 Z F │
│5 - - 0 F │
│6 - - 0 F │
│7 GEnie Local Access Number test*anguish 08-12-93 321 Z H │
│8 - - 0 F │
│9 - - 0 F │
│10 - - 0 F │
The additional directory information displayed includes fields
labeled LastCall, Total, P, and E. "LastCall" (last CONNECT date)
and "Total" (total CONNECTS) are maintained by the Redialer,
while the P(rotocol) and E(Cho, or Duplex setting) fields are
user-defined.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE does not maintain "Last Dialed" and "Total
Dialed" fields; the Last Call and Total fields shown only reflect
successful connections to the entry.
^P/P Print
The Print command produces a formatted ASCII copy of the Phone
Book on a printer or text file. When pressing 'P', you are
prompted for a valid DOS device or filename. The default is
defined in Alt-N/F/P.
Note the PRN default in the window. To override it, backspace and
type the new device or filename:
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag M - Manual Dial F - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entry A - Find Again │
│ ╒═══════════════════════════ Print Phone Book ════════════════════════════╕ │
│ │ Device or File > PRN░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │ │
│ ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Enter the destination device or filename. ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The above example will create a phone book listing and store it
in the file SAVEFON.TXT in the C:\QMODEM directory. Other valid
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 97
=================================================================
devices include LPT1:, LPT2:, LPT3:, COM1:, etc...
Following is a sample of the formatted phone book listing when
the "P" 80 Column mode is selected:
Qmodem Version 4.6 Phone Book
=============================
Page 1 File : Z:\QMODEM.FON
Name Number Com Script
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Sub Line 7 {F9} 555-1212 38400-8-N-1 SYSOP2
2 ZSoft BBS 1-404-427-1045 38400-8-N-1 ZSOFT
3 Home Qmodem Host 555-1212 38400-8-N-1 QHOST!
4 Sub Line 2 {F11} 555-6157 38400-8-N-1 SYSOP2
5 Sub Line 3 {F10} 555-6256 19200-8-N-1 SYSOP2
6 Sub Line 4 {F10} 555-6324 38400-8-N-1 SYSOP2
7 Sub Line 5 {F10} 555-6006 2400-8-N-1 SYSOP2
8 Sub Line 6 {F10} 555-9834 38400-8-N-1
9 Sub Line 1 555-1212 38400-8-N-1 SYSOP2
10 Exec-Net {F3} 1-914-555-5566 38400-8-N-1 EXECNET
Qmodem Copyright (C) Mustang Software, Inc.
The entry numbers shown in the listing are assigned sequentially
starting with number 1. Since the Print command does not process
blank entries, these number are NOT the same as the entries'
number shown in the Phone Book
Entries and listing numbers will match only if blank entries
appear at the end of the phone book -- i.e., no empty entries are
imbedded between non-blank entries.
S Sort
The Sort command, as its name indicates, sorts the phone book in
one of three user-selected sequences:
1. By Name field
2. By Phone Number field
3. By Total Connects
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 98
=================================================================
╞══════════════════════════════════ Commands ══════════════════════════════════╡
│ Entries Dial FON │
│ ^SP/SP - Tag-P/Tag-Untag╒════════ Sort FON By: ════════╕ - Find Text │
│ I-Ins - Insert New Entr│ 1 - Name (ascending) │ - Find Again │
│ ^D/D-Del - Delete Tagged/B│ 2 - Number (ascending) │ - Load │
│ ^R/R - Revise Tagged/B│ 3 - Total Calls (descending) │ - Other Info │
│ T - Tag Multiple ╘══════════════════════════════╛ - Print 132/80 │
│ U - Untag All V - Linked Script S - Sort │
│ Q - QuickLearn ^U - Undo │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help═══╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ NUMBER-Pick a method to Sort By ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
To select the sort field, press 1, 2, or 3 and then [ENTER] to
Sort, or press [ESC] to cancel the operation. Name and Number
sorts are in Ascending ASCII sequence (A), with number being
sorted before letters. Sorts by Total Calls are in Descending
sequence. As a result, the most-frequently called entries will
move toward the top of the Phone Book (higher numbers being
placed first).
As a safety measure, the Phone Book is backed up prior to being
sorted. Should you change your mind, the previous unsorted copy
of the Phone Book can be restored immediately via the Undo
command, covered next.
^U Undo
Prior to any changes, a snapshot of the Phone Book is taken, and
the Phone Book is saved in a backup file with the same name as
the original and a file extension of .FBK. The last Phone Book
backup can be restored immediately via the Undo command.
When pressing ^U (Ctrl-U), QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE looks for a file
with the same name as the current phone book and an .FBK
extension, If found, that file will be loaded in place of the
current Phone Book. If no .FBK file is found, an Information
Window will be displayed, stating that no backups were found.
If Alt-N/O/T/F/W (Write FBK File) is set OFF, this command does
not restore the backup. There is no FBK file!
Alt-E Duplex Toggle
Alt-E switches QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operation between Full
Duplex and Half Duplex modes. "Duplex" describes the method used
in echoing your keystrokes back to your terminal screen. In Full
Duplex mode, the remote system you are connected to echoes your
keystrokes back to you. In Half-Duplex Mode, the remote system
does not echo your keystrokes, and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE must do
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 99
=================================================================
it instead.
An incorrect Duplex setting will yield one of two results: either
you will NOT see any keystrokes displayed on your screen as you
type, or your keystrokes will be duplicated (i.e., HHEELLLLOO).
In the first case, you are operating in HALF Duplex mode, and you
should switch to FULL. In the second case, you are operating in
FULL Duplex mode and you should switch to HALF.
Most Hayes-compatible modems feature an internal Echo setting. If
set to ON, the modem itself will echo your keystrokes. If your
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE settings are correct, but keystrokes are
duplicated, the modem is likely to be the culprit. Check your
modem manual for switch settings or initialization parameters to
turn the local echo off.
Pressing Alt-E will display a Status window on the screen when
toggled.
Check the Status line for either FDX or HDX to see which mode you
are in.
Alt-F Script File Execution
What is a Script?"
Scripts are internal QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE programs. QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE features a command language to automate and/or
time-schedule logons and interactions with remote computers.
Scripts can be used on commercial services such as CompuServe,
Delphi, Dow Jones News/Retrieval, GEnie, MCI-Mail, NewsNet and
local BBS systems such as PCBoard, WILDCAT!, Fido, and RBBS-PC.
With a script, you need only type a few keystrokes to set
communication parameters, dial the phone, connect to another
computer, log on with your name and account number or password,
retrieve and save information, and log off. Since everything is
automated, there are no mistakes or wasted time spent on-line.
When used properly, scripts can save you money.
Executing a script is a two step process. Pressing Alt-F displays
the script File Allocation Window, in which you must type the
desired script name. You will then get a prompt for any
additional parameters which could be passed to the script.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 100
=================================================================
The following are samples of Script File Allocation and Execution
windows:
╒═══════════════════════ Script File Allocation ════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > Z:\SCRIPTS\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
╒════════════════════════ Script File Execution ════════════════════════╕
│ Script to execute : │
│ Z:\SCRIPTS\COLORS.SCR │
│ Enter Script Parameters (if any) │
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░ Enter optional script parameters, space separated ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░
Once you have entered any additional parameters, if any, the
script will begin.
Scripts must be located in the Scripts Directory specified in the
Alt-N/D/S Setup Menu. If the default directory is blank, QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE will as look for the scripts in the current
directory.
For more information on Scripts, refer to the Scripts Section of
the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE manual.
Alt-G Terminal Emulation
The Terminal Emulation feature allows QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to
behave like a terminal other than a standard PC display, such as
the popular VT100 from Digital Equipment Corp. While in terminal
emulation mode, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE interprets device-dependent
information so that it is displayed properly on the PC screen as
if it were a native terminal of the selected type.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE supports 7 different types of emulations:
TTY No emulation at all.
ANSI Emulates the ANSI.SYS of PC DOS.
VT100 Emulates the Digital VT100.
TVI925 Emulates the Televideo 925.
DBUG_A Debug ASCII Mode
DBUG_H Debug HEX Mode
AVATAR Superset of ANSI for OPUS BBS systems
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 101
=================================================================
When pressing Alt-G, the following window will be displayed:
╒═════════ Set Emulation ═════════╕
│ Active Emulation is ANSI │
│ │
│ 1 TTY │
│ 2 ANSI │
│ 3 VT100 │
│ 4 TVI925 │
│ 5 DBUG_A │
│ 6 DBUG_H │
│ 7 AVATAR │
│ │
│ Your choice : _ │
╘═════════════════════════════════╛
To select the desired emulation mode, press the corresponding
letter. The screen will be cleared and the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
Status Line will reflect the new emulation mode.
If you are in Split-Screen mode (via Alt-S), you may not select a
new terminal emulation mode. In order to operate properly,
Split-Screen mode forces TTY emulation.
TTY
This has no specific character translations or function keys. The
full ASCII character set is supported with the IBM extended
character set (codes 128- 255).
TTY does not include cursor control codes or enhanced video
options.
When calling BBS systems, the ANSI emulation is recommended.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 102
=================================================================
ANSI
This emulation is recommended for BBS usage. Complete IBM
ANSI.SYS compatibility is built right in. You do not need to load
the ANSI.SYS driver in your CONFIG.SYS file. Extensions include
the VT100 mode Screen clear commands because CompuServe can't
tell the difference between ANSI and VT100.
KEY FUNCTION XMITED CODE
Tab Horizontal Tab 0x09
Del Character delete 0x7F
Home Home the Cursor 0x1B5B48
Up Arrow Cursor Up 0x1B5B41
Down Arrow Cursor Down 0x1B5B42
Left Arrow Cursor Left 0x1B5B44
Right Arrow Cursor Right 0x1B5B43
PgDn Clear Screen 0x1B5B324A
End Erase End of Line 0x1B5B4B
Enter Carriage Return 0x0D
Ctrl-Enter Linefeed 0x0A
VT100
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE supports the standard VT100 functions;
half/full duplex, set/reset modes, scrolling region, keypad
application mode, special graphics character set, US & UK
character sets, full display attributes including ANSI color
extensions, programmable tabs and cursor control.
To take advantage of larger screen dimensions other than 80x25,
you must have an EGA or VGA card that supports more lines and
columns in text mode. Assuming you have such a card, place the
card in the desired mode (say, 132x43) and then select the VT100
emulation. Until changed manually (via Alt-2, Alt-4 or an
external driver), the screen will lock in on the selected
dimensions.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE responds to the "Identify" command
(0x1B5B63 or 0x1B5A) with "ESC[?1;2c" (0x1B5B3F313B3263).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 103
=================================================================
KEY FUNCTION XMITED CODE
Tab Horizontal Tab 0x09
Del Character delete 0x7F
Home Home the Cursor 0x1B5B48
Up Arrow Cursor Up 0x1B5B41
Down Arrow Cursor Down 0x1B5B42
Left Arrow Cursor Left 0x1B5B44
Right Arrow Cursor Right 0x1B5B43
PgDn Clear Screen 0x1B5B481B5B324A
End Erase End of Line 0x1B5B4B
Enter Carriage Return 0x0D
Ctrl-Enter Linefeed 0x0A
TVI925
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE supports a partial list of Televideo 925
functions; cursor positioning, inverse video, and custom Status
lines. Protected fields and multiple video pages are not
supported, but will be in a future release.
KEY FUNCTION XMITED CODE
Tab Horizontal Tab 0x09
Del Character delete 0x7F
Up Arrow Cursor Up 0x0B
Down Arrow Cursor Down 0x16
Left Arrow Cursor Left 0x08
Right Arrow Cursor Right 0x0C
Enter Carriage Return 0x0D
Ctrl-Enter Linefeed 0x0A
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 104
=================================================================
DEBUG ASCII
This is a custom Emulation for debugging connections. It
resembles the TTY emulation with the exception that ASCII codes
0-31 and 255 are displayed in mnemonics surrounded by square
brackets.
The list is as follows:
Code Mnem. Code Mnem.
# 0 [NUL] #16 [DLE]
# 1 [SOH] #17 [DC1]
# 2 [STX] #18 [DC2]
# 3 [ETX] #19 [DC3]
# 4 [EOT] #20 [DC4]
# 5 [ENQ] #21 [NAK]
# 6 [ACK] #22 [SYN]
# 7 [BEL] #23 [ETB]
# 8 [BS] #24 [CAN]
# 9 [HT] #25 [EN]
#10 [LF] #26 [SUB]
#11 [VT] #27 [ESC]
#12 [FF] #28 [FS]
#13 [CR] #29 [GS]
#14 [SO] #30 [RS]
#15 [SI] #31 [US]
#255 [0xFF]
DEBUG HEX
This is also a custom Emulation for debugging connections. It
resembles nothing you've ever seen before... All data received is
displayed in HEX between square brackets.
A sample looks like this:
[61][74][0D][0D][0A][4F][4B][0D][0A]
This is the result of typing AT[ENTER] and the modem responding
with "OK".
AVATAR
This emulation is a superset of the ANSI emulation. As such, all
of the above information on ANSI applies to Avatar. AVATAR
control codes were designed to be lean and mean. AVATAR includes
provision for packing replicated characters which can cut
transmission time significantly.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 105
=================================================================
Enhanced control codes are as follows:
Codes Type ANSI Equivalent
^V^A<a> Attribute ESC[n;nm
The "<a>" is a single byte. The value of this attribute byte
corresponds to the video attributes used by IBM on their Color
Graphics adapters. (Intense video is supported, black-on-black is
not.)
^V^B Blinking On ESC[5m
Blinking is turned off by the next ^V^A command.
^V^C Cursor Up ESC[1A
Move the cursor up one line.
^V^D Cursor Down ESC[1B
Move the cursor down one line.
^V^E Cursor Left ESC[1D
^V^F Cursor Right ESC[1C
^V^G Clear to end of line ESC[K
^V^H<r><c> Set cursor position ESC[x;xf
These are 1-based numbers with the row coordinate first. The
upper left of the display is "1,1." The start of the second line
would be "2,1." In most cases, the lower right corner will be
"24,80." Values that fall outside of the user's declared screen
size are clipped.
^L Home & Clear Screen ESC[H
ESC[0;30;36m
ESC[2J
Note that the color will be reset to white on black, and not the
default Text Color of Alt-N/V/C.
^Y<c><#> Replicate Character No matching ANSI command.
This will replicate character <c> (or any byte 0-255) for <#>
number of iterations. <#> can be in the range 1-255.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 106
=================================================================
Alt-H Hang-up
The Hang-up command is used to force the modem to terminate a
call. In most cases, you would not use this command to disconnect
from the remote computer; you would use the remote computer's
standard LOG OFF procedure. However, in case you are experiencing
problems (remote computer lockup, bad line noise) you may use
this
What Alt-H does varies, depending on the information specified in
the Alt-N/M/M/H Setup Menu. Usually, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will
send the modem hang-up string defined in your setup. However, if
you specified "DTR" as a modem hang-up string, QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE will toggle the "DTR" signal and the connection will be
dropped. And if you specified "BREAK", the UART BREAK signal will
be sent.
The recommended Hang-up string for Hayes and compatible modems
is:
"^~^~^~+++^~^~^~ATH^M" where:
^~^~^~ = 1.5 seconds delay
+++ = go to Command Mode string
^~^~^~ = another 1.5 seconds delay
ATH = command to Hang-up
^M = the [ENTER] key
"DTR" stands for "Data Terminal Ready". Most modems will
automatically disconnect from the phone line DTR signal is
dropped for 1.5 seconds. Having the three characters "DTR" in the
Hang-up string does exactly that. If in doubt, check your modem
manual to see if "Dropping DTR" is an accepted method of
disconnecting. If so, this should be the preferred method.
BREAK is a signal generated by the UART (Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter, the main chip on your serial adapter or
modem). Some PBX and Bell type modems require a BREAK signal
before they will take action. Again, check your modem manual
before setting this option.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 107
=================================================================
Alt-I Information on QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
The QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE information screen always displays the
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE release number, our Voice, BBS, and Fax
numbers.
█╒═════════════════════════════════════════════╕ ▄████████████████████
█│ Qmodem - 4.6 Test-Drive │ Professional Communications████
█│ Copyright (C) 1994 Mustang Software, Inc. │ Software for your PC ██
█│ All Rights Reserved World-Wide │ ██
█╘═════════════════════════════════════════════╛ ▄███████████████████████████
█████▀ ╒═════How to reach MSI══════╕█████████████████████████
███▀ │ Sales : (805) 873-2500 │█████████████████████████
█▀ │ Support : (805) 873-2550 │█████████████████████████
▀ │ BBS : (805) 873-2400 │█████████████████████████
│ Fax : (805) 873-2599 │█████████████████████████
╘═══════════════════════════╛█████████████████████████
▄▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▄ ╒══════════════════════════════════════════╕████
▄▀████▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄███ ▀▄ │ Print an Order Form ? (y/n) │████
▄▀████▄▀ ▀▄████▀▄ ╘══════════════════════════════════════════╛████
█████▄▀ ▀▄█████ ▄██████████████████████████████████████████████
█████ █ ███ ███████▀▀███▀██████▀█████▀███████▀███▀███▀██████
█████ █████ ███████▀██▀██ ██ ▄██ ██ ▄██ ██▄▄▄▄▄██▀█▀██ ██████
█████ ▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄ █████ ███████ ▄██ ██ ██ ███ ██ ███ ██▀▀▀▀ ██ █ ██ ██████
█████ ▄▀▀████████▀▀▄ █████ ███████ ▄██▄▄██ ██████ █████▀ ██████▀██ █▄██ ██████
█████▀▄█▄▄▀▀▀▀▀▀▄▄██▀▄████ ██████▄▄▄██████▄▄█▄▄▄▄▄▄█▄▄▄▄▄██▄▄▄▄▄▄█▄▄███▄▄██████
▀▄████▀▄ ▄████▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀███▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀███▀▀▀▀▀
▀▄ ██▀▀▀▀▀▀▀▀██▀▄▄ █████████ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ ███
▀▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▀ ▀▀▄▄▄▄▄▄███▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄███▄▄▄▄▄
████████████████████████████████████████████████████████
█████████████████████████████████████████████████████████
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 108
=================================================================
Alt-J Function Key Macros
Function key (FKey for short) macros are used to store keystrokes
which are sent repetitively. When pressing Alt-J, the following
window is displayed:
╒═════════════════════════ Function Key Assignment ══════════════════════════╕
│ Normal Shift Ctrl Alt │
│F1 @Script Teleph F1 F1 F1 @Shellx MAKEH │
│F2 @Edit F2 F2 F2 │
│F3 F3 F3 F3 @Dial TSalt │
│F4 F4 F4 F4 │
│F5 F5 F5 F5 │
│F6 F6 F6 F6 @Script TagDia │
│F7 F7 @edit \scripts F7 F7 │
│F8 F8 @Script test1. F8 F8 │
│F9 F9 F9 F9 @DIAL TGEnie_L │
│F10 $Password^M F10 F10 F10 @script test1. │
│F11 F11 @Edit \qmhost. F11 F11 │
│F12 F12 F12 F12 ^F │
│ │
│ Key File is C:\QMODEM\ANSI.KEY │
│ │
│ 1 - Normal 2 - Shift 3 - Ctrl 4 - Alt L - Load ESC - Exit │
│ │
│ Your Choice ? │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ 1,2,3,4-Display/Edit ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Up to 48 FKey Macros may be programmed at one time. FKey Macros
are stored in "Key Definition Files" with .KEY file extensions
and user-assigned filenames. Each key can store up to 4 separate
macros, depending on the key's Shift state (Fn, Shift-Fn, Ctrl-Fn
and Alt-Fn). To execute an FKey Macro, press the desired Shift
state key, hold it down, and strike the Fn key.
The first 14 characters of each FKeys are displayed in 4 columns
corresponding to the shift states described earlier. The status
line at the bottom of the window displays summary instructions on
how to display and/or edit each series of macros, load an
alternate key definition file, or exit the Alt-J screen.
To view the complete key definitions for a given shift state,
press the number (1-4) corresponding to that state (1=Normal,
2=Shift, 3=Ctrl, 4=Alt).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 109
=================================================================
Editing Key Macros
To edit an FKey macro, press the number (1-4) corresponding to
the key's shift state, as described above. The following edit
screen will then be displayed (in the following example, the "3"
key was pressed to display/edit Alt-Fn key assignments):
╒═════════════════════════ Function Key Assignment ══════════════════════════╕
│ Definitions for Alt F-keys │
│F1 @SHELL MAP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F2 @SCRIPT SETCOLOR 7 1 "String passed to S2"░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F3 @DIAL TSalt░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F4 @EDIT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F5 @STAMP This will be put in the LOG file.░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F6 @SHELLX DEL *.BAK░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F7 Be right back... Went to the kitchen...░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F8 I'm back.░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F9 @DIAL TGEnie_Local░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F10 @SCRIPT WHO░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F11 $PASSWORD^M░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│F12 ^F░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ │
│ Valid Edit Keys : INS - Insert mode Toggle . - Field Up │
│ DEL - Delete Character . - Field Down │
│ <- - Character Left ^<- - Word Left │
│ -> - Character Right ^-> - Word Right │
│ Special Characters : ^M = [ENTER] ^~ = ½ second delay │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░ Edit Function Key Entries F10-Save ESC-Exit with no changes░░░░░░░
The Alt-J edit screen features a scrollbar cursor. Move the
scrollbar with the up/down arrow keys to select the key
definition to edit. The following section describes available
macro keywords and commands in detail.
DOS Shell Macros
Two macro commands, @SHELL and @SHELLX allow you to quickly
access DOS with the touch of a key. Any program, with the
exception of those that attach themselves to DOS (TSR's) can be
executed provided enough free memory is available.
Examples:
@SHELL CHKDSK
C:░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will run the DOS Chkdsk program on drive C:. When complete,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 110
=================================================================
it will stop and prompt you to press a key before returning to
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE (and erasing the screen).
@SHELLX DEL
*.BAK░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will delete all the files with the extension of ".BAK" and
immediately return when completed.
@SHELL ESU
43░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
If you have a Vega VGA, this is the program used to switch video
modes on the fly. The @SHELL and @SHELLX macros will detect video
mode changes and reset QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE when returning from
DOS. A handy way to use those SuperEGA and SuperVGA cards to get
higher screen resolutions and larger viewing areas.
A Dial Macro
The @DIAL macro is just like invoking an Alt-D/T command. Any
text following the @DIAL is parsed in the same way that Alt-D/T
does. For more information, refer to the Alt-D/T section.
Examples:
@DIAL TMUstang░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will search all entries for the text "MUstang". The search
is not case sensitive. The Name, Number and attached Notes are
searched. All entries that match are tagged and then dialing will
start.
@DIAL 1 2 23 155░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will tag entries 1, 2, 23 and 155 to be dialed.
@DIAL 1 TO 200░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will tag entry 1, then all the entries with the letter "O",
and finally entry 200. Did you think it would dial all the
entries in the phone book? Well, not yet anyway!
NOTE: @DIAL will do an implied "Untag-All" before applying the
new tags.
An Edit Macro
The @EDIT macro allows you to quickly call up the internal editor
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 111
=================================================================
to edit/view a file. If a filename follows @EDIT, that file will
be brought up in edit immediately. If no filename has been
specified, then you will be prompted for one.
Examples:
@EDIT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will prompt for the filename to edit.
@EDIT QMHOST.PWD░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will edit the Internal HOST database file.
A HELP Macro The @HELP macro allows you to call up a Help Screen
from TERMINAL mode.
Examples:
@HELP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Something like this will appear:
╒═══════════════════════════════ Terminal Mode ════════════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ You are now in what is called TERMINAL MODE. This is where you can enter │
│ modem commands while Offline, and communicate with a remote computer while │
│ Online. │
│ │
│ If you need a list of Commands that are available, press Esc to exit the │
│ Help System and then press the Home key. │
│ │
│ If you would like to see the Index of Help Topics, press F1 │
│ │
│ Hot Links: Help Index Dialing a number │
│ │
│ Qmodem Setup │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Topic Index AltF1-Previous Topic ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
From here, you could get more help on the three highlighted
topics, press [F1] for the Topic Index, or [ESC] to return back
to terminal mode. The most common use of this will be to quickly
get to the Topic Index.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 112
=================================================================
NOTE: When new KEY files are created, the @HELP macro is not
automatically placed in the F1 slot. You still have to do this
for yourself.
A Script Macro
In the example above, entries Alt-F2, Alt-F10 and Alt-F12 use the
keyword @SCRIPT. The @SCRIPT macro command causes execution of
the Script whose filename follows (the .SCR script file extension
is not required). If the script requires parameters, they must be
included in the key definition following the script name. The
@SCRIPT macro, the script name, and script parameters must be
separated by at least one space.
Examples:
This will call the script "TEST1.SCR". Because ".SCR" was not
included in the filename, it is added by default.
@SCRIPT TEST1.SCR░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will call the script "TEST1". Because the "." is at the end
of the script name, the default extension is not included.
@SCRIPT SETCOLOR 7 1 "String passed to S2"░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This will call the Script SETCOLOR and pass it 3 parameters.
Parameter 1 is the character "7", parameter 2 is "1" and
parameter 3 is "String passed to S2". Since the third parameter
is text with imbedded spaces, it must be enclosed within quotes.
A LOG Macro
The @STAMP macro causes the text following it to be recorded into
the current LOG file, preceded by the current time and date. For
more information on the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE LOG file, refer to
the Alt-0 Command.
Example:
@STAMP This will be put in the LOG file.░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The LOG file entry would look like this (except with the current
time and date):
16:26:54 11-20-93 This will be put in the LOG file.
The special characters "^~" and "^M" have no meaning when @STAMP
is used.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 113
=================================================================
The $PASSWORD Variable When used in a key macro definition,
$PASSWORD variable is replaced by the current entry's PASSWORD
field (see Alt-D). Whenever a connection is made, the dialed
entry's Password is automatically loaded into the $PASSWORD
variable. Unlike all the other special macro commands which must
appear first in the macro, $PASSWORD may be used anywhere within
the macro text.
Example:
Let's assume that the word "QMODEM!" is the password for the
entry we have just connected to and the following was coded for
Alt-F11:
My password is $PASSWORD░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
After the connection is made, pressing Alt-F11 would send the
following:
My password is QMODEM
Loading a new Key file
Pressing the "L" key while in the main Alt-J screen will load a
new .KEY file, if found. If the specified .KEY file does not
exist, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will issue a prompt for its
creation. That's new key definition files are made.
Alt-K Changing COM Ports
The Alt-K commands is used to switch the active serial
communications port. After pressing Alt-K, the following window
is displayed:
╒═════════ Set COM Port ══════════╕
│ Active COM Port is COM1 │
│ │
│ 1 COM1 Base(03F8) Irq(04) │
│ 2 COM2 Base(02F8) Irq(03) │
│ 3 COM3 Base(03E8) Irq(04) │
│ │
│ Your choice : │
╘═════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ NUMBER-Select a new COM Port ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE supports up to 8 serial communication ports
(COM1 through COM8). Only the ports specifically defined in your
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 114
=================================================================
setup will be identified in the Alt-K menu. In the above example,
ports 1, 2 and 3 were defined during installation.
To select a new communication port, press the desired number
(1-8). Once the new port is selected, the current port will be
closed and the new one opened. Communication parameters (baud
rate, parity, start/stop bits) will remain unchanged. To change
the communication parameters, use the Alt-P command.
Alt-L Changing the Logged Drive
"Logged Drive" refers to the default drive at the time QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE was started. This drive may be changed by using the
Alt-L command. Pressing Alt-L displays the following prompt
window:
╒══ Change Log Drive ══╕
│ Logged Drive is : C │
│ Enter new Drive : _ │
╘══════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ A thru Z-Select New Drive ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
To select a new default drive, type its drive letter and [ENTER].
The new drive will be verified before proceeding. If the drive is
invalid, a message to that effect will be displayed and a new
drive prompt will be issued. Pressing [ESC] will cancel the drive
change request.
Alt-M Music Toggle
Music will be generated on the PC's speaker only if the following
conditions are met:
1. ANSI terminal emulation is active (see Alt-G).
2. The Music Toggle is ON (see Alt-M).
3. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE receives encoded music data.
If any of the above condition is not met, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
will disregard encoded music information. To be recognized by
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, encoded music data must conform to the
following format:
ESC [ M .....music codes..... ^N
Music codes are those used in the BASIC language PLAY statement
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 115
=================================================================
(please refer to your BASIC language manual for further
information on the PLAY statement). Music strings must end with
the Ctrl-N (^N) character. If the ^N character is missing, It is
assumed that the following text, up to 255 characters, is
playable music. It might not sound too good, however.
Alt-N Invoking the Setup Menu
Almost all of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's operational parameters can
be customized. You may change the colors, upload or download
directory paths or even add an external protocol without leaving
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
To use the Alt-N command requires that enough free memory be
present. If this is not the case, you must exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE via the Alt-X command and run the Qinstall program
externally.
Refer to the SETUP section at the beginning of the manual for
complete installation instructions.
Alt-O Changing Subdirectories
By definition, a directory listing request (see Alt-W) will
display the current subdirectory. However, the default
subdirectory is that which was active when QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
was started. In order to view the contents of other directories,
the current directory must be changed via the Alt-O command.
When pressing Alt-O, the following windows are displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════════ Z:\*.* ══════════════════════════════════╕
│ ..\ HOSTDIR\ PRINTDOC\ RZSZ\ VCS\ │
│ DL\ LOGO\ QMEDIT\ SCRIPTS\ YAK\ │
│ GG\ NCI\ QPRO\ SHOW\ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░ ARROWS-Scroll ENTER-Change Directory F10-Save ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░
This is a Pick List window with 5 columns. The top of the window
shows the current subdirectory. The entries in the pick list are
possible subdirectories that can be selected as the new current
directory.
Move the scrollbar to the entry and press [ENTER] to make the
change. The top of the window will also change to reflect this.
When the top of the window shows where you want to be, press
[F10] to save. At any time, you can press [ESC] to return to your
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 116
=================================================================
original starting point.
Notice the upper left corner of the example, [..\]. This
references the previous subdirectory, if any. Selecting this
entry moves you up the directory tree.
Alt-P Com Port Settings
The Alt-P command allows immediate changes to serial
communications parameters. Pressing Alt-P displays the following
window:
╒════════════ Communications Port Setup ═════════════╕
│ Port COM1: 38400,8,N,1 │
│ │
│ Speed Parity Data Stop │
│ A - 110 F - 9600 K - Even P - 7 R - 1 │
│ B - 300 G - 19200 L - Odd Q - 8 S - 2 │
│ C - 1200 H - 38400 M - Mark │
│ D - 2400 I - 57600 N - None │
│ E - 4800 J - 115200 O - Space │
│ │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░ LETTER-Select a Parameter ENTER-Save Changes ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░
Select the new parameters by pressing the corresponding option
letter. If an error was made, pressing [ESC] restores the
previous parameters and exits the Alt-P window. Pressing [ENTER]
completes the parameter changes and exits the window. For
example, say we want to set the port to 1200,7,E,1 and the
current setting is 19200,N,8,1. You would press the letters C and
K and press [ENTER]. You might be wondering, why didn't you need
to press P to set 7 data bits? Because when either K or L is
selected, it forces P.
Alt-Q QuickLearn Script Recorder
The QuickLearn Script Recorder is much like a video camera. As it
records your interactions, it creates a Script which can be
replayed later to replicate the session while QuickLearn was
active. Alt-Q is a toggle; if the QuickLearn recorder is not
active, it is started. If it is active, it terminates and the
Script is saved.
In a nutshell, QuickLearn stores incoming data internally until
you type information yourself. QuickLearn assumes that your data
was entered in response to a prompt or question from the system
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 117
=================================================================
you are connected to. The last 32 characters received are assumed
to be the prompt to which you are responding, which will be
reflected in the final script as a WAITFOR command. In turn, the
entire contents of your response will be included in the script
as a SEND command.
The "Q" tag was mentioned in the Dialing Directory section (Alt-D
command). If an entry is tagged by pressing "Q", the dialer will
start QuickLearn automatically -- but only if a Script file name
is defined and the file itself does not exist --. As a result,
script recording starts the instant the connection is
established.
What if you are already on-line and want to create a script to
perform a repetitive function? You would invoke Alt-Q!
When pressing Alt-Q, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE displays the following
script file allocation window:
╒═══════════════════════ Script Learn Allocation ═══════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > Z:\SCRIPTS\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Type the desired script file name and [ENTER]. If the script
already exists, an overwrite prompt will be displayed. You may
chose to overwrite the prompt, or select a new name for the
script. If the script file is not found, it will be created.
While QuickLearn is active, the status line is changed to the
following:
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ QuickLearn Recording Active! AltQ-End Recording ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
When you are finished recording a script, press Alt-Q again.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will display the following status window,
after which the standard Status Line will be restored.
╒═════════ Status ══════════╕
│ QuickLearn recording done │
╘═══════════════════════════╛
QuickLearn saves the state of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE environment
variables at the beginning of each Script. These variable include
toggles such as Split-screen mode (SPLIT), Duplex setting (ECHO),
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 118
=================================================================
as shown below:
;
; QuickLearn Script generated at 14:41:51 on 08-13-1993
; May require editing before use.
;
Graphics ANSI
TurnON 8_BIT
TurnOFF LINEFEED
TurnON XON/XOFF
TurnON NOISE
TurnOFF MUSIC
TurnON SCROLL
TurnOFF PRINT
TurnOFF ECHO
TurnOFF SPLIT
TurnOFF BS_DEL
TimeOut 30 ; Set Waitfor for 30 seconds
This sample was created by pressing Alt-Q, entering a script
filename, and then pressing Alt-Q again to save the file.
The top of each Quicklearned script contains a time and date
stamp, followed by the commands needed to restore the environment
at the time the script was recorded. Note the second line: the
script may require editing before use.
QuickLearn also forces a default script TIMEOUT command of 30
seconds (the last line of the sample script). This default value
is hard-coded in QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE and can only be changed by
manually editing the script. The default value is probably higher
than necessary. Set this value to the longest estimated time the
script will have to wait on data from the other system; if the
delay exceed the TIMEOUT value, the script will be canceled
automatically.
As QuickLearn records the session, it may capture text strings
which contain variable data, such as time and/or date
information. A good example would be a script created while
logging on to a Bulletin Board System (BBS). Many BBS's feature
command line prompts which include time used and time remaining
for the current session. The values recorded in the original
script may never be matched by the values received when the
script is replayed.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 119
=================================================================
For example:
WaitFor "56 min. left) Qmodem Conference Command?"
Delay 100
Send "R S NS^M"
Needless to say, the script will ONLY work if there are EXACTLY
56 minutes left. Likely, the WAITFOR command will wait forever
for a prompt that will never come. To eliminate this problem,
edit the WAITFOR command and remove variable information which is
likely to cause problems:
WaitFor "Conference Command?"
Delay 100
Send "R S NS^M"
The " 56 min. left) Qmodem " was removed from the WAITFOR string,
leaving a generic prompt which will work at any time, and in any
conference.
Commands that are recorded
QuickLearn also records certain QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE commands.
Following is a list of supported QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE commands,
and examples of the generated script commands which replicate
them:
Alt-B Beeps & Bells toggle
TurnON NOISE
TurnOFF NOISE
Alt-C Clears the screen
ClrScr
Alt-D Dial an entry number
Dial "1"
Alt-D/L Load a new FON book
LoadFON C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON
Alt-E Half/Full Duplex toggle
TurnON ECHO
TurnOFF ECHO
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 120
=================================================================
Alt-G Change current terminal emulation mode
Graphics TTY
Graphics ANSI
Graphics VT100
Alt-H Terminate the connection
HangUp
Alt-J/L Load a new KEY file
LoadKEY C:\QMODEM\VT100.KEY
Alt-K Change current COM Port selection
Port 1
Alt-L Change current Logged Drive
Drive C
Alt-M Toggle playing of MUSIC if detected
TurnON MUSIC
TurnOFF MUSIC
Alt-O Change current Subdirectory
CHDIR C:\QMODEM\SCRIPTS
Alt-P Change current Baud Rate
SETCOMM 19200 8 NONE 1
Alt-R Execute the DOS shell
DOS "Command"
BIGDOS "Command"
Alt-S Toggle the Split Screen mode
TurnON SPLIT
TurnOFF SPLIT
Alt-U Toggle the Scroll-back capture
TurnON SCROLL
TurnOFF SCROLL
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 121
=================================================================
Alt-V View a File with an external program
DOS "LIST filename"
Alt-X Exit the Script AND QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
SYSTEM X
SYSTEM Y
Alt-Y Delete a File
DOS "DEL filename"
Alt-Z Toggle the Xon/Xoff flow control
TurnON XON/XOFF
TurnOFF XON/XOFF
Alt-1 Toggle the Backspace/DEL key output
TurnON BS_DEL
TurnOFF BS_DEL
Alt-2 Set 80x25 line mode for EGA/VGA
EGA 25
Alt-4 Set 80x43/50 line mode for EGA/VGA
EGA 43
Alt-8 Toggle the Hi-Bit filter
TurnON 8_BIT
TurnOFF 8_BIT
Alt-9 Toggle the Printer Echo
TurnON PRINT
TurnOFF PRINT
Alt-0 Toggle the LOG file on/off
TurnOFF LOG
LOG C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.LOG
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 122
=================================================================
Sh-Tab Toggle the Add Linefeeds
TurnON LINEFEED
TurnOFF LINEFEED
^Home Toggle the Capture file on/off
TurnOFF CAPTURE
CAPTURE C:\QMODEM\CAPTURE.TXT
^End Send the UART BREAK signal
BREAK
PgUp/ Upload (send) a file
^PgUp
UPLOAD PROTOCOL [Filename]
PgDn/ Download (receive) a file
^PgDn
DOWNLOAD PROTOCOL [Filename]
FKey xx Function Key macro execution
FKey 13 [shift F1 key]
Putting it all together
Now that the basics have been covered, let's go over a sample
QuickLearn recording session. The scripts were recorded while
calling the MUSTANG SOFTWARE HQ! BBS Home of QMODEM.
First, a little advance information: we will call using the Alt-D
directory with an attached script name of "MUSTANG". The Password
field in Alt-D for the Mustang entry will be used to link to an
FKey macro (F10 in this example).
In the Function Key setup (Alt-J), we must edit the F10 key to
contain the string "$PASSWORD^M". Once this is done, we can press
Alt-D and tag the Mustang entry with a "Q" to invoke QuickLearn.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 123
=================================================================
In this example, the FKey assignments are blank. Our F9 entry
should look like:
╒═════════════════════════ Function Key Assignment ══════════════════════════╕
│ Normal Shift Ctrl Alt │
│F1 F1 F1 F1 │
│F2 F2 F2 F2 │
│F3 F3 F3 F3 │
│F4 F4 F4 F4 │
│F5 F5 F5 F5 │
│F6 F6 F6 F6 │
│F7 F7 F7 F7 │
│F8 F8 F8 F8 │
│F9 F9 F9 F9 │
│F10 $Password^M F10 F10 F10 │
│F11 F11 F11 F11 │
│F12 F12 F12 F12 │
│ │
│ Key File is C:\QMODEM\ANSI.KEY │
│ │
│ 1 - Normal 2 - Shift 3 - Ctrl 4 - Alt L - Load ESC - Exit │
│ │
│ Your Choice ? │
╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ 1,2,3,4-Display/Edit ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The Alt-D screen is also blank except for the first directory
entry for the Mustang Software HQ! BBS. The second screen
snapshot shows the "O"ther page of the directory with the
Password field "MyPassword!".
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON │
│ Total Tags > 1 Prefixes > BC │
│[D] Name Number Port Script │
│1 Q Mustang Software HQ! BBS 1-805-873-2400 38400 8N1 MUSTANG.SCR │
│2 38400 8N1 │
│3 38400 8N1 │
╒═════════════════════════════════ Phone Book ═════════════════════════════════╕
│ Page 1 of D:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON │
│ Total Tags > 1 Prefixes > BC │
│[D] Name Password LastCall Total P D │
│1 ≡ Mustang Software Wildcat! BBS MyPassword! 08-09-90 10112 G F │
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 124
=================================================================
Calling Mustang ...
CONNECT 28800/ARQ
WILDCAT! Copyright (c) 87, 94 Mustang Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
^H^H^H^H Registration Number 86-0001. v4.00MP Node 24
Connected at 28800 bps. Reliable connection. ANSI detected.
■ You have connected to WILDCAT! HQ BBS.
■ New phone numbers are available for registered and non-registered callers.
■ See Bulletin 6 for complete phone rotation, and numbers for all 15 lines.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
What is your first name ? John <---(1)
What is your last name ? Friel <---(2)
Looking up "JOHN FRIEL"... Please wait.
Welcome JOHN FRIEL from Mustang Software, Inc..
Password? [********* ] <---(3)
Good morning, John, you are caller number 370,035.
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────┐▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│ WELCOME TO MUSTANG SOFTWARE, INC. │▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│ │▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│ Development Home of │▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│ │▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│ Wildcat! and QmodemPro │▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄├──────────────────────────────────────────────────┤▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄│Wildcat! QmodemPro for Windows QmodemPro for DOS│▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄└──────────────────────────────────────────────────┘▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄▄
MSI - Connecting the World in '94
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Pause- [C]ontinue, [N]onStop, [S]top? [C] <--- (4)
No bulletins have been updated since your last call.
Would you like to view the bulletin menu? [N] <--- (5)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 125
=================================================================
John, your quote for today is:
"Two years ago I started with a shareware version of Wildcat! BBS in a town
that never heard of it. Shortly following, I quickly became the popular
BBS in the area and now 80% of the sysops in the area have converted over
to Wildcat! It is the users that determine the popularity of a BBS and
Wildcat! is a hands down favorite. It is user friendly, fast, powerful,
easy to set up, well programmed, and well supported. I've never been on a
system that matches it."
-Hugh Mitchell, M.D., Doctor On Board HST (416) 684-7710 St. Catharines,
No new personal mail found.
Press [ENTER] to continue? <--- (6)
Conf: "[0] - Private E-Mail ONLY", time on 0, with 997 remaining.
MAIN MENU: [M F C B P I O V Y S U D N G H ? 1 J E Z W T] ? [ ]
Wherever information was entered in response to a prompt, it is followed by a
"<---(n)" tag. Following is a review of the above session:
1. John[ENTER] Entered my first name.
2. Friel[ENTER] Entered my last name.
3. [F10] Pressed the F10 key to send the password.
4. c[ENTER] Continue from -Pause- prompt
5. n[ENTER] Skip the bulletin menu
6. Alt-Q Pressed Alt-Q to end QuickLearn!
And QuickLearn generated the following script:
;
; QuickLearn Script generated at 15:19:10 on 08-13-1990
; May require editing before use.
;
Graphics TTY
TurnON 8_BIT
TurnOFF LINEFEED
TurnOFF XON/XOFF
TurnON NOISE
TurnON MUSIC
TurnON SCROLL
TurnOFF PRINT
TurnOFF ECHO
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 126
=================================================================
TurnOFF SPLIT
TurnOFF BS_DEL
TimeOut 30 ; Set Waitfor for 30 seconds
Waitfor "What is your first name ?"
Delay 100
Send "John^M"
Waitfor "What is your last name ?"
Delay 100
Send "Friel^M"
Waitfor "Password? [ ]"
Delay 100
FKey 10
Waitfor "-Pause- [C]ontinue, [N]onStop, [S]top? [C]"
Delay 100
Send "C^M"
Waitfor "Would you like to view the bulletin menu? [N]"
Delay 100
Send "N^M"
Waitfor "Press [ENTER] to continue?"
Delay 100
Exit
NOTE: The "<--- (n)" tags were added for reference purposes
only.
Alt-R DOS Shell
If enough system memory is available and a copy of your Command
Shell (usually called COMMAND.COM or 4DOS.COM) can be located via
the COMSPEC= environment variable or in the DOS PATH, you may
Shell to DOS. Pressing Alt-R yields the following screen:
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE «--» DOS Shell
Swapping 442743 bytes to EMS
Type EXIT to return to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE!
The COMPAQ Personal Computer MS-DOS Version 3.31
(C) Copyright Compaq Computer Corp. 1982, 1989
(C) Copyright Microsoft Corp. 1981, 1987
C:\>_
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 127
=================================================================
COMPAQ Dos 3.31 was being used on the machine that the snapshots
were captured from. Your version of DOS and messages may vary.
You may notice that just below the top line, that QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE swapped 442743 bytes to EMS. Your hardware is interrogated
to see if EMS memory exists, and if so, how much EMS is free. If
sufficient memory EMS is available, then most of QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE and the memory it is using is swapped to EMS leaving a
small 4K kernel resident. The following screen snapshot using
MAPMEM shows the amount resident:
PSP blks bytes owner command line hooked vectors
------------------------------------------------------------
0008 1 53888 config
1727 2 3760 command 2E
1824 1 20048 N/A /LB:C800 /LI:5 5C
1D0A 1 1024 N/A 17 2A 2F
1D5A 2 896 N/A
1D96 4 6304 WIN386 N/A 67
1F13 3 4128 .
2019 2 77056 SKPLUS 08 09 0B 0C 0D 10 13 15 16
1A 1C 21 25 26 28 33 E0
32EA 2 4320 QMODEM <--- Kernel resident *
33FA 3 3840 N/A 22 24
34ED 2 438576 free <--- FREE MEMORY!!
block bytes (Expanded Memory)
----- ------
0 524288
1 409600
2 245760 <---- QMODEM used this much to store the OVR file
3 458752 <---- Swapped to EMS during the Shell
free 458752
total 2621440
C:\>
Now, if there hadn't been that much EMS available, QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE would have tried to allocate a file on Disk to swap
to. The net effect would have been the same. The only difference
is that swapping to/from EMS is a lot faster.
All standard DOS commands are available from within the DOS
Shell. For example, you could copy files, format a disk, or run a
separate program as long as there is sufficient memory available
to do so.
To return to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, type "EXIT" and press [ENTER]
at the DOS prompt. The screen will be restored to its previous
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 128
=================================================================
status.
Possible Error conditions
While in the DOS Shell, you may not execute programs which attach
themselves to DOS, terminate, and stay resident (IE. SideKick).
If such a program is loaded, the following message will be
displayed when you attempt to EXIT back to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE:
A TSR was loaded while executing the DOS Shell and QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE cannot recover.
A Reboot (Ctrl-Alt-Del) is recommended at this time.
> Tap any key to continue <
At this point, you can return to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, but only
long enough to save any open files and re-boot the system. Your
on-line session will not be disturbed and you can get right back
on-line by executing QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE again.
FON File Protection
When returning from a DOS shell, a check is made on the Phone
Directory (.FON file) to see if it has been updated. If it has,
then it is automatically reloaded. This feature was implemented
to allow execution of external phone book editors such as QFE
from Sunflower Systems.
Alternate Screen Sizes
The DOS Shell is also able to recognize a screen size change
(feasible with EGA and VGA displays), and will adjust
accordingly. If an external program changes the size of the
screen while in the DOS Shell, that change will be recognized
upon return.
Under normal circumstances, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE restores the
screen saved before the DOS Shell was invoked. If a size change
is detected, you will see a Status window displays that says:
╒═════════════════ Status ══════════════════╕
│ Video mode changed. Screen not restored. │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════╛
Alt-S Split Screen Mode
In split-screen mode, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE divides the screen
into two areas to separate incoming and outgoing text:
══[ Keystrokes Queued 0 ]═══════[ Split Screen ]════════════════════════════════
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 129
=================================================================
The larger section at the top of the screen is reserved for
incoming text received from the remote computer. The smaller
section at the bottom of the screen echoes transmitted
keystrokes. Current keystrokes are displayed on the screen's
dividing line.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE implements a true split-screen mode,
complete with a 254 character input buffer. Pressing [ENTER]
immediately transmits the buffer and clears it for additional
input. Stored keystrokes are displayed on the screen's dividing
line. The characters "^M" can be used to substitute an [ENTER] in
the string.
If another terminal emulation other than TTY is in effect when
Alt-S is pressed, it is remembered so it can be restored when
split screen is exited. The split screen mode requires TTY
emulation to operate correctly.
If you use FKey macros, ^M will not cause the contents of the
character buffer to be sent; the text stored in the FKey macro
will be appended to the buffer.
Alt-T Screen Dump
Screen contents can be copied to a disk file via the Alt-T
command. When pressing Alt-T, the following window is displayed:
╒═════════════════════ Screen Dump File Allocation ═════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > SCREEN.DMP░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The default file name is that defined in the configuration and
may be changed at the Alt-T prompt. The screen contents are added
to the end of the screen dump file and are preceded with a Time
and Date stamp (if Alt-N/F/T is set ON). If the dump was
successful, a confirmation message in a status window will
appear.
Alt-U Scroll Back Toggle
The Alt-U Scroll-back command toggle use of the scroll-back
capture buffer. The Scroll-back command is discussed under the
heading "Up Arrow" later in the documentation.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 130
=================================================================
The default state is to have the Scroll-back capture active. All
data displayed on the screen is stored in the scroll-back buffer
for later recall. When pressing Alt-U, a Status window is
displayed showing the new state.
Alt-V View a File
Pressing Alt-V invokes the file viewer/editor program. When that
command is issued, the View/Edit file allocation window is
displayed:
╒════════════════════════ View File Allocation ═════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > LIST *.PAS░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Alt-V can be thought of as a flexible gateway used to browse or
edit a file. The above example assumes use of Vern Buerg's
popular LIST program, available on most BBSs. LIST is
sophisticated replacement for the DOS TYPE command.
Although intended for file browsing or editing, the Alt-V gateway
can be used to invoke any program, even WordStar! The program to
be called by Alt-V can be defined in Setup (Alt-N/F/V) or can be
changed on the fly. For example, you could type "DEL *.BAK" and
[ENTER] to delete all the files in the current directory with an
extension of ".BAK".
If an external program is specified, a DOS Shell is used and
sufficient memory must be available.
Alt-V also accepts two special commands: @FSE and @EDITOR. If you
specify either of these at the beginning of the command, the
following actions will take place:
@FSE uses the internal editor to edit/view the file. This also
assumes that the text following is a valid DOS filename.
Following is an example of Alt-V use to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file in the C:\ directory:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 131
=================================================================
╒════════════════════════ View File Allocation ═════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > @FSE C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
@EDITOR uses the user-defined editor rather than the internal
editor in any function where the internal editor would have been
used, such as editing the attached Note files in the dialing
directory (Alt-D/N) or the attached Scripts (Alt-D/V).
Alt-W Disk Directory
The Alt-W command is QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's internal version of
the "DIR /p". DOS command. This will produce a file listing of
the current directory (see the Alt-W command to change
directory).
You are first prompted for the drive:\directory\FILE_MASK to use:
╒════════════════════ View Directory(s) Allocation ═════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > Z:\DL\*.*░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
The default for this is stored in Setup, Alt-N/D/A. As is the
case with the DOS prompt, you may change the directory listing
argument, with all standard wildcard "*?" characters being
supported.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 132
=================================================================
Then, you will get the Alt-W window:
╒════════════════ Z:\*.* ═════════════════╕
│ .. <dir> 3/26/90 1:47p │
│ DL <dir> 3/26/90 1:53p │
│ GG <dir> 7/12/90 2:39a │
│ HOSTDIR <dir> 3/26/90 1:57p │
│ LOGO <dir> 3/26/90 1:57p │
│ NCI <dir> 7/25/90 3:23p │
│ PRINTDOC <dir> 3/26/90 1:57p │
│ QMEDIT <dir> 3/26/90 1:57p │
│ QPRO <dir> 3/26/90 1:57p │
│ RZSZ <dir> 4/13/90 11:30a │
│ SCRIPTS <dir> 3/26/90 1:58p │
│ SHOW <dir> 7/25/90 2:54p │
│ VCS <dir> 4/18/90 6:00a │
│ YAK <dir> 3/26/90 1:58p │
│ 08-13-19 57 8/13/90 1:21p │
│ 3XMATE.INC 375 2/21/90 11:17a │
│ 3XMATE.PAS 9821 7/11/90 9:05a │
│ 42LOGO.PAS 7348 7/11/90 9:05a │
│ ALLCHARS.DOC 256 8/09/90 9:52a │
│ ANSI.KEY 251 8/13/90 11:39a │
│ ASYINT.ASM 15447 3/13/89 11:04a │
╘═══════════════════════════ . for more ═╛
░ <dir>-Change Directory Arrows-Scroll Alpha-Search Enter-Selects ESC-Exit ░
This is yet another Pick List type window.
The <dir> entries show subdirectories that can be selected for
viewing. Simply move the scrollbar to this type of entry and
press [ENTER]. The window will clear and show you the new
subdirectory files that match the given mask. In the above
example, *.* was used as the mask.
You can scroll through the window with the standard direction
keys. Up, down, PgUp, PgDn, Home and End all work the way you
would expect them. You can also search lengthy entries by using
Alpha keys. Just type the letters of the file you are looking
for. As you type, the scrollbar moves to the first entry that
matches the list of characters. If you type too many characters
and no match is found, the lower left will clear with the
scrollbar on the last entry that matched. Typing again repeats
the search sequence. You can quickly clear the search pattern by
pressing the [Backspace] key. This is one intelligent Pick List!
You will also note, the status line mentions Enter-Selects. This
Pick List does double duty, so in this case, the [ENTER] goes
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 133
=================================================================
back to the FAW window so you can enter a new
Drive:\directory\Mask.
Alt-X Exiting QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
To exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, press Alt-X. The following prompt
window will be displayed:
╒════════ Exit Qmodem ════════╕
│ Are you sure? [Y/N/X] │
╘═════════════════════════════╛
░░░ Y-Drop DTR and Exit N-Return to TERMINAL Mode X-Leave DTR Up and Exit ░░
Replying "Y" to the prompt will immediately terminate QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE, close the serial port (and hang up the modem if a
connection was active), and close the Capture and LOG files if
they were opened.
Entering an "X" will cause QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE to exit to DOS
and leave the DTR line active, which does NOT hang up the modem
and retains the connection if one was active. This allows you to
perform any other process, such as run an external program which
requires more memory then is available via the QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE DOS Shell facility.
When the "X" option is used and you are on-line, the environment
settings are saved in a file called QMODEM.INI. The next time
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE started, the values stored in QMODEM.INI
will override the default configuration, and QMODEM.INI is
deleted. If QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is NOT restarted, the
QMODEM.INI file will remain and should be deleted if not needed.
Replying "N" to the prompt or pressing [ESC] cancels the exit
request and returns to the Terminal mode screen.
Data received after you exit via Alt-X-X will be lost. Use this
exit option when you are sure no data will be sent by the remote
computer. Most modems and many remote computers will disconnect
if the connection remains inactive for an extended period of
time. Be aware of these limitations when exiting.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 134
=================================================================
Alt-Y Delete a File
Alt-Y is a powerful command used to permanently delete a file.
When pressing Alt-Y, the File Delete Allocation Window will be
displayed:
╒═══════════════════════ File Delete Allocation ════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > Z:\scripts\qqqq.scr░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Type the desired file name in the space provided and [ENTER].
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will verify that the file exists. If it
does, a second confirmation prompt will be issued, just to be
sure:
╒════════════════════════ File Delete ════════════════════════╕
│ You are about to delete the following file: │
│ Z:\scripts\qqqq.scr │
│ Are you SURE ? [Y/N] │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Y-Delete the File N-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
This is your last chance. If you erase the wrong file, issue the
Alt-R DOS Shell command immediately and attempt to recover the
lost file with a program such as Norton's Undelete, PCTools, Mace
Utilities etc. There is no UNERASE facility built into QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE.
Alt-Z Xon/Xoff Toggle
Alt-Z toggles Xon/Xoff flow control. Xon/Xoff is a simple means
of controlling data flow, used mostly by mini and mainframe
computers. With Xon/Xoff in the OFF mode, a buffer overrun may
occur on long ASCII text transmissions (incoming data will exceed
the internal buffer capacity).
If Xon/Xoff is ON and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE detects the Xoff (^S)
code, the Status Line will change to the following:
░░░░░░░ XOFF(^S) Received, waiting for XON(^Q). ^Q-Override and Continue ░░░░░░
When the remote system is ready to receive more data, it will
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 135
=================================================================
send the Xon (^Q) code and the window will disappear. If you
believe there is a problem, you can manually restart the data
transfer by pressing ^Q.
If you have the Status line disabled via Alt-Minus, you will not
see that you have received the XOFF. If you think you are locked
up, it is always a good idea to try pressing ^Q once or twice to
see if this was the problem.
PgUp/PgDn Uploading & Downloading Files
Selecting a protocol Selecting a protocol is the first step in a
file transfer. Pressing PgUp (upload - send) or PgDn (download -
receive) will display the protocol selection window:
╒══ Download Protocols ══╕
│ Free Space 7622656 │
│ A - Ascii │
│ X - Xmodem │
│ C - Xmodem CRC │
│ R - Xmodem Relaxed │
│ O - Xmodem-1K │
│ Y - Ymodem Batch │
│ Z - Zmodem Batch │
│ F - Xmodem-1K/G │
│ G - Ymodem/G Batch │
│ Your Choice ? │
╘════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░ LETTER-Select a Protocol for the File Transfer ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░
The above window shows the PgDn protocol list. The only
difference between the PgUp and PgDn window is the PgDn window
includes a free space check at the top. You will want to know how
much free disk space you have when downloading files.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 136
=================================================================
If external protocols have been defined in Alt-N/P, they will be
displayed at the bottom of the protocol selection window:
╒══ Download Protocols ══╕
│ Free Space 7622656 │
│ A - Ascii │
│ X - Xmodem │
│ C - Xmodem CRC │
│ R - Xmodem Relaxed │
│ O - Xmodem-1K │
│ Y - Ymodem Batch │
│ Z - Zmodem Batch │
│ F - Xmodem-1K/G │
│ G - Ymodem/G Batch │
╞═══════ External ═══════╡
│ K - Kermit │
│ P - Puma │
│ Your Choice ? │
╘════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░ LETTER-Select a Protocol for the File Transfer ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░
The protocol selection windows both feature the "F" and "G"
protocols (Xmodem-1K/G and Ymodem/G). These are "Hardware-
handshaking" protocols which can only be used if your computer is
equipped with an error-correcting modem (a modem with supports
MNP).
To activate these, CTS/RTS Flow Control must be specified in the
Alt-N/M/T Setup menu. If CTS/RTS Flow is not specified, or if it
is specified and your computer is not equipped with an
error-correcting modem, the F and G selections will not be
available.
When uploading or downloading files, both sending and receiving
computers must use the same communication protocol. Select the
agreed-upon protocol by pressing the corresponding letter. "X",
for example, would select Xmodem, which is supported almost
universally.
Bulletin Board (BBS) programs each use a different method for
selecting file transfer protocols. When communicating with a BBS,
make sure that you have selected the proper protocol on the BBS
System before making the protocol selection in QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 137
=================================================================
Internal Protocols
ASCII
The ASCII protocol is used primarily for on-line text transfers.
It does not support the transferring of binary data such as
programs or compressed files. Attempting to do so is, well,
crazy! ASCII does not perform any error-checking, which makes it
very sensitive to line noise. Bursts of phone line interference
will introduce stray characters which are not part of the data
being transmitted. For this reason, ASCII transfers are not
recommended unless they are used for specific purposes where that
protocol is needed.
It is advisable to use XON/XOFF Software flow control with ASCII.
Failure to do so may cause loss of data.
XMODEM
There are two XMODEM protocols currently in use. The original
Xmodem uses a Checksum method to insure that the data received is
the same as that which was sent. Checksum is a very simple
error-detection method with an accuracy rate of 99.6%. Xmodem
Checksum transmits 128-byte data blocks.
XMODEM CRC
Xmodem-CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Checking) is similar to
Xmodem-Checksum, but uses a far more reliable error-detection
algorithm (99.9969%.). In the event that the wrong Xmodem
protocol was selected, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will correct itself
automatically, eliminating the need for aborting the transfer.
RELAXED XMODEM
Relaxed Xmodem is basically identical to Xmodem-Checksum, but
error timing has been relaxed by a factor of 10. In other words,
it takes ten times longer for an error condition to be generated.
This protocol was designed specifically for CompuServe
communications, due to the questionable implementation of Xmodem
by that On-line Information Service.
XMODEM-1K
Xmodem-1K is a modified version of Xmodem CRC, which uses
1024-byte blocks as opposed to Xmodem's 128 byte blocks.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 138
=================================================================
YMODEM
Ymodem is the true implementation of the YMODEM batch protocol
and is referred to as YMODEM or YMODEM BATCH. This protocol
supports the transfer of multiple files within a single session
which does not require user intervention.
When using Ymodem, only one filename can be specified at a time.
To allow multiple file transfers, wildcards must be used in the
filename for uploads. For downloads, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will
automatically retrieve the names of the files being sent from
their respective header records.
True Ymodem and Ymodem/G batch protocols include "Header Records"
in the downloaded data. These records contain file-dependent
information such as name, size, and date/time stamps. As a
result, file names need not be specified prior to starting batch
downloads. As an added benefit, the moving Transfer Completion
Graph is updated during batch downloads since file sizes are
known.
When the filename is extracted from the header block, it is
checked to see if it will create a valid DOS filename. The Ymodem
header was designed to be flexible and allow for non MS-DOS file
naming conventions. Apple, Atari and Commodore computers are more
liberal in their file naming conventions and these need to be
converted when downloading these files.
Suppose you are calling a non-IBM BBS system and want to download
one of their foreign files and you are using Ymodem as the
protocol. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE converts their filename to one
that is acceptable to MS-DOS on-the-fly.
The rules for the conversion are:
1. The last ".", if any, in the Header filename is where the new
DOS filename extension will begin.
2. The first 8 character (or less, depending on the position of
the "." in step 1) is converted. Periods (".") are replaced
with dollar-signs ("$"), and spaces (" ") are replaced with
underscores ("_").
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 139
=================================================================
Examples:
Foreign Filename Converted Filename
STARTER.ARC.STV1.2 STARTER$.2
ST.DATAKIT.ARC.4 ST$DATAK.4
ST.SOUND.ARC.1.2 ST$SOUND.2
A LONG NAME.EXTENS A_LONG_N.EXT
XMODEM-1K/G & YMODEM/G
These two protocols are identical to their non-/G counterparts.
/G protocols do not perform any error detection and rely on the
error-correction features of the modems. Modems equipped with
internal protocols such as like MNP, LAP-B, and X.PC insure that
communications are error-free. Hardware handshaking via the
CTS/RTS signal lines must be enabled with such modems.
/G protocols will not be available unless the following is true:
1. CTS checking is enabled in the Alt-N/O/T/C Setup menu option.
2. The modem's CTS signal is enabled when the serial port is
initialized.
Make sure that the modem does not force the CTS signal ON at all
times. This will cause a modem buffer overflow resulting in an
aborted transfer.
Xmodem-1K/G and Ymodem/G cannot re-send bad data blocks. In
theory, there should be NO bad blocks of data in an error-free
connection. If errors occur, they are likely to be cause by an
improper setup in either the modem or QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
High-speed or Error-Correcting modems communicate with QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE at the hardware level via the CTS/RTS interface. The
modem cables used in conventional modems (IE 1200/2400, non-MNP
units) may not carry all the necessary signals (pins could be
missing). The wrong cable could prevent QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
from detecting the CTS signal, and ignore the modem's
hardware-handshaking capabilities.
When in doubt, use a serial cable with all 25 pins connected (a
flat ribbon, 25-conductor cable). AT Users may use a 9-pin to
25-pin adapter with all 9 lines connected, attached to a
25-conductor cable as described above.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 140
=================================================================
Zmodem
This is the popular streaming protocol put into the public domain
by Telenet. Zmodem uses a variable sized block to transfer date
over even the noisiest phone lines. Zmodem was designed as a
Batch transfer protocol. As such, it shares the same transfer
windows and allocation methods that the Ymodem protocol uses.
Should errors occur, Zmodem can tell the sending end just exactly
where to restart. The real bonus to Zmodem is that it does not
require a high-speed or error-correcting modem with MNP or V.42
to be effective. While it is not as fast as Ymodem/G or
Xmodem-1K/G, it does perform well enough to have become a
'standard' in the industry.
One of the benefits of Zmodem is Crash Recovery. This allows an
aborted file transfer to be restarted at a later time, without
having to retransmit the already received portion of the file. A
check is made to make sure the partial file has not changed. If
it hasn't, then it picks up where it left off. It has, then the
file transfer is restarted from the beginning.
External Protocols Due to their nature, external protocols do not
have a seamless interface and operate differently from built-in
protocols. When an external protocol is used, QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE invokes the protocol's upload or download batch file which
in turn executes the external protocol's file transfer program.
Since QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE has no control over external
programs, screen displays will be handled entirely by the
external program. The screen will be cleared before control is
passed to the external protocol, and once the transfer is
complete, you will be returned to the standard QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE terminal display.
For more information on installing External protocols, refer to
the Setup (Alt-N/P) section. For protocol-specific information,
refer to the external protocol's documentation.
Download File Allocation
After selecting your protocol, you have to tell QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE where to put the file and what to call it. If it is a Batch
transfer protocol, then you only have to decide where to put the
file. Batch transfers send the filename as part of the file.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 141
=================================================================
The non-batch window looks like this:
╒══════════════════════ Download File Allocation ═══════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > C:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The batch window looks like this:
╒══════════════════════ Download Path Allocation ═══════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > C:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
Notice the Window titles. Non-batch transfer want a complete
drive:\path\filename to be successful. Batch transfer want only
the drive:\path. Remember, the filename has already been decided
and will automatically be picked up as part of the file transfer.
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE has the ability to "pick" file names
directly from the screen. A scan is made on the screen, from
right to left, bottom to top for a valid file name. "Valid File
Name" is defined as a 1- to 8-character text string followed by a
period and a 2- or 3-character suffix. Spaces, semicolons, and
the left and right margins are valid file name delimiters.
Following are some examples of valid and invalid file names:
THISFILE.TXT valid
README.1 invalid (not enough characters in suffix)
QMDMSST.ARC valid
PROGRAM.THIS invalid (too many characters in suffix)
MPROGRAM1.THIS invalid (name too long)
If a suitable filename was not found, or if the one picked is not
correct, the filename must be added or edited manually. Once the
desired file name has been specified, press [ENTER] to start the
file transfer.
Upload File Allocation
Uploading files is similar to Downloading. You still tell the
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 142
=================================================================
remote host what you are going to do before doing it. You also
have to make sure you use the same protocol that you tell the
host.
The PgUp protocol window is identical to the PgDn Down load
window, with the exception that the Free Disk Space is not at the
top. So, assuming you have told the remote system what protocol
you are going to use, and the filename if necessary, you can
begin your upload!
Once you have selected a protocol, you have to tell QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE the filename(s) to use. The possibilities can be
simple if you selected a non-batch protocol, to extensive for
batch protocols.
Non-batch and External protocol windows look like this:
╒═══════════════════════ Upload File Allocation ════════════════════════╕
│ │
│ > D:\QMODEM\qmodem.pas░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
You simply enter the complete drive:\path\filename of the file
you are sending, and press [ENTER].
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 143
=================================================================
Batch Entry Window (BEW)
Batch protocols are a different story. You get a much enhanced
screen called the Batch Entry Window (BEW for short). The BEW
looks like this:
╒═════════════════════════ Batch Upload File Entry ═════════════════════════╕
│PATH : D:\QMODEM\DL\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
│FILES: ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ │
│PATH : D:\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
│FILES: ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ │
│PATH : D:\░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
│FILES: ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
│ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░ ░░░░░░░░░░░░│
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════F1 Help══╛
░░░░░░░░ F2-Pick List F3-Last Found F4-Clear F10-Upload ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░
The Batch Entry Window (BEW), used when uploading with a Batch
Protocol, is divided into three groups, each group comprising a
PATH and 20 FILES cells.
The 3 different PATH fields are automatically initialized to the
values defined by the Alt-N/D/1, Alt-N/D/2 and Alt-N/D/3 in the
Setup. The FILES cells are blank. The three groups work
independently of each other. By this, we mean that you could
specify files in the 1st and 3rd groups without having to specify
any in the 2nd group. Maybe you only want to send from the 2nd
group only, and that is fine too.
The PATH cells are like the FILES cells in that they can be
changed within the window before uploading. You may decide to
leave one of the 3 default paths blank, just in case you
frequently upload from several different directories depending on
who you call. This would save time clearing a PATH field all the
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 144
=================================================================
time.
Each FILES cell can contain exactly one filename specification. 8
characters for the NAME, the PERIOD, and 3 characters for the
EXTENSION. You do not have to use all 12 characters, however.
Filenames such as YEAREND.WKS, REPORT.DOC, and SOURCE.C are all
valid.
To really make them functional, each cell could include multiple
wildcard characters. The wildcard characters * and ? can allow
each cell to specify a group of files. Filenames such as
MONTH??.WKS, *.PAS, and even *.* are valid! In these cases, all
files matching the wildcard specification would be uploaded in
the batch transfer.
Caution should be used to avoid duplication when using wildcards
within the same group of cells. There is no checking done to see
if a file matches one or more of the cells with wildcards. You
could be sending the same file more than once in the same batch
upload. If the 3 examples were placed in the same cell group, all
the files matching the first two would be sent twice because the
3rd example, *.*, will send them all again.
The status line at the bottom of the screen lists these options
if you entered the BEW with the PgUp key:
F2-Pick List F3-Last Found F4-Clear F10-Upload ESC-Exit
If you used the Alt-6 Key, you will see this:
F2-Pick List F3-Last Found F4-Clear F10-Save to Disk ESC-Exit
F2-Pick List
When the cursor is in a FILES cell, you can press [F2] to open a
Pick List. If the cell is blank, a default of *.* is used,
showing all the available files in that PATH group. If the cell
contains a filename with wildcard characters, such as *.PAS, then
all the files that end in .PAS are shown in the Pick List. With
the Pick List open, just move the scrollbar to the entry you want
in that cell and press [ENTER]. The cell is then filled in with
that filename. You can only tag one filename at a time from the
Pick List.
F3-Last Found
This will scan the underlying screen for the last valid filename
(right to left, bottom to top) and place it in the current cell.
You might use this when you have a file to upload, and you have
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 145
=================================================================
just told the remote system about the file. As long as it is on
the underlying screen, you do not have to type the filename in
again.
F4-Clear
This clears all fields in the BEW and resets the three PATH cells
to the defaults specified in Alt-N/D.
F10-Upload
When you have pressed PgUp and selected either Y, G or Z, and you
have 1 or more files defined, this will begin the upload.
F10-Save to Disk
This will write out a file called QMODEM.BEW in the directory
where the QMODEM.CNF file was found. It contains all of the
information in the BEW. The BEW window will then close. The next
time the BEW is opened, the QMODEM.BEW file is searched for and
loaded back in if found.
ESC-Exit
Exits the BEW and aborts any changes made.
Download Transfer Window
The download window is common throughout all the internal
protocols, except ASCII. Let's look at the others first:
╒════════════════════════════ Download Status ════════════════════════════╕
│ File BETA00.ZIP Protocol Ymodem/G Batch │
│ Path Z:\DL │
│ │
│ Bytes Total 214572 Blocks Total 210 Time Elapsed 00:00:09 │
│ Bytes Rcvd 14336 Blocks Rcvd 14 ++ Remaining 00:01:59 │
│ Error Count 0 Block Size 1024 Efficiency 175.25% │
│ Chars/Second 1682 │
│ Status Msgs │
│ Completion 6% ▓▓▓■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Download In Progress ESC-Cancel Transfer ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 146
=================================================================
You probably won't find a better file transfer status window
anywhere! Here is a breakdown of each field.
FILE The name of the file being received. If it is a
Batch download (Ymodem or Zmodem), then this is
filled in automatically. Non-batch transfers allow
you to enter the filename.
PATH This is the drive and subdirectory where the File
is being saved to.
PROTOCOL The current transfer protocol being used.
BYTES TOTAL This is the number of bytes that is being received.
This field will say "N.A." if the protocol is
non-batch.
BYTES RCVD This is the number of bytes received so far.
ERROR COUNT This is the number of errors recorded so far.
BLOCKS TOTAL This is the number of blocks expected to be
received. It is figured based on the Bytes Total
divided by the Block Size. If it is a non-batch
transfer, this will show "N.A.".
BLOCKS RCVD This is the number of blocks received so far.
BLOCK SIZE This is the current block size being used by the
sending side. It is included because protocols like
Ymodem and Zmodem can change their data block sizes
on the fly.
TIME ELAPSED This is the current elapsed time since the start of
the download for the current file. Current is
stressed because a batch transfer may have more
than one file, and there is no global elapsed time
kept.
++ REMAINING This is the estimated remaining time in the
transfer for the current file. If this is a
non-batch transfer, this field will be blank.
EFFICIENCY This shows you how efficient the protocol is. It is
based on the current DCE Baud Rate as reported by
your modem, and the number of bytes received
against the elapsed time. Roll these all together,
sprinkle with a little sugar, and out pops the
efficiency! Seriously, if the modem has features
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 147
=================================================================
such as data compression, the efficiency can rise
above the normal 100% DCE rate. Remember, this is
based on the DCE speed, not the DTE rate that the
serial port may be locked at.
CHARS/SECOND This is a by-product of figuring the Efficiency.
When you know how many bytes have been received in
a set number of seconds, you can easily figure the
Character per Second. To convert this to a baud
rate, multiply this by 10.
STATUS MSGS Status messages keep you posted on the progression
of the transfer.
COMPLETION Some people call this the gas gauge because it goes
from Empty (0%) to Full (100%) as the transfer
proceeds. This is just a quick visual check of how
much is complete and how much further you have to
go. Each block represents 2% of the entire file. If
this is a non-batch transfer, this will not be
available.
Download ASCII Window
When downloading with ASCII, you do not get a fancy window.
Instead, the Status Line switches to the following:
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ ASCII DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS ESC-Save and Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The current terminal emulation stays in effect, and the screen
remains unchanged. Except, all data received now is saved to the
file you specified.
Upload Transfer Window
The Upload Transfer window is identical to the Download window,
with two exception. Wherever the word RCVD appears, it is changed
to SENT. Also, because all the file sizes are known in advance,
there are no "N.A." fields.
Upload ASCII
During an ASCII Upload, the Status Line changes to keep track of
the upload. Following is a sample of a QMODEM.LOG file being
uploaded:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 148
=================================================================
20:01:46 05-16-90 Connected With : GEnie RealTime Conference
20:01:46 05-16-90 ++ Phone Number : 233-7623
20:01:46 05-16-90 ++ Comm Speed : 2400-8-N-1
20:01:46 05-16-90 Online Timer Started.
20:20:41 05-16-90 Elapsed Online 00:18:54
20:21:56 05-16-90 Connected With : GEnie RealTime Conference
20:21:56 05-16-90 ++ Phone Number : 233-7623
20:21:56 05-16-90 ++ Comm Speed : 2400-8-N-1
20:21:56 05-16-90 Online Timer Started.
20:37:32 05-16-90 Hangup Command entered.
20:37:33 05-16-90 Elapsed Online 00:15:36
22:32:21 05-16-90 Connected With : Sub Line 1 HST
22:32:21 05-16-90 ++ Phone Number : 233-1453
░░░░░░ Uploading qmodem.log Sent = 2313 Complete = 3% ESC-Terminate ░░░░░░
The screen uses whatever Terminal emulation was in effect at the
time of the Upload. The Status line shows the Filename, the
number of Bytes sent so far and the Percent completed.
UP-ARROW Scroll-back
As the on-line session proceeds, all displayed information is
stored in a special scroll-back buffer. Pressing the Up-Arrow
selects Scroll-back mode. While in this mode, you can scroll
backward and forward through previously displayed text.
The size of the scroll-back buffer is defined in the Alt-N/O/M/L
Setup menu.
Following is a sample scroll-back display:
CONNECT 19200 V42bis
WILDCAT! Copyright (c) 87, 91 Mustang Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved
registration Number 86-0001. v3.02P (Professional) Node 31
Connected at 19200 bps. Error free conection. ANSI detected.
┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Welcome to The MSI HQ BBS System │
│ Home of Qmodem! │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
░░ SCROLL-BACK .. PgUp PgDn F1-Help S-Save C-Clear ESC-Exit Queue 0 ░░
As with other QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE file prompts, you may
override the default file name and press [ENTER] to save the
file.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 149
=================================================================
Pressing [C] clears the Scroll-back buffer and frees up the
memory allocated to it.
The QUEUE at the far right of the scroll-back status line tracks
the amount of incoming data while you are viewing Scroll-back
information.
CTRL-HOME Capture to Disk
Ctrl-Home is a toggle which starts or stops the Session Capture
facility. While Session Capture is active, the data displayed on
the screen is also saved to a disk file.
When Session Capture is started, the following "Capture" file
allocation window will be displayed:
╒══════════════════ Scroll Back Dump File Allocation ═══════════════════╕
│ │
│ > SCROLL.SAV░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ │
│ │
╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Edit File/Pathname ESC-Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The file name may be changed by backspacing over the default name
and typing a new one. If the capture file is new, you will be
prompted for its creation. Pressing [ESC] will cancel the session
capture request and return to the terminal screen.
Whenever session capture starts, a Status window will tell you
that it has been started successfully. To end Session Capture,
press Ctrl-Home again. The capture file will be closed and the
Status window will be displayed telling you so.
CTRL-END Sending a BREAK
Pressing Ctrl-End generates a BREAK signal. "BREAK" is a special
signal generated by the serial adapter, used to notify the
receiving computer of a specific condition. In most cases, BREAK
is used to tell the other computer to interrupt whatever it is
doing. For example, the GEnie On-line Service interprets the
BREAK signal in the same manner as your PC would interpret ^C or
Ctrl-Break.
In response to Ctrl-End, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE displays the
following message:
<<BREAK>>
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 150
=================================================================
As is the case with PC programs which disable or ignore
Ctrl-Break, the BREAK signal may not be recognized by the
receiving computer. BREAK handling is a function of the
communication software, and this feature may not be implemented
in the computer you are communicating with.
SHIFT-TAB Add Linefeeds
In some cases, text lines may be overwritten on the screen. The
most likely reason is that the other computer is not sending
Linefeed (LF) characters at the end of each line.
Pressing Shift-Tab toggles the addition of a Linefeed (LF)
character to each incoming Carriage Return (CR). To turn the Add
Linefeed feature OFF, press Shift-Tab again.
If text lines are double-spaced, Linefeeds are being added when
they shouldn't. Press Shift-Tab again to disable Linefeed
addition.
When Shift-Tab is pressed, a Status window will be displayed
showing the new state of the toggle.
Alt-1 Backspace / DEL Toggle
Alt-1 toggles the value generated by the Backspace key between
the standard backspace and the DEL character.
In normal operating mode, Backspace (BS) and Ctrl-H (^H) are
treated in the same fashion and both generate a Backspace (ASCII
8) character. Certain terminals, such as the DEC VT100 require
that a DEL character be sent (ASCII 127) when the backspace key
is pressed.
When pressing Alt-1, a Status window will be displayed showing
the new state of the toggle. The BS/DEL setting can be reversed
on-the-fly by pressing Ctrl- Backspace. The current status of the
BS/DEL toggle is displayed in the Alt-N/O/T setup menu.
If the BS/DEL setting is incorrect, pressing the Backspace key
will not yield the desired result on the receiving computer. If
the toggle is active and the other computer expects a BS
character, it will display the ASCII 127 instead (ASCII 127 on
IBM PCs is displayed as a little house).
Alt-2 and Alt-4 EGA/VGA Modes
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE supports 2 alternate screen modes with
EGA/VGA adapter. Alt-2 restores the standard 80x25 video mode for
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 151
=================================================================
both EGA and VGA adapters. Alt-4 switches EGA systems to 80x43
mode and VGA systems to 80x50 mode. The screen will be cleared
following each video mode change.
Some "SuperEGA" or "SuperVGA" adapters also support extended
screen modes beyond the standard 80x25 display. These extended
modes can be used if they are activated within QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE with a FKey macro which invokes the adapters' setup utility
with a @SHELL command.
Example:
The Video-7 VEGA VGA comes with a utility called ESU.COM used to
switch video modes. To run this utility within QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE, assign the command "@SHELL ESU 43" to a QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE function key via the Alt-J command.
Alt-3 Debugging Screen
This is used by Tech Support at Mustang Software should you have
a problem. The details of this window are beyond the scope of
this manual. Suffice to say, it contains important information
about your particular setup, and you can count on being asked
about the contents should you call for help. This is one more
reason you should be sitting in front of your computer, with
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE running, when you call for help. It is
usually a waste of your time and ours if you are not.
Alt-6 Batch Entry Window
This is the same BEW window as discussed back on page 139. Please
refer back for a complete discussion.
Alt-8 Hi-Bit Stripping Toggle
Some computer systems use the high bit of each 8-bit character
for parity checking , like CompuServe and GEnie. If the high bit
is not removed, the screen display will consist of high-order
ASCII characters (>ASCII 127) such as foreign, graphic, or
scientific characters.
Alt-8 toggles the stripping of the high-bit ON and OFF. When
pressing Alt-8, a Status window will be displayed showing the new
state of this toggle. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE starts in 8-bit mode
by default. This can be changed with a Script command to automate
high-bit stripping, for example when calling Compuserve.
The Status Line will display an "8" or "7" in the Toggles area to
reflect the current mode.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 152
=================================================================
Some BBS's use fancy graphics characters and ANSI escape codes.
To display these properly, 8 bit mode must be in effect.
Alt-9 Copying to the Printer
The Alt-9 printer session toggle is similar to the DOS Ctrl-PrtSc
command. If your system is equipped with a printer, pressing
Alt-9 will replicate all screen displays on the system printer.
To stop session printing, press Alt-9 again.
When pressing Alt-9, a Status window will be displayed showing
the new state of the toggle. The printer should be READY when the
Alt-9 command is issued. If the system is not equipped with a
printer, or the printer is not ready (IE., powered off or
offline), QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will display an "Abort ,Retry,
Ignore or Fail" Error window. Alt-0 Log File Toggle
The Alt-0 command starts or stops QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Session
Log recording. The session LOG feature is used to keep track of
major QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE activity. When the session log is
active, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE writes an entry in the session log
file reflecting information such as:
Who was called
The date and time of the call
How long the on-line session
Each log entry is time- and date-stamped.
Alt-0 is a toggle. If the Log File is closed, a filename prompt
will be issued and the file will be opened. If the Log File is
already opened, it will be closed.
Following is a sample Log File listing:
14:18:39 08-07-1990 Connected With : Sub Line 7 {F9}
14:18:39 08-07-1990 ++ Phone Number : 233-6035
14:18:39 08-07-1990 ++ Comm Speed : 38400-8-N-1
14:18:39 08-07-1990 Online Timer Started.
14:19:13 08-07-1990 ++ Protocol : Ymodem/G
14:19:13 08-07-1990 ++ File D:\TEMP1\UPLOAD\CHECKRIM.ASM
14:19:15 08-07-1990 ++ Chars Per Second : 2363
14:19:15 08-07-1990 ++ Effective Percent : 246.1
14:19:38 08-07-1990 ++ File D:\TEMP1\UPLOAD\COMMIO.ASM
14:19:47 08-07-1990 ++ Chars Per Second : 2022
14:19:47 08-07-1990 ++ Effective Percent : 210.6
14:19:47 08-07-1990 ++ File D:\TEMP1\UPLOAD\COMP-CRC.ASM
14:19:54 08-07-1990 ++ Chars Per Second : 2448
14:19:54 08-07-1990 ++ Effective Percent : 255.0
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 153
=================================================================
Some Log entries may take up more than one line in the file. Any
log entry which starts with "++" is a continuation of the
previous one. For example, download or upload log entries are
made up of several records in order to record all meaningful
statistics.
Following is a complete list of all possible Log entries (the
time and date stamps are not shown):
Key Log entry
----- ------------------------------------------
[user] STAMP [stamp message from FKey or Script]
[auto] On-line Timer Started.
[auto] Elapsed On-line xx:xx:xx
Alt-D Connected With : [Board Name]
++ Phone Number : [Board Number]
++ COM Speed : [Speed-Parity-Dbits-Sbits]
Alt-H Hang-up Command entered.
Alt-K COM Port [PortNumber] selected.
Alt-J New KEY file [KeyFileName].
Alt-L Default Drive now [DriveLetter]:
Alt-O Directory changed to [DirectoryPath]
Alt-R Dropping to DOS.
++ Drop to DOS Failed.
Alt-X Exiting QMODEM.
Alt-Y File [Filename] DELETED.
PgDn Download File [Filename]
++ Protocol : ASCII
++ Protocol : Xmodem
++ Protocol : Xmodem CRC
++ Protocol : Xmodem Relaxed
++ Protocol : Xmodem-1K
++ Protocol : Xmodem-1K/G
++ Protocol : Ymodem
++ Protocol : Ymodem/G
++ Long block errors : [Number]
++ Short block errors : [Number]
++ SOH errors : [Number]
++ Complement errors : [Number]
++ Block number errors : [Number]
++ Time Out errors : [Number]
++ Resend Block errors : [Number]
++ Checksum errors : [Number]
++ Chars Per Second : [Number]
++ Effective Percent : [Number]
++ Download Aborted.
Download Executing [BatchFileName].
++ External Batch Failure.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 154
=================================================================
PgUp Upload File [Filename]
++ Chars Per Second : [number]
++ Effective Percent : [number]
++ Upload Aborted.
++ Using Ymodem-G protocol.
++ Using Xmodem CRC protocol.
++ Using Xmodem protocol.
++ Using Ymodem protocol.
++ Using ASCII protocol.
++ Transfer Successful.
External Upload Batch [BatchFileName]
++ External Batch Failure.
^End BREAK signal sent.
Entries starting with "[user]" vary depending on the STAMP
command used in FKeys and Script commands. Both will begin with
the word "STAMP" followed by user-supplied text.
Entries starting with "[auto]" are recorded whenever QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE changes from offline to on-line status and vice versa.
Remaining entries are related to the command listed in the left
column.
Since Logging can be turned on automatically, you can now keep a
perfect record of all your long distance calls. Many other
important functions of operation can also be tracked with the
Session Log feature.
Alt-5 Host Mode
The Host mode is like a small BBS system. It allows others to
call your system without a lot of hassles. The Host Mode features
the following:
1. Open, Closed, and Callback operation to implement as little
or as much security as needed.
2. Support of all internal and external file transfer protocols
(except ASCII)for both uploads and downloads.
3. User-customizable menus. Default menus are provided and can
be modified or replaced altogether to meet users'
requirements.
4. Full-featured messaging system: Enter/Read/Reply/Kill
messages, and Private messaging facility.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 155
=================================================================
5. Shell to DOS from remote, with optional password protection.
6. Shutdown from remote, also with optional password protection.
7. Ability to call Scripts from the Host. New Host features can
be implemented via standard QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE scripts.
8. Sysop CHAT mode which allows callers to converse with the
SYStem OPerator while on-line.
9. On-line listing of the HOST download file directory.
10. Complete online help for each menu option. These help files
can be customized by you should you want.
Host Setup
Before it can be used, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Host Mode must
be configured via the Alt-N/H Host Setup.
External Files Required The Password File, QMHOST.PWD, is the
only file required to run Host Mode. QMHOST.PWD contains users'
Names, Passwords, Security Levels, and optional CallBack phone
numbers. If QMHOST.PWD does not exist, it will be created
automatically the first time Host Mode is started.
The file "QMHOST.PWD" is a CR/LF-delimited ASCII file. It can be
edited with the Internal Editor or any standard text editor (IE.
QEDIT, Norton Editor, or word processors which can edit
unformatted ASCII files).
The QMHOST.PWD file layout is as follows:
Firstname Lastname Password Security-Level Callback-# ;Comments
Each field is separated by one or more spaces, and comments must
be preceded by a semicolon. The Callback Number is required only
if you have selected the CALLBACK system type. Information in the
Password File is case-insensitive ("JANE", "Jane", and "jane" are
interpreted identically).
Following is a sample QMHOST.PWD file:
John Friel Password 1 1-319-233-6157 ; Moi
Joe Blow Qmodem 0 ; another example
Records may be in any order (the SYSOP record need not be first).
In the example above, the first and last entries have a CALLBACK
number and will work in a CALLBACK system, while the second entry
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 156
=================================================================
will not.
Security Levels may be "1" or "0". Level 1 users may shut down
the system from remote (as long as they know the password). Other
security levels are unassigned and are reserved for future use.
Files created by the Host
Two files are created by the Host the first time it is invoked:
QMHOST.HDR The Message Header file.
QMHOST.MSG The Message Text File.
These two files may not be edited or modified in any way. If they
are, unpredictable results will occur while messaging. The
message base can be packed (killed messages are deleted) by
running the QMHOSTPK.EXE program supplied on the Utilities disk.
(Refer to the Message Section for more information on
QMHOSTPK.EXE)
Optional Files Host Menu files can be customized to meet your
needs. The following default menu files are supplied:
PRELOG.HST The opening screen sent to all callers
MENU.HST The Host Main Menu
PROTS.HST The protocol list for Up/Download commands
LOGOFF.HST The logoff screen sent to all callers
Menu Files are all standard ASCII files and can be edited with
the Internal Editor.
Host Mode supports ANSI color/graphic menus, but these cannot be
selectively disabled. If you use ANSI menus, all callers must
have ANSI emulation active to correctly view the screens.
Included on the Utilities Disk, are sample menu files for you to
experiment with. These files all end with the extension .HST .
Logging on Locally
While Host Mode is active, you may press [F1] to log on locally.
This feature can be used to test menu and Script operation. All
Host commands, except Page the Sysop are available locally.
Attempting to do an Upload or Download will allow you to verify
that the protocols are installed correctly, but no transfers will
actually take place.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 157
=================================================================
When you are finished, you should use the G command to log off.
To exit Host Mode, press [ESC] while the system is waiting for a
call. You will be returned to TERMINAL mode and the Modem
Initialization string (Alt-N/M/M/I) will be sent to the modem.
Starting the Host while ONLINE
The HOST can be invoked while you are on-line. The other person
you are connected to will be prompted for logon information as if
the host had answered the incoming call itself.
If the caller is unsuccessful in his logon, the host will drop
the connection and cycle. There is no method to return to normal
terminal without dropping the connection once the host is
started.
Sysop Commands while the Host is active
When a caller is on-line, the SYSOP may break into chat mode by
pressing [F2], Dropping to DOS locally by pressing [F5] or
disconnect the caller by pressing [F10]. At all times, Host Mode
will accept input from the remote caller as well as from the
local keyboard. The SYSOP, for example, may come to the rescue of
a caller by typing commands directly. These will be processed as
if they had been typed by the remote caller.
Uploads and Downloads may be canceled by pressing [ESC] key. It
is not considered nice to cancel a download on the 244th block of
a 245-block file.
F2 Chatting with the Caller
Pressing [F2] initiates an on-line chat between the caller and
the sysop:
(60 min. left) Qmodem Host Command >
You are now Chatting with the Sysop
(a conversation may go here...
Returning you to Host Mode
Both caller and Sysop may type at will; the display will be
identical on both computers. End-of-Line wordwrap is also active
in CHAT mode.
To exit CHAT mode, the SYSOP must press [F2] again. The message
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 158
=================================================================
"Returning you to Host Mode" will be displayed and the caller
will be returned to the Main Menu.
F5 Dropping to DOS
When you drop to DOS, the caller will see the following message:
Sysop has dropped to DOS. Please wait...
You then get the DOS prompt just as if you had pressed Alt-R from
Terminal Mode. When you type [EXIT] and return to the Host, the
caller will see:
Ok, you can continue...
and the main menu will be displayed.
F10 Disconnecting the Caller
This is a drastic measure, but one you should know how to use. If
your system is suddenly beseiged by a gang of Adolescent Deformed
Kung-fu Crickets with modems, you will want to be sure they get
the message... Pressing [F10] gives them:
NO CARRIER
That's right, nothing. The modem is hung up without a message.
Host Functions
Here is a sample MENU.HST file bundled with QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 159
=================================================================
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓╔═══════════════════════════════╗▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓║ Board Commands ║░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓╚═══════════════════════════════╝░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓╒═══════════════════════╕▓▓▓▓╒═══════════════════════╕▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓│ <R>ead Messages │░░▓▓│ <F>iles Directory │░░▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓│ <E>nter a Message │░░▓▓│ <D>ownload File(s) │░░▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓│ <P>age the Sysop │░░▓▓│ <U>pload Files(s) │░░▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓╘═══════════════════════╛░░▓▓╘═══════════════════════╛░░▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░▓▓▓▓░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓╒═══════════════════════╕▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓│ <O>pen a Script │░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓│ <S>hell to DOS │░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓│ <G>oodbye (HangUp) │░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓╘═══════════════════════╛░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓▓
Now let's look at each command in the Host:
R READ MESSAGES
The "R" Read command is used to read messages. Unlike
sophisticated On-line Services or Bulletin Board Systems, the
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Host mode does not keep track of each
caller's "Last Message Read". It is up to callers to remember the
number of the last message he/she read.
If the caller presses [ENTER] at the "Start with Msg" prompt, the
READ command is canceled and the Main Menu is displayed.
If the number entered is lower than the number of the first
available message, reading will start with the first available
message. Likewise, if the number entered is higher than the
highest message number, the last valid message will be read.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 160
=================================================================
Following is a sample message-reading session:
Msg# : 1
To : JOHN FRIEL (private) (not read)
From : JOE BLOW
Subject : Testing the Host
Date/Time : 08-14-1990 21:32:03
This is just a test, John
Hope you get it ok!
Joe
(R)eply, (K)ill, (Q)uit, [ENTER] next msg >
Message headers contain Message Number, To, From, Subject, and
Date & Time information. Message marked (private) or (killed) can
only be viewed by callers with SYSOP Security or the caller that
left the message.
After reading a message, the caller is prompted for one of the
following actions:
1. (R)eply to the message just read.
2. (K)ill the message. A message can be killed if it was
addressed to the caller or the caller has SYSOP privileges.
3. (Q)uit and return to the Main Menu.
4. [ENTER] to read the next message.
E ENTER A MESSAGE
The "E" command is used to enter a new message. The caller will
be prompted for the name of the recipient, an appropriate subject
for the message, and the security status of the message (private
or public). The actual message is then entered. Messages may have
up to 20 lines of 72 characters each. As text reaches the end of
the line, it automatically wraps to the next line.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 161
=================================================================
Following is a sample message entry session:
(53 min. left) Qmodem Host Command > E
To: The Sysop
Subject: Testing the Message Base
Private (y/n) ? N
Enter your message. 72 chars per line, 16 lines max. Autowrap
Blank line ends message.
-------------------------------------------------------------
This is a test of the emergency broadcasting system...
This is ONLY a test!
Beeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeep!
(C)ontinue, (S)ave or (A)bort >
At the end of the message, the caller presses [ENTER] twice to
terminate message entry. The Host will then display the
"(C)ontinue, (S)ave or (A)bort >" prompt.
C) Continue with message entry - The last line with text is
displayed with the cursor following the last non-blank character.
Use this option if you exited the message and wish to add to it.
S) Save the Message.
The message is saved and the user is returned to the Main Menu.
If the message was entered as a reply, the next message, if any,
will be displayed.
A) Abort the Message.
The message is deleted and the user is returned to the Main Menu.
If the message was entered as a reply, then the next message, if
any, will be displayed.
The end-of-message prompt will also be issued automatically when
the messages reaches the 20-line maximum.
P PAGE THE SYSOP
When someone Pages the Sysop, you and the caller will hear one
beep approximately every second, and see the following:
Paging Sysop. Press any key to abort...
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 162
=================================================================
As the beeps go off, another dot is added to the line. After 20
or so seconds, the caller is told that you are not answering the
Page and gives him the Menu again. While he is paging you, the
Status line tells you that pressing [F2] will answer the Page.
Then, it is identical to the Chat mode described earlier.
F FILES DIRECTORY
The "F" command lists the contents of the Host Download
Directory:
(55 min. left) Qmodem Host Command > F
--- FILE LIST ---
OVERLOK.ZIP 4856 13:03 04-27-90
TESTFILE 0 20:35 08-14-90
------ END ------
Press any key to continue
If the directory exceeds one page, the caller is prompted to
continue between them. These are the only files that can be
downloaded from the Host.
Exception to Rule :
IF the caller has Sysop privileges, AND the Alt-N/H/D Download
Directory is left BLANK, the caller can then Download ANY file
from the Host system provided he/she knows the EXACT
drive:\path\filename. The Files command does not prompt for the
directory to display. It will always show the CURRENT directory
under these conditions.
It is assumed that in this case, the caller has his/her Host set
up securely.
D DOWNLOAD FILES
When D is selected, the alternate Protocol directory file
PROTS.HST is searched for and displayed. If this file is not
found, then the default list of protocols is displayed. Download
procedures are the same as uploads. Prior to a download, the Host
verifies the existence of the file to be sent. If the file does
not exist, the Download is canceled.
The Host fully supports the Batch transfer protocols. If a batch
protocol is selected, the user is prompted for up to 20 filenames
to be downloaded. Each filename can also contain the wildcard
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 163
=================================================================
characters * and ?. This allows for even greater flexibility!
U UPLOAD FILES
When the Upload command is selected, the Host first looks for the
alternate protocol menu file PROTS.HST. If it is found, it is
displayed. If not, the list of default protocols is displayed.
The caller can then select the desired protocol. A filename
prompt will be displayed next for the file transfer. During the
transfer, the standard QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Download window will
be displayed.
The meanings of Uploads and Downloads are reversed while in Host
Mode -- an Upload by the caller is a Download to the Host, and
vice-versa --.
O OPEN A SCRIPT
The Open Script command allows QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE script
execution while in Host Mode; it is the Host equivalent of the
Alt-F command. When the "O" command is selected, the QMHOST.SCR
script is executed.
When logging on locally with the [F1] command, the "O" command
invokes the QMHOSTL.SCR script rather than the QMHOST.SCR script.
This allows you to test the script offline. Since QMHOSTL.SCR
script is executed while offline, it should not test for an
on-line condition.
If the Host script is found, it begins executing immediately. If
the Script is not found, the following message is displayed:
Sorry, that function is not available.
Following is a sample QMHOST.SCR:
FirstNamePrompt: DISPLAY "Enter your First Name > " ; ask for a
first name
GETR 0 20 ; put it in $0
IF $Offline Exit1 ; if we are offline, then exit
IF "$0" <> "" LastNamePrompt ; If so, go to the next prompt.
DISPLAYLN "Hey, I want your Last name! Try again...^M^J"
GOTO FirstNamePrompt
LastNamePrompt: DISPLAY "Enter your Last name > " ; ask for a
last name
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 164
=================================================================
GETR 1 20 ; put it in $1
IF $Offline Exit1 ; are we offline? if so, exit
IF "$1" <> "" NextStep ; if a name was entered, go to next
label
DISPLAYLN "Hey, I want your Last name! Try again...^M^J"
GOTO LastNamePrompt
NextStep: ; continue here
DISPLAYLN " "
DISPLAYLN "Thank you, $0"
DISPLAYLN "You will now be returned to the Host...
DISPLAYLN " "
DISPLAYLN "Please wait $0 $1"
Exit1:
EXIT ; exit back to the Host
The QMHOSTL.SCR version of the script would be modified so that
the GETR commands would be changed to GET, and the $OFFLINE tests
would be removed completely.
The callers First and Last name is passed to the script variables
$0 and $1 respectively. For more information on QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE Scripts, refer to the Script Language section later in this
manual.
S SHELL TO DOS
The "S" Shell to DOS command allows access to the DOS prompt
while Host Mode is active. This command is the Host equivalent of
the Alt-R command, and similar rules and restrictions apply.
There is, however, one major difference between the local DOS
Shell available with the Alt-R command, and the Host Shell. In
the case of a remote logon, DOS must receive its input from the
serial port, rather than from the keyboard. If there is a user
on-line, the Host Shell command executes the QMHOST.BAT batch
file. If you are logging on as the local Sysop, the Shell command
operates in the same manner as the Alt-R command.
The Host passes 4 parameters to the QMHOST.BAT file as follows:
%1 The current COM port number
%2 The current Baud rate
%3 The current Port Base Address (in HEX)
%4 The IRQ for the current port (in HEX)
Refer to the README file located on Disk 1 for further
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 165
=================================================================
instructions on the QMHOST.BAT file.
The default QMHOST.BAT file can be set up use the DOS CTTY
function to do the remote Drop to DOS functions. This is not as
clean a solution as running Doorway, but it does work in a pinch.
The file would then contains the following lines:
ECHO OFF
CTTY COM%1:
COMMAND
CTTY CON:
There is one limitation to the CTTY method you should be made
aware of. DOS CTTY only supports COM1 and COM2. If you need to
use COM3 - COM8, you need to look at the DOORWAY program
described on page 163.
G GOODBYE (HANG-UP)
The Goodbye command allows a clean exit from the Host mode. The
modem is put back on-hook and returns to "Waiting for call...".
? HELP WITH HOST
The ? command will cause the Host to search for the file called
HELP.HST and display it if found. This is a generic Help file
that should tell the caller what all the commands are and briefly
what they do. It should also mention that more help is available
by typing in a ? followed by the command in question. This will
display a file by the name of HELP[character].HST where
[character] is the command letter they want more help with.
These help files are ASCII text and can be edited by you to
customize your Host. A default set of help files is included on
the Utilities Disk.
HELP.HST Generic
Help about the Host and should include a brief command summary.
HELPD.HST Download command.
You should edit to include specific instructions on external
protocols if any are installed.
HELPE.HST Enter Message command.
Instructions on entering a message.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 166
=================================================================
HELPF.HST File List command.
Tells the caller about your downloadable files.
HELPG.HST Goodbye command.
Need I say more?
HELPO.HST Open Script command.
This should describe any script systems you install.
HELPP.HST Page Sysop command.
You might want to tell them the hours you are around for being
paged. If you are never around, you might want to tell them to
always leave a message.
HELPR.HST Read Message command.
Instructions on reading messages.
HELPS.HST Shell to DOS command.
Most likely, you will not be allowing your callers to do this. On
the outside chance someone will, this is the help for them.
HELPU.HST Upload command.
You might want to tell them about the protocols you have
installed. Similar to the Download help file.
HELPZ.HST Shutdown Host command.
Again, your users should not be doing this, but you never know!
Z SHUT DOWN HOST
The Shutdown command can only be entered by users that have a
security level of 1. In addition, they must also know the
shutdown password (Alt-N/H/S). When the correct password is
entered, the Host hangs up and returns to Terminal mode in QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE.
The "Z" does not appear in the default menu for security reasons.
Out of sight, out of mind.
Packing the Message Base There is a program called QMHOSTPK.EXE
included on the Utilities Disk that will pack the Message base.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 167
=================================================================
The term PACK refers to removing 'killed' messages.
You execute QMHOSTPK from the DOS prompt. It assumes the message
base files QMHOST.MSG and QMHOST.HDR are in the current
directory.
Should the message base become corrupted, the files QMHOST.HDR
and QMHOST.MSG files should be deleted and let the host re-create
them.
Alt-MINUS Status Line Toggle
The Alt-Minus command toggles ON and OFF the Status Line at the
bottom of the screen. This is for normal Terminal mode only. When
running the Host Mode, a Script, or most other Alt commands, the
appropriate status line(s) will be displayed.
When turned OFF, it does give you one additional line for use in
some terminal emulations, and especially useful when using the
Doorway mode (Alt-Equal).
Alt-EQUAL DOORWAY Mode
Doorway mode allows you to send the entire PC Keyboard Scan Codes
across the line to the remote system. The exception to this is
the Alt-Equal key, which is the toggle to get you in and out of
Doorway mode.
This is most often used with fullscreen message editors on
Bulletin Board systems, to allow use of the arrow, page up and
page down keys.
Alt-ENTER Alternate Status Line Toggle
A little feature that a lot of you requested. The status line can
now be toggled between the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE standard with
all the toggles and system information, to one that shows you the
Name and Number of the last dialed system. Yes, it will show you
who you are connected to!
The only restriction is that the number must have been dialed
from the dialing directory, Alt-D.
Alt-N/O/R/I Int16 Enable must be set ON for this to function and
your BIOS and keyboard must support a 101-key system. Old PC's
and some old XT's may not allow this to work.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 168
=================================================================
THE INTERNAL EDITOR
The Internal Editor is a RAM-based editor and similar to the
Turbo Pascal & SideKick editors. If you are familiar with either
of these, you should need little help in using the Internal
Editor (perhaps no more than a look at the Quick Command
Reference); novices should read on.
Entering and Editing Text
You enter text into the Internal Editor the same way you would on
a regular typewriter. Most keys behave in the same manner;
pressing ENTER terminates a text line, for example. But there are
some important differences too.
The cursor always indicates where new text will be entered, and
you can move the cursor in a number of ways. You can correct
mistakes easily using the Delete commands. You can copy or move
blocks of text with the Block commands. You can quickly search
the file for a particular text string with the Find commands.
And, most of the time, you can "undo" a change with the Line
Restore command.
Each command (and there are many more) is described briefly in
the following section.
QUICK REFERENCE
Function Keystroke(s)
Character left Ctrl-S or Left arrow
Character right Ctrl-D or Right arrow
Word left Ctrl-A or Ctrl-left arrow
Word right Ctrl-F or Ctrl-right arrow
Line up Ctrl-E or Up arrow
Line down Ctrl-X or Down arrow
Scroll up Ctrl-W
Scroll down Ctrl-Z
Page up Ctrl-R or PgUp
Page down Ctrl-C or PgDn
Beginning of file Ctrl-QR or Ctrl-PgUp
End of file Ctrl-QC or Ctrl-PgDn
Beginning of line Ctrl-QS or Home
End of line Ctrl-QD or End
Top of screen Ctrl-QE or Ctrl-Home
Bottom of screen Ctrl-QX or Ctrl-End
Top of block Ctrl-QB
Bottom of block Ctrl-QK
Jump to marker 0..3 Ctrl-Q0..Ctrl-Q3
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 169
=================================================================
Set marker 0..3 Ctrl-K0..Ctrl-K3
Previous cursor position Ctrl-QP
New line Ctrl-M or ENTER
Insert line Ctrl-N
Insert control character Ctrl-P
Tab Ctrl-I or Tab
Delete current character Ctrl-G or Del
Delete character left Ctrl-H or Backspace
Delete word Ctrl-T
Delete to end of line Ctrl-QY
Delete line Ctrl-Y
Find Ctrl-QF
Find-and-replace Ctrl-QA
Find next Ctrl-L
Begin block Ctrl-KB or F7
End block Ctrl-KK or F8
Copy block Ctrl-KC
Move block Ctrl-KV
Delete block Ctrl-KY
Hide block Ctrl-KH
Mark current word as block Ctrl-KT
Read block from file Ctrl-KR
Write block to file Ctrl-KW
Print block Ctrl-KP
Toggle insert mode Ctrl-V or Ins
Toggle Autoindent mode Ctrl-QI
Toggle fixed tabs Ctrl-or
Restore line Ctrl-QL
Exit editor Ctrl-KD or F10 or Esc
When the notation Ctrl- precedes another key, it means that you
hold down the Ctrl key and press the second key. In the case of
commands that have a second letter (for example Ctrl-QP), you
hold down the Ctrl only while pressing the first letter, not the
second.
The Editing Screen
The top line in the Edit Window is called the Edit Status Line
and should not be confused with the global Status Line at the
bottom of the screen. The Edit Status Line is inside the window
and the global is not.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 170
=================================================================
The editor screen:
╒══════════════════════════════ Full Screen Edit ══════════════════════════════╕
│ Line 18 Col 61 Insert Indent E:SAMPLE.DOC │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ This text was entered │
│ with auto-indent ON │
│ │
│ │
│The x's mark the tab stops with fixed tabs ON: │
│ x x x x x x x x x │
│COl: 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 73 │
│ │
│ │
│The x's mark the tab stops with 'smart tabs' ON: │
│ x x x x x x x x x │
│ │
│ │
│To enter a ^B into the the text, you press ^P and then ^B... │
│ │
│ │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Help F2-Save F3-New F9,ESC-Abort F10-Save & Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░
Command echo When the first key of a command assigned to two
keystrokes is pressed, or when the Insert
control character command (Ctrl-P, like the
example) is given, the keystroke is echoed in
the upper left corner of the window on the
status line. For example, if you start to enter
a command that begins with Ctrl-K (such as
Ctrl-KK), a ^K will appear until the second
keystroke is entered.
Line n Shows the number of the line containing the
cursor, counted from the start of the file.
Col n Shows the column number containing the cursor.
Insert Indicates that Insert mode is in effect.
Everything you type will be inserted as opposed
to possibly overwriting existing text.
Indent Indicates that Autoindent mode is in effect.
Ctrl-QI toggles autoindent on and off.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 171
=================================================================
Tab Indicates that fixed tabs (toggled with Ctrl-or)
are in effect.
E:SAMPLE.DOC
The Drive, name and extension of the file being edited. Although
the editor accepts path designations, the path name will not
appear in the status line.
Basic Movement Commands
The basic movement commands are those that move the cursor
without altering the text. The cursor can be moved in one of two
ways; with a key on the numeric keypad or with a control
character. For example, to move the cursor to the right once
character, you can press either the Right Arrow or Ctrl-D.
In the following listings, the key sequence on the left is the
primary key sequence and the one on the right, if any, is the
secondary key sequence. Either can be modified by running the
EDINSTAL program included on the Utilities Disk.
The online help for the Internal Editor will not reflect any
changes you make to the key sequences. Only the default
installation is shown.
Character left Ctrl-S or Left arrow
Moves the cursor one character to the left. This command does not
work across line breaks; when the cursor reaches column 1; it
stops.
Character right Ctrl-D or Right Arrow
Moves the cursor one character to the right. This command does
not work across line breaks; when the cursor reaches the
right-hand edge of the text window, the text starts scrolling
horizontally until it reaches the extreme right edge of the line
(column 248), where it stops.
Word left Ctrl-A or Ctrl-Left arrow
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the left. This
command works across line breaks.
Word right Ctrl-F or Ctrl-Right arrow
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to the right. This
command works across line breaks.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 172
=================================================================
Line up Ctrl-E or Up arrow
Moves the cursor to the line above. If the cursor is on the top
line of the window, the window scrolls down one line.
Line down Ctrl-X or Down arrow
Moves the cursor to the line below. If the cursor is on the
next-to-last line of the window, the window scrolls up one line.
Scroll up Ctrl-W
Scrolls up toward the beginning of the file, one line at a time.
The cursor remains on its line until it reaches the bottom of the
window.
Scroll down Ctrl-Z
Scrolls down towards the end of the file, one line at a time. The
cursor remains on its line until it reaches the top of the
window.
Page up Ctrl-R or PgUp
Moves the cursor one page up with an overlap of one line.
Page down Ctrl-C or PgDn
Moves the cursor one page down with an overlap of one line.
Beginning of file Ctrl-QR or Ctrl-PgUp
Moves the cursor to the first character in the file.
End of file Ctrl-QC or Ctrl-PgDn
Moves the cursor to the last character in the file.
Beginning of line Ctrl-QS or Home
Moves the cursor to column 1 on the current line.
End of line Ctrl-QD or End
Moves the cursor to the end of the current line (the position
following the last non-blank character on the line). Trailing
blanks are always removed from all lines to preserve space.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 173
=================================================================
Top of screen Ctrl-QE or Ctrl-Home
Moves the cursor to the top line of the text window.
Bottom of screen Ctrl-QX or Ctrl-End
Moves the cursor to the bottom line of the text window.
Top of block Ctrl-QB
Moves the cursor to the position of the block-begin marker set
with Ctrl-KB. This command works even if the block is hidden with
the Ctrl-KH command or the block-end marker is not set.
Bottom of block Ctrl-QK
Moves the cursor to the position of the block-end marker set with
the Ctrl-QK command. The command works even if the block is
hidden or the block-begin marker is not set.
Previous cursor position Ctrl-QP
Moves the cursor to the last position. This command is useful to
move back to the previous position after a Save, a Find, or a
Find-and-replace operation. (or in case you hit the wrong
direction key!)
Jump to marker 0..3 Ctrl-Q0..Ctrl-Q3
Moves the cursor to one of the four invisible text markers
created with the Set marker command. Ctrl-Q0 jumps to marker 0,
Ctrl-Q1 jumps to marker 1, and so on. If the specified marker has
not been set, the cursor is not moved.
Set marker 0..3 Ctrl-K0..Ctrl-K3
Sets one of the four invisible text markers at the current cursor
position. Ctrl-K0 sets marker 0, Ctrl-K1 sets marker 1, and so
on.
Insert and Delete Commands
These commands let you insert and delete characters, words, and
lines. Two related commands are covered in later sections:
Restore line (Ctrl-QL) and Delete block (Ctrl-KY).
New line Ctrl-M or Enter
In insert mode, this command inserts a line break at the cursor's
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 174
=================================================================
current position. If Autoindent mode is in effect, the cursor
moves to the next line and to the same column as the first
non-blank character in the previous line; otherwise, it moves to
column 1 of the new line.
In overwrite mode, this command moves the cursor to column 1 of
the next line without inserting a new line, whether Autoindent
mode is in effect or not.
Insert line Ctrl-N
Inserts a line break at the cursor's position. The cursor does
not move.
Insert control character Ctrl-P
Allows control characters to be entered into the text. For
example, pressing Ctrl-P and then Ctrl-C would insert a Ctrl-C
(^C) into the text. Control characters are displayed as capital
letters in the same color as the Status Line.
Tab Ctrl-I or Tab
Moves the cursor to the next tab stop. In Insert mode, any text
to the right of the cursor is moved along with it; in Overtype
mode, only the cursor is moved. The location of the next tab stop
depends on whether fixed tabs or smart tabs are in effect.
Delete current character Ctrl-G or Del
Deletes the character over the cursor and moves any characters to
the right of the cursor one position to the left. This command
does not work across line breaks.
Delete character left Ctrl-H or Backspace
Moves the cursor one character to the left and deletes the
character positioned there. Any characters to the right of the
cursor are moved one position to the left. If the cursor is in
column 1 at the time the command is given, the invisible
end-of-line marker for the previous line is deleted instead, and
the two lines are joined.
Delete word Ctrl-T
Deletes the word to the right of the cursor. This command works
across line breaks and thus may be used to remove line breaks.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 175
=================================================================
Delete to end of line Ctrl-QY
Deletes all text from the position of the cursor to the end of
the line.
Delete line Ctrl-Y
Deletes the line containing the cursor and moves any lines below
it up one line. The cursor moves to column 1 of the next line.
You cannot restore a deleted line, so use this with caution.
Block Commands
A block is any arbitrarily defined, contiguous unit of text; a
block can be as small as a single character or as large as the
entire file. Mark a block by placing a begin-block marker at the
first character in the desired block and an end-block marker just
beyond the last character. Once marked, the block can be copied,
moved, deleted, or written to a file.
Although marked blocks are normally highlighted, the block may be
"hidden" (or made invisible) with the Hide block command. Many of
the block-manipulation commands described here work only when the
block is being displayed. The block- related cursor movement
commands (Ctrl-QB and Ctrl-QK, described in the "Basic Movement
Commands") work whether the block is hidden or displayed.
Begin block Ctrl-KB or F7
Marks the beginning of a block. The marker itself is not visible
on the screen, and the block becomes visible only when the
end-block marker is set. You can also use the begin-block marker
as an extra text marker and jump directly to it with Ctrl-QB.
End block Ctrl-KK or F8
Marks the end of a block. Like the begin-block marker, the
end-block marker is invisible, and the block itself will not be
displayed unless both markers are set. You can also use the
end-block marker as an extra text marker and jump directly to it
with Ctrl-QK.
Copy block Ctrl-KC
Creates a copy of a marked and displayed block at the current
cursor position. The original block is left unchanged, and the
markers are placed around the new copy of the block.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 176
=================================================================
Move block Ctrl-KV
Moves a marked and displayed block from its current position to
the cursor's position. The markers remain around the block at its
new position.
Delete block Ctrl-KY
Deletes a marked and displayed block. There is no command to
restore a deleted block, so use caution with this command.
Hide block Ctrl-KH
Toggles on and off the visual marking of a block. Block
manipulation commands work only when the block is being
displayed.
Mark single word Ctrl-KT
Marks a single word as a block, combining the functions of the
Begin-block and End-block commands. If the cursor is positioned
within a word, that word will be marked. If it is not within a
word, then the word to the left of the cursor will be marked. And
if there is no word to the right of the cursor, then the word to
the left will be marked.
Read block from file Ctrl-KR
Reads a file into the text at the cursor's current position
exactly as if it were copied from another part of the text. The
file read in is marked as a block. When you use this command, you
are prompted for the name of the file to read. If you have used
this command earlier in the editing session, the last file name
entered will be displayed. You may enter a new file name, make
minor changes to the one displayed using the Backspace key, or
accept it by pressing ENTER. The file specified may be any legal
file name, including a drive and/or path identifier. Cancel the
command by pressing Ctrl-U.
Write block to file Ctrl-KW
Writes the currently marked block to a file. The block is left
unchanged, and the block markers remain in place. You are first
prompted for a filename. The file specified can be any legal file
name, including a drive and/or path identifier. You should avoid
using file names with the extension .BAK, because this extension
is used by the Internal Editor when creating backup files. If the
file specified already exists, you are asked if you want to
overwrite it. If you press "N" (for NO), you can enter a new file
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 177
=================================================================
name, make minor changes, or cancel the command with the Ctrl-U
command. If no block is marked, this command is ignored.
Print Ctrl-KP
Prints the currently marked and displayed block on the default
printer. If no block is marked or the block is hidden, the entire
file is printed.
Miscellaneous Commands
This section describes a number of commands that do not fall into
any previous category.
Toggle insert mode Ctrl-V or Ins
Selects Insert or Overwrite mode. In Insert mode, text to the
right of the cursor is moved to the right as new text is entered.
In Overwrite mode, any text to the right of the cursor is
overwritten when new text is entered.
Toggle autoindent Ctrl-QI
When Autoindent mode is in effect, the New line command (Enter or
Ctrl-M) will move the cursor to the next row and to the same
column as the first non- blank character on the previous line.
Toggle fixed tabs Ctrl-OT
When fixed tabs are in effect, the tab stops (normally) start at
column 9 and occur every 8 columns thereafter. By default, fixed
tabs are off, and smart tabs are on. When smart tabs are in use,
the tab stops are determined by the locations of the words on the
previous line; the first character in each word represents a tab
stop. When fixed tabs are used, the Tab command inserts a single
tab character at the cursor's position. When smart tabs are used,
the tab is stored as a series of blanks.
Restore line Ctrl-QL
Undoes any changes made to a line of text as long as you have not
left the line. The line is restored to its previous contents
regardless of the changes made. Since the Delete line command
(Ctrl-Y) moves the cursor to what was previously another line,
Restore line cannot recover lines deleted with it.
Find Ctrl-QF
Lets you search for a string of up to 30 characters. When you
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 178
=================================================================
enter this command, the status line is cleared and you will be
asked for a search string. The last search string entered (if
any) will be displayed. You can select it again by pressing
Enter, edit it, or enter a new string. When editing strings,
Backspace deletes the previous character, Ctrl-R restores the
previous string, Ctrl-S moves the cursor to the left, and Ctrl-D
shows the next character to the right. Esc or Ctrl-U will cancel
a search command, and Ctrl-P can be used to enter control
characters.
After the search string is entered, you must specify your search
options. The options you used last, if any, are displayed.
Editing works the same as the search string edit. The following
options are available:
B Searches backwards from the current cursor position toward
the beginning of the file.
L Limits searches to the currently marked block.
n n may be any number. Find the nth occurrence of the search
string, counted from the current cursor position.
U Ignore case; treats all alphabetic characters as if they were
uppercase.
W Searches for whole words only; skips matching patterns
embedded in other words.
If the text contains a target matching the search string, the
cursor is positioned at the end of the target.
Find and replace Ctrl-QA
This operation works the same as the Find command, except that
you can replace the "found" string with any other string of up to
30 characters. After entering the search string, you are asked to
enter the replacement string. The last replacement string, if
any, will be displayed; you can accept it, edit it, or enter a
new string.
Finally, you are prompted for options. The options you used last
are displayed at first. You can enter new options (canceling the
old ones), edit the current options, or select the same options
by pressing Enter. The options are the same as those for the Find
command with the following exceptions:
G Searches globally. The entire file is scanned for the search
string, regardless of the current position of the cursor. The
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 179
=================================================================
search starts at the beginning of the file if searching
forward; at the end if searching backwards.
N Replaces without asking. Does not prompt for confirmation at
each occurrence of the search string.
If the text contains a target matching the search string, the
cursor is positioned at the end of the target. You are then asked
if you wish to replace it. Press "Y" to replace it, or "N" to
ignore it. You can abort the operation by pressing Ctrl-U. If you
selected the N (no prompting) option, this question will not be
asked.
You can speed up global search-and-replace operations by
selecting the N option and then pressing a key (preferably for a
nonprinting character, such as ESC or Ins). The screen is then no
longer updated when each replacement is made.
Find next Ctrl-L
Repeats the last search operation. If the last search command
called for a Find operation, the same search string and options
will be repeated; for a Find-and-replace operation, the
replacement string will be reused as well.
Exit Editor Ctrl-KD
Saves the file being edited and exits from the editor. The
original file, if any, is renamed to FILENAME.BAK.
EDINSTAL - Keyboard Installation Program
You can use the EDINSTAL program (on the Utilities Disk) to
customize the Internal Editor. You can redefine the keystrokes
(both primary and secondary) used to invoke the predefined
commands. For example, the Toggle fixed tabs command is by
default assigned to Ctrl-OT using EDINSTAL, you could assign this
command to Shift-Tab.
Running EDINSTAL
Load EDINSTAL by typing EDINSTAL at the DOS command line. The
QMODEM.EXE file must be in the current directory for this to run.
If it is, you will be asked
Perform fast entry for fully reconfigured keyboard?
If you press "Y" for yes, you can install the keyboard using the
fast-entry method. The default response, No, can be given by
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 180
=================================================================
pressing "N" or Enter. If you answer No, the keyboard will be
installed using the random access method.
Fast Entry
When you select the fast-entry option, you will see the following
instructions:
Press <Enter> to accept default
Press keys followed by <Enter> for new key sequence
Press <Bksp> to back up one keystroke, C to clear, R to restore
Press <Scroll Lock> to toggle literal mode
Press <Escape> to quit entering commands
Random access editing is available when you are finished
You can then either enter a new key sequence for each command or
accept the current one by pressing Enter. Both the command name
and the current key sequence are always displayed to the left of
the cursor. You specify a new key sequence by pressing the keys
you wish to use to invoke that command. Pressing Enter terminates
your entry.
You can correct mistakes in the current entry by pressing the
Backspace key (delete last keystroke), C (Clear entry), or R
(Restore previous entry). To specify either the Enter key or a
Ctrl-M, you must first press the Scroll Lock key, which indicates
that keystrokes are to be interpreted literally; press it again
when you've finished entering the key sequence. Pressing Esc
stops the fast-entry procedure and takes you to the random access
entry screen.
Random Access
When you select the random access option or when you have
finished using the fast-entry procedure, you can alter any or all
of the default key sequences. The top line of the screen will
give you some basic instructions. The remainder of the screen
shows (from left to right) the name of the command, the primary
key sequence, and the secondary key sequence (if any).
Move the cursor to the key sequence you want to change and press
Enter. Use the Left arrow and Right arrow keys to select the
primary or secondary key sequences, and scroll through the list
of commands using the Up arrow, Down arrow, PgUp, and PgDn keys.
Home takes you to the first command, and End to the last.
You can correct mistakes the same way as the fast-entry edit.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 181
=================================================================
Quitting the Program
When you have finished making changes, press "Q" to quit or "W"
to write your changes to the QMODEM.EXE file. If you choose the
Write option, you will then see the message "Checking for
conflicts..." If you have accidentally assigned the same key
sequence to two different commands, an error message will be
displayed. You can correct your mistakes by searching for the
highlighted items.
You will also see an error message if the new list of keystrokes
is too large for the area set aside for it. You can easily solve
this problem by eliminating a few secondary key sequences.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 182
=================================================================
THE QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE SCRIPT LANGUAGE
What is a script? A script is a QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE program,
designed to perform specific and/or repetitive functions much
faster and more reliably than with manual methods. Scripts can be
used to do just about anything that can be done at the keyboard;
your imagination is the only limit. Common uses for scripts
include:
1. Automated logon
2. File transfers
3. Completely automated sessions
4. Unattended QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operations
The QuickLearn Script Recorder is an extremely convenient
facility, but it has its limitations. Basically, QuickLearn can
only record your interactions with a remote computer and
replicate them exactly. It cannot add decision-making logic to
the scripts it creates, or account for unexpected or changing
conditions. When you run out of QuickLearn power, time has come
to write or edit your own scripts.
Scripts are similar to interpreted BASIC programs. The syntax is
somewhat different, but the principles are almost identical. The
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Script Interpreter (also referred to as the
Script Parser) reads the script's code and executes the
instructions as it reads them.
Scripts can be very simple or extremely involved. Logon scripts
created by QuickLearn are simple. Some large and complex scripts
have also been written to turn QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE into a
mini-Bulletin Board System. With the advent of BBS Networks such
as InterLink, scripts have been written to automatically dial a
BBS, log on, open a mail transfer door, download a mail packet,
and log off. Many useful QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE scripts are
included on the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Utilities disk. Many other
scripts can be found on bulletin boards, including Mustang
Software HQ!, Home of QMODEM.
You need not be a programmer to write scripts, but if you aren't,
we recommend that you start at the beginning until you have a
good understanding of script concepts, syntax rules, and common
script commands.
As with all programming languages, The QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
script language has a few idiosyncracies. Here are some of the
most obvious.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 183
=================================================================
Physical vs. Logical Screen
The physical screen is the entire screen, which usually consists
of 80 columns and 25 lines (or more if you have an EGA or VGA and
use one of the extended display modes).
Smaller, logical screens can be defined with the script BOX or
WINDOW commands. All screen output commands except ATWRITE are
limited to the logical screen boundaries defined in the last BOX
or WINDOW commands.
Input and Output Commands
The script language has a wealth of input and output commands,
each with a specific purpose. For example, there are six commands
available to read input from the keyboard and/or COM port (GET,
GETN, GETR, GETNR, GETX, and INKEY), and seven commands available
to display data on the screen and/or send it to the COM port
(ATWRITE, SEND, DISPLAY, DISPLAYLN, NOTE, WRITE, and WRITELN). In
addition, the WHEN command can also be used to send data to the
COM port when specific COM input is received.
Variable Handling Variables used in scripts do not have
explicitly declared types such as INTEGER or STRING. The string
"100", for example, could be used as a numeric variable as well
as a text variable. It is your responsibility to insure that the
variable contents are numeric when they need to be.
When a variable name is prefixed with a dollar sign, the Script
Interpreter will automatically substitute its value in the
command. When a value is assigned to a string, the dollar sign is
omitted. It is important to understand this concept to put it to
good use.
Regardless of their contents, script variables cannot exceed 64
characters.
Running Scripts
Scripts may be invoked explicitly with the Alt-F command. They
may also be run automatically by specifying a script name on the
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE command line, or if the script name is
defined in a directory entry (Linked Scripts), in which case the
script will start executing when the connection is made.
Script Commands
The QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE script language is very comprehensive.
Almost all terminal mode manual commands are available as script
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 184
=================================================================
commands (and then some). Since equivalent script commands
perform the same functions as their manual counterpart, we also
recommend that you familiarize yourself with the manual commands
first; its documentation more thorough and we did not see the
need to duplicate it for the script command. Commands that are
unique to the script environment are covered in detail, however.
The script language is a programming language, and script files
are special QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE programs intended to perform
specific functions. If you are not a programmer, do not let this
intimidate you. The script language is easy to learn, and scripts
are easy to read and modify. Error messages are clear and
concise. The built-in debugger and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Editor
will help you along as you develop your scripts, in the unlikely
event you make a mistake.
Scripts can be very flexible. They can be used in many ways that
aren't described here. Scripts fall into one of four categories:
1. Linked scripts,
These scripts are physically named in entries in the QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE Phone Directory. When connection is made, the script
is executed automatically. The same script can be linked to
multiple entries. These scripts are often referred to as "Logon
Scripts", because they take control immediately after a connect
and usually automate boring and repetitive logon processes.
Examples:
1. A BBS system has three nodes with different phone numbers. A
single script like BOARD.LOG can be linked to all three
numbers.
2. Scripts started with the Alt-F command, which require
execution-time parameters. QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE allows up to
ten variable parameters to be passed to a script.
3. Scripts linked to Function Keys. Because they are stored in a
Function Key Macro, you do not have to re-enter the
parameters each time you run the Script.
4. Stand-alone Scripts, requiring no parameters. These scripts
can be executed automatically when QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is
started, by specifying their name in a command-line
parameter.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 185
=================================================================
Example:
To execute the script DOFIRST.SCR when starting QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE, use the command:
C>QMODEM /S=DOFIRST.SCR<cr>
Once initialization is complete, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE will load
and execute the script whose name was specified in the /S=
command-line parameter. This command line could be contained in a
BATCH file to automate the process even further.
How to Create and Name a Script
Any standard ASCII text editor or word processor can be used to
create a script file. You may save scripts under any file name
and extension, but using the ".SCR" file extension makes life
much easier, as we'll see later.
The easiest way to write a script is to let QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
do it for you! Refer to the Alt-Q (QuickLearn) command for
complete details. But, if you insist on doing it yourself with
your favorite Word processor or Editor, remember these tips:
1. Scripts must be saved as standard, CR/LF-delimited ASCII
files. Non-ASCII files like those produced by Wordstar
Document mode won't work (for Wordstar, use N at the opening
prompt to create scripts in the Non-Document mode).
2. Each Script command must be on a separate line in the file.
We recommend the Internal Editor for creating and editing
scripts. Refer to the Alt-V and Alt-J/@EDIT commands for
information.
Starting a Script
There are 3 ways to start a Script:
1. The command line switch /S= to "auto start" a script. Refer
to the Command Line Switches for a description.
2. The explicit Alt-F command to call a script;.
3. Automatic execution of a Linked-Script attached to a Phone
Directory entry. (See Alt-D for instructions on attaching a
script to a dialing directory entry)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 186
=================================================================
Stopping a Script
You can stop a script at any time by pressing the [ESC] key. The
Status line will change to the following:
░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░ S-Single Step T-Trace G-Go A-Abort ░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░░
To cancel the script, press "A". Pressing "G" resumes script
execution at the point where it was interrupted. The "S" and "T"
commands are used to start Script Debug Mode (more on this
later).
Debugging a Script
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE includes a powerful script debugger,
complete with single-step and trace/animate features. In
addition, if a script fails, the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Internal
Editor can be automatically invoked with the cursor positioned at
the exact point where the error was detected.
Following is a simple script example to illustrate the debugger's
operation:
;
; Script example
;
DISPLAYLN "this is the value of variable COUNTER : $COUNTER "
EXIT
The fourth line in the script refers to a variable called
$COUNTER. This variable was not defined, and an error will
result. Executing the script will cause the following window to
be displayed:
╒═════════════════════════════ Script Error! ═════════════════════════════╕
│Type : Invalid Substitute VARIABLE │
│File : Z:\SCRIPTS\TEST1.SCR │
│Line : DISPLAYLN "this is the variable COUNTER : $COUNTER " │
│Press any key to Edit file │
│ │
│ │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░░ Script file "TEST1.SCR" at level 1. [ESC] to ABORT ░░░░░░░░░░░░░
The first line describes the error (explained in detail in the
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 187
=================================================================
next section). In this case, we have used an invalid variable.
The second line shows the fully qualified script filename.
The third line is the actual script line in which the error
occurred.
The bottom line displays an edit prompt. Assuming that we are
using the internal editor, pressing a key yields the following
display:
╒══════════════════════════════ Full Screen Edit ══════════════════════════════╕
│ Line 1 Col 43 Insert Indent Z:TEST1.SCR │
│DISPLAYLN "this is the variable COUNTER : $COUNTER " │
│EXIT │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
░░░░░░░░░░░░ F1-Help F2-Save F3-New F9,ESC-Abort F10-Save & Exit ░░░░░░░░░░░
When using the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Internal Editor, the cursor
will be positioned under the $ in $COUNTER, which is the
offending variable name.
Two additional error conditions yield different Script Error
windows:
╒═════════════════════════════ Script Error! ═════════════════════════════╕
│Type : LABEL not found │
│ TIMEOUT LABEL = WHOOPS │
│File : Z:\SCRIPTS\TEST1.SCR │
│Line : Waitfor "ever" │
│Press any key to Edit file │
│ │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
- or -
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 188
=================================================================
╒═════════════════════════════ Script Error! ═════════════════════════════╕
│Type : LABEL not found │
│ GOTO/GOSUB LABEL = WHOOPS │
│File : Z:\SCRIPTS\TEST1.SCR │
│Line : goto Whoops │
│Press any key to Edit file │
│ │
╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
In both examples, identifying labels were not found in the
script.
So far, we have seen the automated debugger at work. An error
occurs, and you are immediately notified of it. QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE also features an Interactive Debugging mode, in which you
are in control. To start the interactive debugger, the DEBUG ON
command is used.
Following is an example of interactive debugging:
;
; Script example
;
DEBUG ON ; turn on the debugger
STRING ONE TWO THREE ; define 3 new variables
ASSIGN ONE "1" ; give them numeric values
ASSIGN TWO "2"
ASSIGN THREE "3"
DISPLAYLN " ONE = $ONE, TWO = $TWO, and THREE = $THREE"
EXIT
When the script is executed, the status line will change to:
DEBUG << >>
In interactive debug mode, the next script line to be executed is
displayed between the << >> characters. To execute the statement,
press the Spacebar. In the example, the first line following the
DEBUG command is blank, and no text appears between the << >>.
Pressing the Spacebar yields the following series of DEBUG status
displays:
DEBUG <<STRING ONE TWO THREE >>
DEBUG <<ASSIGN ONE "1" >>
DEBUG <<ASSIGN TWO "2" >>
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 189
=================================================================
DEBUG <<ASSIGN THREE "3" >>
DEBUG <<DISPLAYLN " ONE = $ONE, TWO = $TWO, and THREE = $THREE"
>>
A number of useful debug commands are available while
single-stepping through a script. Pressing the F1 key displays a
summary of these commands on the status line:
[SPACE] Next [T] Trace [G] Go [S] Subst. Line [O] Orig. Line [U] Under
After the command summary line has been displayed for
approximately 2 seconds, the status line reverts back to the
standard DEBUG display.
Interactive Debug commands include:
[SPACE] Next
Pressing the Spacebar executes the line displayed between the
<< >> characters.
[T] Trace
Pressing "T" starts executing the script at the rate of 2 lines
per second (Animate Mode).
[G] Go
Pressing "G" terminates interactive debug mode and resumes script
executing with the next line. The script will execute until it
ends normally, an error occurs, or another DEBUG ON command is
found.
[S] Subst. Line
Pressing "S" displays (substitutes) the values of all variables
in the current script line prior to execution.
[O] Orig. Line
Pressing "O" terminates variable substitution and re-displays
current line in its Original form.
[U] Under
Pressing "U" temporarily suspends display of the Debug status
line when running the script in full-screen mode and the normal
status line itself is disabled (Alt-N/V/T/T OFF).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 190
=================================================================
Going back to our script example, pressing "S" yields the
following display:
DEBUG <<DISPLAYLN " ONE = 1, TWO = 2, and THREE = 3" >>
pressing [Spacebar] again...
DEBUG <<EXIT >>
pressing [Spacebar] again...
Returns us to the normal status line following the end of the
script.
Special Characters in Scripts
In scripts, the caret (^) is used as a modifier when combined
with certain other characters:
^~ A caret-tilde (~) combination generates a 1/2 second delay.
^^ A double-caret sequence yields a single-caret character.
To insert control characters in your scripts, prefix the letter
with the ^ (caret).
Following is a list of valid control characters and the
corresponding caret combinations:
Dec Hex Ctrl Dec Hex Ctrl
0 00 ^@ 16 10 ^P
1 01 ^A 17 11 ^Q
2 02 ^B 18 12 ^R
3 03 ^C 19 13 ^S
4 04 ^D 20 14 ^T
5 05 ^E 21 15 ^U
6 06 ^F 22 16 ^V
7 07 ^G 23 17 ^W
8 08 ^H 24 18 ^X
9 09 ^I 25 19 ^Y
10 0A ^J 26 1A ^Z
11 0B ^K 27 1B ^[
12 0C ^L 28 1C ^\
13 0D ^M 29 1D ^]
14 0E ^N 31 1F ^_
15 0F ^O
Control characters are case-insensitive: ^C is the same as a ^c.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 191
=================================================================
To generate the double-caret ^^ character in the internal editor,
first type ^P, then type ^^. The editor will display a "^" in the
same colors as the header line rather then normal text colors.
This is normal and is used to represent an imbedded Ctrl
character.
Comments may be added to scripts, and must be preceded by a
semi-colon (;):
; A semicolon as the first character is always a comment
WAITFOR "Enter your password :" ; This is a comment
SEND "$Password^M" ; another comment line
PASSWORD1: ; a comment after a label
Comments are not displayed during script execution.
Make it a habit to add comments to your scripts wherever and
whenever possible. Comments are an invaluable help when debugging
or making changes to scripts, especially older, long-forgotten
ones.
Definitions and Parameters
Script statements usually consist of an operation code and one or
more operands or parameters. Parameters shown in brackets [] are
optional. Parameters in quotes (" " or ' ') are mandatory.
For example:
DIAL "1"
DIAL 'TMUstang'
Single- and double-quote characters should not be mixed except in
special cases. For example, to send the following message:
John said, "QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is the BEST!"
you would code the following:
SEND 'John said, "QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is the BEST!"'
Single- and double-quote characters are interchangeable, but must
be used in matched pairs. As shown above, use of one set of quote
characters allows you to include the other as part of a text
string. To send the following string:
John's password is QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 192
=================================================================
the script code would be:
SEND "John's password is QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE"
Labels
Labels define the targets of EXIST, GOTO, GOSUB, IF and WHEN
commands. All labels must end with a colon. Below are some
examples of valid script labels:
EXIT_LABEL:
A:
A_LONG_LABEL:
A_much_longer_label_than_the_others:
Labels must appear on a line by themselves. Comments are the only
other statements allowed on label lines.
Pre-defined String Variables
The variables $0 through $9 are pre-defined and may be used
anywhere in place of user-defined string variable. In addition,
variables $0-$9 must be used if data is to be passed to the
script in the form of parameters in the Alt-F command or F-key
macros.
String variables may not exceed 64 characters in length. The
variables $0-$9 can be set with the ASSIGN, GET, GETR, GETN,
GETNR and GETX commands. For example, the statement:
ASSIGN 0 "This is a test"
store the text string:
This is a test
into variable $0.
Since string variables are replaced with their actual values
before script commands are executed, the leading $ is omitted
when one of the pre-defined string variables is the first operand
in an ASSIGN statement. The following examples further illustrate
this principle:
ASSIGN; 0 "QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is the Best!" ; $0 becomes the
quoted string ASSIGN 1 $0; $1 is set to $0
And the statement:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 193
=================================================================
SEND "$1" ;the string $1 is sent
would send the following string to the modem:
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE is the Best!
Script commands can actually be stored into string Variables with
an ASSIGN command, and used later in the script. For example:
ASSIGN 0 "WAITFOR " ; $0 = WAITFOR[space]
$0 "Password "
would be interpreted as:
WAITFOR "Password "
If a dollar sign ($) is required as part of a text string, that
character must be duplicated. For example:
SEND "This is a dollar sign : $$"
will send the following:
This is a dollar sign : $
String variables are very powerful tools indeed! With their
flexible text and command substitution features, what can be done
with them is only limited by your own imagination.
The next section of the manual describes QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's
script commands in detail. Commands are listed in alphabetical
order, and appropriate coding examples are included for each
command.
System Variables
Most of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE's environment and operating
parameters are stored in pre-defined, read-only variables which
are available during script execution.
Pre-defined variables may not be the target of ASSIGN, GET or
INKEY commands.
$DATE The $DATE variable contains the current system date,
based on the internal clock. The date is returned as
defined in Alt-N/O/C/D Date Mask.
$TIME The $TIME variable is similar to the $DATE variable.
The time is returned in the format as defined in the
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 194
=================================================================
Alt-N/O/C/T Time Mask.
$LAST_ROW The $LAST_ROW variable contains the number of the last
line on the screen, not including the Status Line. For
example, on an 80x25 screen, this variable contains the
value 24.
$LAST_COL The $LAST_COL variable contains the physical screen
width, in columns. On a 25x80 screen, this variable
contains the value 80.
$ATTR The $ATTR variable contains the screen's current Color
Attribute. In a script which changes the screen color,
this value may be saved at the beginning of the script,
and restored before the script terminates to
re-establish the normal default screen color.
$DLPATH This contains the Download Path as specified in the
Alt-N/D/D Setup variable. You could use this to point
to the download directory when using the DOWNLOAD
script command.
$ULPATH This contains the Upload Path as specified in the
Alt-N/D/U Setup variable. It could be used in
combination with the UPLOAD script command.
$SCPATH This is the Script Directory Path as specified by the
Alt-N/D/S Setup variable. All temporary scripts should
be stored in this directory.
Connect Information Variables
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE stores information relating to the last
successful connection (or the current one, if ONLINE) in a series
of variables. For information to be valid, the connection must
have been established through a standard DIAL command or a linked
script.
$BOARD The $BOARD variable contains the name field of the
directory entry to which QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE was last
successfully connected. This is a variable-length
string which does not exceed 34 characters.
If you use the default QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Phone
Directory, the commands:
DIAL "1" ;dial the first phone book
entry
NOTE Connected to $BOARD! ;display a connect msg
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 195
=================================================================
will display:
Connected to Mustang Software HQ!!
$NUMBER The $NUMBER variable contains the phone number of the
last connected entry, as shown in the dialing
directory.
Using the same example:
NOTE Connected to $BOARD at $NUMBER.
will display:
Connected to Mustang Software HQ! at 1-805-873-2400.
$PASSWORD The $PASSWORD variable contains the password field for
the last connected entry, as stored in the dialing
directory. $PASSWORD can be used in a generic logon
(linked) script for BBSs running the same software. The
following example will operate with WILDCAT! systems:
NOTE Connected to $BOARD ;display after connection
WAITFOR "First name" ;wait for the name prompt
SEND "FIRST;LAST^M" ;send your name
WAITFOR "Password" ;wait for password prompt
SEND "$PASSWORD^M" ;send the linked password
$SCRIPT The $SCRIPT variable contains the name of the linked
script for the connected entry, as stored in the
dialing directory. Using the above example, we could
add another line as follows:
NOTE This is script $SCRIPT
which would display:
This is script MSI.SCR
$PROTOCOL The $PROTOCOL variable contains the default file
transfer protocol assigned to the connected entry. It
is used in SEND strings or script DOWNLOAD commands, as
illustrated in the following example, which sends a
file download request to a WILDCAT! BBS at the
start-of-transfer prompt, and starts the actual
download:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 196
=================================================================
SEND "D $PROTOCOL FILENAME.ARC^M"
WAITFOR "[ctrl-X] to abort"
DOWNLOAD $PROTOCOL FILENAME.ARC
$SPEED The $SPEED variable contains the current serial rate
(i.e.., 300, 1200, 2400, 9600 etc...). The serial baud
rate is set by the by the redialer before each number
is dialed. If you are connected at 2400, the following
command:
NOTE Connected at $SPEED this time
will display:
Connected at 2400 this time
The baud rate may not be reset, depending on the state
of the "Lock DTE Baud Rate" toggle in the Alt-N/M/T
Setup menu.
$COM The $COM variable contains the remainder of the
communication parameters, in the form of
Databits-Parity-Stopbits. If your current settings are
No parity, 8 data bits, and one stop bit, and your
serial rate is 2400, the command:
NOTE Connected at $SPEED-$COM
will display:
Connected at 2400-8-N-1
$NOTEFILE This is the full DOS filename for the Attached Note
file. Each entry has a unique Note file that can store
information. Using this variable in combination with
the text IO Script commands (OPENFILE, READFILE,
CLOSEFILE), you can store remote computer specific
information and load it every time you call that
system.
Example Script SHOWNOTE.SCR:
EXIST $NOTEFILE CONT ;see if it exists
DISPLAYLN "No attached notes" ;nope, say so
RETURN ;exit back to logon
script
CONT:
DISPLAYLN "Contents of attached Note file:"
DISPLAYLN "-------------------------------"
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 197
=================================================================
OPENFILE $NOTEFILE READ ;open the note file
READLOOP:
READFILE 0 ;read
IF "$0" = "_EOF_" DONE ;if end-of-file, jump to
DONE
DISPLAYLN "$0" ;display the line
GOTO READLOOP ;go back and read some more
DONE:
CLOSEFILE ;close the note file
RETURN ;return back to the logon
script
This script simply opens the attached Note file and
displays the contents. To activate it, just use the
SCRIPT command to call this as a subroutine:
;
; QuickLearn Script generated at 02:35:18 on 08-22-88
; May require editing before use.
;
NOTE Attached Note File is : $NOTEFILE ;if you're
curious
SCRIPT SHOWNOTE.SCR ;now show it
;rest of the auto-logon script
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 198
=================================================================
Script Commands
General Coding Information
Script commands usually consist of an Operation Code, often
referred to as OpCode, and one or more Operands, also referred to
as arguments, targets, or parameters. Opcode and operands are
separated with spaces. In certain cases, a relational operator
may separate parameters. For example, the script IF command has
two operands separated by a relational operator:
IF "$0" = "$1" ROUTINE
IF is the OpCode, "$0", "$1" and ROUTINE are the operands, and =
is the relational operator. In the example, the command compares
the contents of variables 0 and 1, and branches to ROUTINE if
they are equal.
Operands fall in one of the following categories:
EXPNUM: explicit numeric values. As with numeric variables,
these values must be integers in the range 0-32,767.
For example, in the command:
WINDOW 1 1 25 80
1 1 25 and 80 are explicit numeric values.
KEYWORD: keywords are reserved words defined internally in the
script language. For example, all modem system
variables and TURNON/TURNOFF parameters are keywords
which may not be used as variable names for any other
purpose.
LABEL: labels identify the beginning of a routine in a script.
They are normal words followed by a colon. They are
used as parameters in explicit GOTO and GOSUB
statements, or implicitly in IF, WAITFOR and WHEN
statements:
IF "$0" = "$1" ROUTINE .
.
.
ROUTINE:
.
.
if variable 0 is equal to variable 1, branch to the
label called ROUTINE.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 199
=================================================================
GOTO MYPARTY
.
.
MYPARTY:
.
.
branches unconditionally to the label MYPARTY.
NUMVAR: numeric variable. All numeric values and variables used
in scripts must be positive integers, and their value
may not exceed 32,767. Numeric variables are not
defined explicitly; the same variable may be used for
the storage of text or numeric data. It is the user's
responsibility to insure that the variable contains
numeric data when required.
STRING: a string is an element of text delimited by quotes.
Strings may contain imbedded blanks. In the example:
ASSIGN 0 "This is text"
"This is text" is a string.
WORD: a self-delimiting alphanumeric value not bound by
quotes, and not containing imbedded blanks. A word can
also be defined as a string without blanks and without
quotes. In the example:
ASSIGN 0 THISISAWORD
THISISAWORD is a word variable. The command:
ASSIGN 0 "THISISAWORD"
is functionally identical to the previous one.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 200
=================================================================
Script Command Reference
Following is a complete description of all available script commands.
Each command is documented in an easy-to-understand format:
Script Command
Function A brief description of the command.
Declaration A brief description of the command's syntax.
Remarks A more detailed description of the command, including
parameters and their values, and how the command
interacts with the rest of the script and the system in
general.
Restrictions Limitations, or warnings that apply to the command or
its parameters. If the command has no restrictions,
this section will be omitted.
See also Related script commands.
Example Limited Coding example. For in-depth script examples,
refer to the Utilities Disk.
ATWRITE
Function Display a text string anywhere on the screen.
Declaration ATWRITE COL ROW ATTRIBUTE STRING
Remarks COL, ROW and ATTRIBUTE are explicit numeric values or
variables. ROW and COL must be valid screen coordinates
and are not restricted to the values set by the WINDOW
and BOX commands. ATTRIBUTE must be in the range 0-255.
The COLOR command gives a complete description of Color
Attributes and how to compute them.
See also COLOR
Example ATWRITE 1,1,15,"This is a test" ;put the msg in
;the upper left corner in high
;intensity white on a black
;background
ATWRITE 1 24 30 "$0" ;write the text in
;variable $0 on the last
;line using yellow
;on a blue background
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 201
=================================================================
ASSIGN
Function Store a value into a variable.
Declaration ASSIGN VARIABLE WORD|STRING
Remarks This command stores the contents of a word or string
VARIABLE. The $ variable prefix is not used in order to
prevent value substitution during script parsing. If
the string contains embedded quote characters, use the
other quote character (IE., single ' and double "
quotes) to enclose the string.
See also STRING
Example ASSIGN 0 TEST ;sets $0 to "TEST"
ASSIGN 0 "Test string" ;sets $0 to "Test string"
ASSIGN 0 $1 ;sets $0 to equal $1
ASSIGN THIS "John's Wife is Kathy"
ASSIGN THAT "$THIS" ;needs quotes because of
;spaces and quote embedded
;in $THIS
BEEP
Function Produce a sound through the speaker.
Declaration BEEP TONE
Remarks TONE is an explicit numeric value or variable and
specifies the frequency in Hertz (cycles/sec). The
sound lasts approximately 1/5 sec. Multiple BEEP
commands may be grouped together to produce more
meaningful sounds (IE., alarms). If TONE is
non-numeric, an error occurs.
Example BEEP 1200 ;a 1200 Hz tone
BEEP 1400 ;a 1400 Hz tone
STRING TONE ;define a new variable called TONE
GET TONE 4 ;prompt for the value of TONE
;no check is made for invalid data
BEEP $TONE ;beep at $tone Hz
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 202
=================================================================
BOX
Function Draw a Box on the screen and set the logical screen
dimensions.
Declaration BOX C1 R1 C2 R2
Remarks This command is used to define an on-screen logical
window. The window is defined by its upper left corner
at row R1, column C1, and its bottom right corner at
row R2, column C2. Row and column values must be
explicit numeric values or variables, separated by
spaces or commas.
After a BOX or WINDOW command, the output of screen
display commands (except ATWRITE) is restricted to the
area defined in the BOX command.
Coordinates values are not verified; you must insure
that C2>C1, R2>R1, and all four values are valid screen
locations.
The upper left corner of the screen is at coordinates
1,1.
See also WINDOW;, GETSCR, PUTSCR
Example BOX 1,1,80,24 ;opens a window the full size of
the screen.
BOX 20,4,60,8 ;opens a window 40 cols wide by 4
;lines high.
BOX 20 4 60 8 ;same as above without comma
;delimited.
If you have an EGA or VGA display, the lower right
corner may vary with the screen dimensions (See Alt-2
or Alt-4).
BREAK
Function Send the UART BREAK signal.
Declaration BREAK
Remarks The BREAK command sends the UART Break signal for 1.5
seconds (or the timer value defined by Alt-N/D/B).
BREAK is the script equivalent of the Ctrl-End command.
Example BREAK ;Send the break signal
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 203
=================================================================
CAPTURE
Function Open a File to capture all terminal I/O.
Declaration CAPTURE FILENAME
Remarks The filename should be a fully qualified, valid DOS
filename. FILENAME must be a word or string variable. If the
drive and path are omitted, the current drive:\path is
assumed. If the file exists, data will be added to the
end of it (appended). If the file does not exist, it
will be created.
To close the capture file, use the TURNOFF CAPTURE
command.
CAPTURE is the script equivalent of the Ctrl-Home
command.
See also TURNOFF
Example CAPTURE C:\QMODEM\TEXT\CAPDATA.DAT
CAPTURE THISFILE.DAT ;in the current directory
TURNOFF CAPTURE
CHDIR
Function Change to a new Drive:\Directory.
Declaration CHDIR DIRECTORY
Remarks This command is used to change the default DOS
directory to that specified in the DIRECTORY variable.
DIRECTORY must be a word or string variable. If a new
drive specification is included in the DIRECTORY
variable, the current drive will also be changed.
CHDIR is the equivalent of the Alt-O command (and of
the Alt-L command if the drive is changed).
See also DRIVE
Example CHDIR \ ;change to the root directory
CHDIR C:\QMODEM ;change to C:\QMODEM
DISPLAY "Enter the new directory ? " ;a prompt
GET NEWDIR 64 ;get the new directory
CHDIR $NEWDIR ;and do the change
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 204
=================================================================
CLOSEFILE
Function Closes the currently open TEXT file.
Declaration CLOSEFILE
Remarks The CLOSEFILE command closes the file opened by the
OPENFILE command. For a complete explanation, see the
OPENFILE command.
See also OPENFILE, READFILE, WRITEFILE
Example OPENFILE TEXT.DOC READ ;open text.doc for reading
READFILE 0 ;read the first line into $0
CLOSEFILE ;close the file
CLRSCR
Function Clear the logical screen.
Declaration CLRSCR
Remarks CLRSCR clears the current active window. If a WINDOW or
BOX command has not been issued, the entire screen is
cleared. CLRSCR is the script equivalent of the Alt-C
command.
See also BOX, WINDOW
Example CLRSCR ;clear the screen
BOX 1 1 80 14 ;open a window on the screen
CLRSCR ;clear the window
WINDOW 1 1 80 24 ;define the "full screen"
CLRSCR ;clear the whole screen
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 205
=================================================================
COLOR
Function Defines the color of displayed text.
Declaration COLOR ATTRIBUTE
Remarks This command sets both foreground and background colors
with a single attribute. ATTRIBUTE is an explicit
numeric value or variable. The following values are
needed to compute the color attribute:
0 Black 8 Dark Gray +128 Blink
1 Blue 9 Light Blue
2 Green 10 Light Green
3 Cyan 11 Light Cyan
4 Red 12 Light Red
5 Magenta 13 Light Magenta
6 Brown 14 Yellow
7 Light Gray 15 White
Foreground colors may be 0 thru 15; background colors
may be 0 thru 7. To compute the correct attribute, use
the following formula:
ATTRIBUTE = Foreground + (16 * Background)
For a blinking foreground, add 128 to the attribute. To
help you, we have included a Script called COLORS.SCR
on Utilities Disk. Run this script to view all
available combinations and values.
See also ATWRITE
Example COLOR 30 ;Yellow on Blue
COLOR 2 ;Green on Black
COLOR 207 ;Blinking White on Red
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 206
=================================================================
COLORBG
Function Changes just the background color of displayed text.
Declaration COLORBG ATTRIBUTE
Remarks This command sets the background color with a single
attribute. ATTRIBUTE is an explicit numeric value or
variable. The following are valid ATTRIBUTE values:
0 Black
1 Blue
2 Green
3 Cyan
4 Red
5 Magenta
6 Brown
7 Light Gray
See also ATWRITE, COLOR, COLORFG
Example COLORBG 1 ;Changes the background to Blue
COLORFG
Function Changes just the foreground color of displayed text.
Declaration COLORFG ATTRIBUTE
Remarks This command sets the foreground color with a single
attribute. ATTRIBUTE is an explicit numeric value
variable. The following values are valid color
attributes:
0 Black 8 Dark Gray
1 Blue 9 Light Blue
2 Green 10 Light Green
3 Cyan 11 Light Cyan
4 Red 12 Light Red
5 Magenta 13 Light Magenta
6 Brown 14 Yellow
7 Light Gray 15 White
For a blinking foreground, add 16 to the attribute.
See also ATWRITE, COLOR, COLORBG
Example COLORFG 7 ;change the foreground to white
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 207
=================================================================
DEBUG
Function Enable or disable the Internal Script Debugger.
Declaration DEBUG ON|OFF
Remarks The DEBUG command is useful in developing complex
scripts since you can trace script execution on-screen
and in real-time mode. DEBUG is OFF by default when a
script starts.
Example DEBUG ON ;Turn it on
- - - execute script commands - - -
DEBUG OFF ;Turn it back off
DECR
Function Decrement the value stored in a variable.
Declaration DECR VARIABLE
Remarks DECR decrements the value of a numeric variable by 1.
If the variable is non-numeric or not greater than
zero, an error will occur.
See also INCR, STRING, ASSIGN
Example ASSIGN 0 10 ;load $0 with 10
LOOP: ;a place to loop to
DISPLAY "$0" ;display the value
DECR 0 ;decrement $0 by 1
IF "$0" = "0" DONE ;if it is equal to 0
;goto DONE
GOTO LOOP ;Branch back to LOOP
DONE: ;Exit point
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 208
=================================================================
DELAY
Function Pause a script for a certain amount of time.
Declaration DELAY DELAYVALUE
Remarks DELAYVALUE is an explicit value or numeric variable
containing the duration of the delay in milliseconds
(1000 = 1 second). This is similar to the PAUSE
command, but no characters are displayed during a
DELAY. You might want to use this command when building
menus or displaying online help.
See also PAUSE
Example DELAY 1000 ;stops for 1 second
DELAY 10000 ;stops for 10 seconds
DELAY 100 ;stops for 1 tenth of a second
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 209
=================================================================
DIAL
Function Used to tag and dial one or more entries.
Declaration DIAL DIALSTRING
Remarks The DIAL command is used to call one or more entries
stored in the phone directory. DIALSTRING is a string
or string variable in the same format as the Tag
Multiple entry in the Alt-D directory display. Please
refer to the Tag Multiple command under Alt-D for
additional information.
Example DIAL "1" ;dial entry number 1.
DIAL "TMustang" ;dial all numbers that match
;the text "MUSTANG".
DIAL "PA1B PA2" ;dial 1 & 2 with Prefix
;modifiers.
Restrictions If a script is linked to the entry being dialed, it
will not be executed. All commands to be executed must
be defined in the script file which contains the DIAL
command.
Example SEND "ATDT 1 319 266-0540^M" ;dial the number
WAITFOR "CONNECT" ;wait for connect
- - - ;more commands
DIAL keeps dialing the same entry until a connection is
established. To dial a number once without re-tries,
use the SEND command with the appropriate modem dialing
string.
If you sort the phone book and make explicit reference
to entry numbers, be sure to reflect the changes in
your script's DIAL commands. To dial an entry
regardless of its number, use the Text Match tagging
method.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 210
=================================================================
DISPLAY
Function Display a line of text on the screen.
Declaration DISPLAY TEXT
Remarks The TEXTSTRING string or string variable is displayed
at the current cursor position and in the current
color. Following the DISPLAY, the cursor is located
after the last character in TEXTSTRING. The text is not
sent to the serial port. The cursor position is set by
default following a DISPLAY, DISPLAYLN, NOTE or ATWRITE
statement, or by the user with a GOTOXY statement. The
color is the screen's default, or is set by the user
with a COLOR statement.
See also ATWRITE, COLOR, DISPLAYLN, GOTOXY, NOTE
Example GETSCR ;save the screen
BOX 1 1 20 9 ;draw a box
COLOR 11 ;set color to Light Cyan
GOTOXY 6 2 ;go to col 6, row 2
DISPLAY "TEST MENU" ;show heading
COLOR 10 ;set Light Green color
GOTOXY 3 4
DISPLAY "A) Option one"
GOTOXY 3 5
DISPLAY "B) Option two"
GOTOXY 3 6
DISPLAY "C) Option three"
GOTOXY 3 7
DISPLAY "D) Option four"
GOTOXY 3 7
DISPLAY "Option # ? "
COLOR 15 ;set color to White
GET 0 1 ;read character into $0
PUTSCR ;restore the screen
DISPLAY is similar to the basic statement PRINT "Text";
(note the semicolon) which does not automatically
re-position the cursor to the next line and allows
concatenation of displayed strings on the screen.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 211
=================================================================
DISPLAYLN
Function Display a line of text on the screen.
Declaration DISPLAYLN TEXT
Remarks The text defined by TEXT is displayed at the current
cursor position and in the current color. Following the
display, the cursor is located on the first column of
the next line in the logical screen. The text is not
sent to the serial port. Original cursor location and
color is described under the DISPLAY command.
See also DISPLAY, ATWRITE
Example GETSCR ;save the screen
COLOR 11 ;set color to Light Cyan
DISPLAYLN "TEST MENU" ;show heading
COLOR 10 ;set Light Green color
DISPLAYLN "A) Option one"
DISPLAYLN "B) Option two"
DISPLAYLN "C) Option three"
DISPLAYLN "D) Option four"
DISPLAY "Option # ? "
COLOR 15 ;set color to White
GET 0 1 ;read character into $0
PUTSCR ;restore the screen
DISPLAYLN is similar to the basic PRINT "Text"
statement (note lack of a trailing semicolon) which
relocates the cursor to beginning of the next line
after printing.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 212
=================================================================
DOS
BIGDOS
Function Execute a DOS command.
Declaration DOS COMMAND
BIGDOS COMMAND
Remarks DOS is the script equivalent of the Alt-R command; it
invokes the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE DOS Shell, and it is
subjected to the same limitations. Please refer to the
Alt-R command for additional information on the DOS
Shell. COMMAND must be a word, string, or string
variable.
The DOS command disables the Optimum Shell
(Alt-N/O/R/O) for the duration of the command. The
BIGDOS leaves this enabled if so set in the Setup. Each
has an advantage.
DOS is faster if you do not have sufficient EMS memory
because it will swap a large file to disk. BIGDOS makes
almost 220 more K available during the Shell. If you
have lots of EMS, then you most certainly will want to
use BIGDOS.
Example DOS "Copy text.doc PRN" ;copy a doc file to
;the printer.
BIGDOS "123" ;run Lotus 123 with lots of
;free memory.
DOS "type text.doc|more" ;even pipes and
;redirection work!
BIGDOS "COMMAND" ;will invoke the command prompt
;until EXIT is entered, just
;like Alt-R
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 213
=================================================================
DOWNLOAD
Function Receive a file.
Declaration DOWNLOAD PROTOCOL FILENAME [ASCII options]
Remarks DOWNLOAD is the script equivalent of the PgDn command.
PROTOCOL must be one of the internal or external file
transfer protocols defined to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
FILENAME must be fully qualified (include the drive and
path) or it will be saved in the current directory. In
the case of Batch transfer protocols (Y, G and Z), the
FILENAME is actually a PATH and must be specified.
Status information is shown in a window while the
transfer takes place.
Internal Protocols:
A ASCII X Xmodem
C Xmodem CRC R Relaxed Xmodem
O Xmodem-1K F Xmodem-1K/G
Y Ymodem Batch G Ymodem/G Batch
Z Zmodem Batch
ASCII downloads can have optional parameters to aid in
conversion from one system to another. They can be
specified in any order and are not case sensitive. The
parameters are:
XLATE=[ON|OFF] Sets translate table usage.
CR=[NONE|STRIP|ADDLF] Sets CR handling options.
LF=[NONE|STRIP|ADDCR] Sets LF handling options.
See also UPLOAD
Example DOWNLOAD Y C:\QMODEM\ ;Batch Ymodem download
CHDIR C:\QMODEM ;change directory
DOWNLOAD C QM42SST.ZIP ;put in current directory
DOWNLOAD A Filename XLATE=on CR=addlf LF=strip
This will filter the incoming data through the Input
Translate Table, add one LF after each CR, and strip
all LF's as it saves to FILENAME.
When using the ASCII protocol, QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
must receive a ^Z (EOF) character or the download will
never terminate.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 214
=================================================================
DRIVE
Function Change the default drive.
Declaration DRIVE LETTER
Remarks DRIVE changes the default logged drive, but does not
switch directories as does the CHDIR command. LETTER is
any valid drive letter in your system (A-Z), including
those defined with the DOS SUBST command.
DRIVE is the equivalent of the Alt-L command.
See also CHDIR
Example DRIVE A ; switch to the A: floppy drive
DRIVE C ; switch to the C: drive
DRIVE Z ; switch to the Z: drive
EGA
Function Change screen size on systems equipped with EGA or VGA
display adapters.
Declaration EGA 25|43|50
Remarks EGA changes the number of screen lines to the new value
specified in the command (43 and 50 are interchangeable
to remain compatible with previous releases of QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE). If 43 or 50 is specified, EGA systems
will switch to an 80x43 screen size, while VGA cards
will switch to 80x50.
EGA is the equivalent of the Alt-2 and Alt-4 commands.
Restrictions This command is ignored if no EGA or VGA is present.
Example EGA 43 ;switch to 80x43 (EGA) or 80x50 (VGA).
EGA 25 ;switch to 80x25 for both EGA and VGA.
The screen will be cleared after each EGA command.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 215
=================================================================
EXIST
Function Conditional branch depending on the presence of a file.
Declaration EXIST FILENAME LABEL
Remarks If FILENAME is found, the script will jump to the
location in LABEL. If a wildcard filename is passed, at
least one match will set the $SUCCESS flag and a jump
to LABEL occurs. If there are no matches, the $FAIL
flag is set and script execution will continue with the
next sequential statement.
Example EXIST C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT YES ;if there is an
autoexec.bat in the
;C:\ root directory, jump
;to label YES:
- - - ;do other script commands
;if it does not exist.
YES: ;label
ASSIGN 0 C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT ;assign $0 the filename
EXIST $0 YES ;same as above
EXIT
Function Terminates the script and returns to terminal mode.
Declaration EXIT
Remarks The script is unconditionally stopped, and control
returns to QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
See also RETURN
Example EXIT ;stop the scripts
NOTE text ;does NOT execute because of EXIT
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 216
=================================================================
FKEY
Function Execute an F-Key macro.
Declaration FKEY KEYNO
Remarks FKEY executes the command stored in the current
function key file. The function key and shift state are
defined by the explicit numeric value or variable
KEYNO, based on the following table:
1 - 12 Normal F1 - F12
13 - 24 Shift F1 - F12
25 - 36 Ctrl F1 - F12
37 - 48 Alt F1 - F12
See also LOADKEY
Example FKEY 27 ;send the string stored in Ctrl-F3.
FKEY 1 ;send the string in F1.
FKEY will execute commands stored in function keys 11
and 12, even if your keyboard has only 10 function keys
rather than 12. Refer to the Alt-J command for
information on storing commands into function keys.
FLUSH
Function Clear the Keyboard buffer, COM port buffer, or both.
Declaration FLUSH KBD|COM|ALL
Remarks FLUSH clears data pending in the keyboard buffer (KBD
option), the COM port buffer (COM option), or both
(ALL). Any pending input data stored in the buffers is
lost.
Example DISPLAY "What is your name? " ;ask for a name
FLUSH COM ;clear the com port
GET 1 20 ;read it into $1
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 217
=================================================================
GET
Function Read data from the keyboard and store it into a
variable.
Declaration GET KBDATA COUNT
Remarks Input: KBD
Output: Screen and COM port
The GET command only accepts data from the local
keyboard. The data is echoed to the screen AND to the
COM port.
KBDATA is any valid string variable; its name is not
preceded with the "$" identifier. COUNT is an explicit
numeric value or variable which defines the maximum
number of characters in the input string. ENTER
terminates the GET command.
See also GETR, GETN, GETNR, GETX, INKEY
Example DISPLAY "Enter number ?" ;prompt for number.
GET 0 2 ;read 2 chars max.
DISPLAYLN "You entered $0" ;show it again.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 218
=================================================================
GETR
Function Read from both the local keyboard and COM port and
store it in a variable.
Declaration GETR KBCOMDATA COUNT
Remarks Input: KBD and COM port
Output: Screen and COM port
GETR is a superset of the GET command which also
accepts data from the COM port. Data is displayed on
the screen and echoed back to the COM port.
Parameters and coding syntax are identical to the GET
command.
If online checking is enabled with the TURNON ONLINE
command, GETR will check the modem for an ONLINE
condition. If the connection is lost (IE., carrier
drop), the variable will contain the string
"_OFFLINE_", regardless of the value in COUNT.
See also GET, GETN, GETNR, GETX, INKEY
Example WRITE "Enter number ?" ;ask for number over COM
port
GETR 0 2 ;read 2 chars max
WRITELN "You entered $0" ;show again on both screens
TURNON ONLINE ;online checking active
WRITE "Enter a number ? " ;prompt for a number
GETR num 5 ;read the number
- - - - - -
- - - Carrier drops - - - ;the caller hung up...
- - - - - -
IF '$num' = '100' Label_100 ;if num=100,
; goto Label_100.
IF '$num' = '_OFFLINE_' Cycle ;if caller hung up,
; goto Cycle.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 219
=================================================================
GETN
Function Read from the local keyboard and store it in a
variable.
Declaration GETN KBDATA COUNT
Remarks Input: KBD
Output: Screen
The GETN command accepts data from the local keyboard.
The characters are displayed on the local screen only.
GETN is syntactically identical to GET.
See also GET, GETR, GETNR, GETX, INKEY
Example DISPLAY "Enter number ?" ;ask for number
GETN 0 2 ;read 2 chars max
DISPLAYLN "You entered $0" ;show again on local screen
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 220
=================================================================
GETNR
Function Read from both the local keyboard and COM port and
store it in a variable.
Declaration GETNR KBCOMDATA COUNT
Remarks Input: KBD and COM port
Output: Screen
GETNR reads data from the local keyboard and from the
COM port. The characters are displayed on the local
screen only.
GETNR is syntactically identical to GETR, and the GETR
online dependency and restrictions also apply to GETNR.
See also GET, GETN, GETNR, GETX, INKEY
Example WRITE "Enter number ?" ;ask for number
GETNR 0 2 ;read 2 chars max
WRITELN "Caller entered $0" ;show again on local
;screen
TURNON ONLINE ;online checking active
WRITE "Enter a number ? " ;prompt for a number
GETNR num 5 ;read the number
- - - - - -
- - - Carrier drops - - - ;the caller hung up...
- - - - - -
IF '$num' = '100' Label_100 ;if num=100,
; goto Label_100.
IF '$num' = '_OFFLINE_' Cycle ;if caller hung up,
; goto Cycle.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 221
=================================================================
GETSCR
Function Save a copy of the current screen in memory.
Declaration GETSCR
Remarks GETSCR saves a snapshot of the current screen for later
re-display with the PUTSCR command.
Restrictions GETSCR may be nested up to three levels deep. A
"nesting level" is defined as a corresponding pair of
GETSCR/PUTSCR commands. Beyond the third nesting level,
an error condition occurs.
See also PUTSCR, CLRSCR
Example GETSCR ;save screen level 1
- - - ;process
GETSCR ;save screen level 2
- - - ;process
CLRSCR ;clear the screen
- - - ;do more script commands
PUTSCR ;restore screen level 2
- - - ;process
PUTSCR ;restore screen level 1
The above example demonstrate 2-deep GETSCR/PUTSCR nesting.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 222
=================================================================
GETX
Function Read data from both the local keyboard and the COM port
and storing it in a variable.
Declaration GETX KBCOMDATA COUNT CHARACTER
Remarks Input: KBD and COM port
Output: Screen
GETX captures incoming keyboard and COM data and stores
it into the KBCOMDATA variable. CHARACTER terminates
the input in addition to ENTER.
Unlike other GET commands which require a carriage
return <CR> to indicate the end of the input, GETX his
will terminate when one of the following conditions is
met:
CHARACTER is found in the input data,
COUNT characters have been received, or
ENTER has been received.
If online checking is enabled with the TURNON ONLINE
command, GETX will check the modem for an ONLINE
condition. If the connection is lost (IE., carrier
drop), the variable will contain the string
"_OFFLINE_", regardless of the value in COUNT.
See also GET, GETR, GETN, GETNR, INKEY
Example Let's assume that you are logging into an information
service. After logon, the service sends you a message
that tells how many new messages there are to read. You
want to capture just the number for later use in the
script. The message is in the following form:
;"NEW MESSAGES (xxx)" where xxx is the number.
WAITFOR "MESSAGES (" ;look for beginning of number
GETX 0 4 ) ;grab up to 4 characters or
;until the ")" character.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 223
=================================================================
GOSUB
Function Call a subroutine at a specified LABEL.
Declaration GOSUB LABEL
Remarks GOSUB passes control to a routine identified by its
LABEL. Upon completion, the routine must use a RETURN
command, at which time script execution resumes with
the statement immediately following the GOSUB.
GOSUB/RETURN may be nested up to a maximum of 20
levels.
Restrictions SCRIPT commands and GOSUB/RETURN share a single nesting
process. Together, they may not exceed 20 nesting
levels in any combination.
See also GOTO, RETURN, EXIT
Example GOSUB SUB1 ;call the SUB1 subroutine
EXIT ;end the script
SUB1: ;the subroutine SUB1
- - - ;script commands
RETURN ;end of subroutine
;will branch back to the EXIT statement
GOTO
Function Unconditional branch to a LABEL in the script.
Declaration GOTO LABEL
Remarks GOTO passes control to the routine identified by LABEL.
Control cannot be returned by the routine which was the
target of the GOTO.
See also GOSUB, RETURN, EXIT
Example GOTO SUB1 ;jump to SUB1
BACKHERE: ;
EXIT ;end the script
SUB1: ;the subroutine SUB1
- - - ;script commands
GOTO BACKHERE ;end of subroutine. go back up
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 224
=================================================================
GOTOXY
Function Locate the cursor at a known screen position.
Declaration GOTOXY COL ROW
Remarks COL and ROW are explicit numeric values or variables
and must contain valid logical screen coordinates. If
coordinates are invalid, the cursor will not be
re-positioned.
See also BOX, WINDOW
Example GOTOXY 1 1 ;homes the cursor
GOTOXY 80 24 ;puts cursor in lower right corner
WINDOW 1 1 80 14 ;set a new window dimension
GOTOXY 40 20 ;FAILS, not inside the window
GRAPHICS
Function Change Terminal Emulation mode.
Declaration GRAPHICS EMULATION
Remarks GRAPHICS changes the terminal protocol to the EMULATION
variable. It is the script equivalent of the Alt-G
command. EMULATION must be one of the following:
TTY No Emulation
ANSI Internal ANSI driver
VT100 DEC VT100 terminal
VTI925 Televideo 925 terminal
DEBUG_A Debug ASCII mode
DEBUG_H Debug HEX mode
AVATAR Avatar Emulation
Example GRAPHICS TTY ;switch to TTY mode
GRAPHICS VT100 ;switch to VT100 mode.
The screen will clear when executing this command.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 225
=================================================================
HANGUP
Function Return the modem on Hook (Terminate the current online
session).
Declaration HANGUP
Remarks HANGUP is the script equivalent of the Alt-H command.
The modem hangup command is sent and the connection, if
any, is terminated.
Example WAITFOR "COMMAND" ;wait for the command prompt
SEND "G^M" ;send the [G]oodbye command
HANGUP ;disconnect
HOST
Function Start the built-in Host Mode from a Script.
Declaration HOST SINGLE (type 1)
HOST REPEAT (type 2)
Remarks HOST is the script equivalent of the Alt-5 command.
Depending on the parameter, the Host will cycle after
the caller, or continue until the host is stopped
manually or through the Host Shutdown command.
Example of LOOP: ;Top of loop
(type 1) ;----- ;Script commands to get ready for Host
HOST SINGLE ;Start host for ONE CALLER ONLY!
;----- ;Caller hung up, so script continues here
;----- ;decide if you want to take more callers...
Goto LOOP ;yes, so cycle around and start the
Host.
Example of HOST REPEAT ;Start host for CONTINUOUS OPERATION!
(type 2) ;----- ;Script continues here if you pressed ESC
;or call in and execute the SHUTDOWN
;Host Command.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 226
=================================================================
IF
Function Conditional branch based on the result of a test.
Declaration IF STRING1 OPCODE STRING2 LABEL (type 1)
IF CONDITION LABEL (type 2)
Remarks Type 1:
If the result of the test defined by OPCODE is true,
the script will branch to the routine called LABEL.
Valid OPCODEs are:
OPCODE Test Performed
= If string1 equals string2, goto label
< If string1 less than string2, goto label
> If string1 greater than string2, goto label
<= If string1 less than or equal to string2, goto
label
>= If string1 greater than or equal string2, goto
label
<> If string1 not equal to string2, goto label
If STRING1 and STRING2 contain numeric values, a
numeric comparison is performed. If either is
non-numeric, the two strings are compared based on
their ASCII character values.
Type 2:
IF checks for a specific condition and branch to LABEL
if true. Valid conditions are:
$ONLINE ;if Online, goto label
$OFFLINE ;if Offline, goto label
$SUCCESS ;if last operation was successful, goto
;label
$FAIL ;if last operation failed, goto label
$ONLINE and $OFFLINE reflect the status of the carrier
detect (CD) signal. The ONLINE/OFFLINE indicator is
also displayed on the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE status
line.
The $SUCCESS and $FAIL indicators are set by the
following commands:
UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD, CHDIR, DRIVE and HANGUP.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 227
=================================================================
The state of $SUCCESS or $FAIL must be set by one of
these commands before the indicators can be checked.
Once set, the state remains the same until it is
changed again by the completion of another eligible
command. Referring to either variable before it is set
yields unpredictable results.
Example of IF '$0' = 'YES' Yes_Label ;if $0 = YES, goto
(type 1) ; Yes_Label
IF "$0" = "" Nul_Label ;if $0 is empty, goto
; Nul_Label
Example IF $ONLINE Skip_Dial ;go around dial if ONLINE
(type 2) DIAL "1" ;dial if offline.
Skip_Dial: ;continue...
S1: ;a label
DOWNLOAD X TEST.DOC ;download a file
IF $FAIL S1 ;if failed, go try again
INCR
Function Increment a numeric variable.
Declaration INCR NUMVAR
Remarks INCR adds 1 to the value of a numeric variable. If the
value before the INCR command was 32767, the variable
will be set to zero.
Restrictions If NUMVAR contains non-numeric data, a script error
will occur.
See also DECR
Example ASSIGN 0 0 ;load $0 with 0
LOOP:
DISPLAY "$0" ;show it.
INCR 0 ;now increment it.
IF '$0' >= '10' DONE ;loop until done
GOTO LOOP
DONE:
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 228
=================================================================
INKEY
Function Reads a single character from the keyboard or COM port.
Declaration INKEY INDATA
Remarks INKEY reads a single character from the COM port or
keyboard (whichever is received first) and stores it
into the INDATA variable. Any keystroke or COM data is
valid and ENTER does not have to be pressed for the
script to continue. This command is useful to select
menu options, for example.
See also GET, GETR, GETN, GETNR
Example DISPLAYLN "MENU"
DISPLAYLN " "
DISPLAYLN " A) Call The Mustang Software HQ! BBS"
DISPLAYLN " B) Call GEnie"
DISPLAYLN " C) Call it a day"
DISPLAYLN " "
DISPLAY " ?"
TOP:
INKEY 0 ;Store result in $0
IF "$0" < "A" TOP ;Try again
IF "$0" > "C" TOP ;if not a valid choice
;Now $0 is either A, B or C.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 229
=================================================================
LOADFON
Function Load a new Phone Book into memory.
Declaration LOADFON FONFILE
Remarks LOADFON loads a new QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE phone book.
It is the script equivalent of the Alt-D/L command.
FONFILE should be a word, string, or variable
containing a fully qualified DOS filename with the .FON
extension. If the drive and path are omitted, the
current directory is searched. Refer to the Alt-D
command for additional information on QMODEM 4.6 TEST
DRIVE phone directories.
Restrictions The FILENAME must end with the .FON extension or an
error will occur.
See also DIAL
Example LOADFON C:\QMODEM\PCP.FON ;load a new FON file
LOADFON C:\QMODEM\QMODEM.FON ;reload the original
LOADKEY
Function Load a new Alt-J Macro KEY file.
Declaration LOADKEY KEYFILE
Remarks LOADKEY loads a new Function Key Macro definition file,
making 48 new F-Key macros available to the script.
KEYFILE should be a word, string, or string variable
containing a fully qualified DOS filename with the .KEY
extension. If the drive and path are omitted, the
current directory is searched.
Restrictions the FILENAME must end in a .KEY extension or an error
occurs.
See also FKEY
Example FKEY 1 ;send out the current F1 macro
LOADKEY NEW.KEY ;load a new KEY file
FKEY 1 ;send out a different F1 macro
LOADKEY C:\QMODEM\1.KEY ;load still another KEY file
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 230
=================================================================
LOG
Function Open a LOG file to track QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
activity.
Declaration LOG LOGFILE
Remarks LOG opens a QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Log file to which
activity is recorded. LOG is the script equivalent of
the Alt-0 command.
Please refer to the Alt-0 documentation for further
information on the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE Log file
feature.
LOGFILE is a word, string, or string variable
containing any valid DOS filename. If the file exists,
data will be added to it. If the file does not exist,
the script will create it.
To disable the Logging feature in a script, use the
TURNOFF LOG command.
See also STAMP, TURNOFF
Example LOG PHONELOG.DAT ;start logging to file Phonelog.Dat
- - - ;more scripts commands, some of
;which will be logged
TURNOFF LOG ;close the log file
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 231
=================================================================
NOTE
Function Display a message on the screen and log it in the
Capture file if open.
Declaration NOTE TEXT
Remarks NOTE displays the TEXT string on the screen. If Session
Capture is active, TEXT is also recorded in the capture
file. If the cursor is not in column 1, then a CR/LF
precedes the TEXT to be displayed, forcing the cursor
to the first position of the next line.
Unlike other text display commands, the TEXT string is
NOT bound by quotes. The string starts immediately
after the first space following the NOTE command and
ends with the last character on the line (or the
semicolon which starts a comment field).
See also CAPTURE, DISPLAY, DISPLAYLN
Example NOTE This is a test of the note command ;comment1
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 232
=================================================================
OPENFILE
Function Open a sequential TEXT file for input or output.
Declaration OPENFILE FILENAME READ|REWRITE|APPEND
Remarks OPENFILE opens a standard ASCII text file for input or
output. FILENAME must be a valid DOS filename. Only one
file may be open at a time.
Parameters:
READ
Opens the file for INPUT with the READFILE command.
REWRITE
Opens the file for OUTPUT with the WRITEFILE command.
If the file exists, its contents are erased and its
length is reset to zero. If the file does not exist, it
is created.
APPEND
Opens the file for OUTPUT and positions the file
pointer to the end of the file. All data written will
be added sequentially at the end of the file.
Restrictions Only one file can be open at a time.
See also CLOSEFILE, READFILE, WRITEFILE
Example CLRSCR
NOTE Testing FILE I/O
NOTE Clearing the file
OPENFILE testfile rewrite ;open the file
ASSIGN 1 0 ;set $1 = "0"
NOTE Writing to the file
T:
WRITEFILE $1 ;write $1 to the file
IF "$1" = "100" cl ;is $1 = 100? jump to CL:
DISPLAY "$1 " ;display the counter
INCR 1 ;increment $1
GOTO t ;loop and write again
CL:
CLOSEFILE ;close the file
OPENFILE testfile read ;re-open for Reading
NOTE Reading from the file
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 233
=================================================================
READING:
READFILE 0 ;read first line into $0
DISPLAY "$0, " ;show it
IF "$0" = "_EOF_" done ;Is it EOF? goto DONE
GOTO READING ;loop and read another
DONE:
CLOSEFILE ;close the file and
EXIT ;exit
PAUSE
Function Pause a script for a specified amount of time.
Declaration PAUSE PAUSEVAL
Remarks PAUSE is similar to DELAY, but normal screen and
keyboard I/O are not suspended. PAUSEVAL is an explicit
numeric value or variable containing the length of the
delay in milliseconds (1000 = 1 second). This command
is useful when building menus or displaying online
help.
Restrictions PAUSEVAL must be in the range 1-32767.
See also DELAY
Example PAUSE 100 ;stops for 1 tenth of a second
PAUSE 1000 ;stops for 1 second
PAUSE 10000 ;stops for 10 seconds
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 234
=================================================================
POP
Function Remove the top entry from the stack and store it in a
variable.
Declaration POP VARIABLE
Remarks POP is used to retrieve a value which was PUSHed onto
the "stack". The stack is an area of memory which can
store up to 60 values (IE, text, number, etc...).
The stack operates in LIFO mode (Last-In, First-Out).
Thus, a POP command retrieves the item which was last
PUSHed onto the stack. Retrieving a value other than
the top one requires multiple POP commands.
POPping an empty stack returns a NULL string (zero
length).
PUSHing a full stack yields a script error.
See also PUSH
Example POP 0 ;POP stack into $0. $0 will be NULL
;because of no previous PUSH
ASSIGN 0 0 ;set $0 to zero
TOP: ;set a label TOP
INCR 0 ;increment $0
NOTE This is $$0 [$0] ;display the value of $0
PUSH $0 ;PUSH it on the stack
IF "$0" = "10" POPSTACK ;test for value of 10
GOTO TOP ;loop back
POPSTACK: ;10 numbers on stack now
POP 1 ;POP the stack into $1
NOTE This is $$1 [$1] ;display the value of $1
IF "$1" <> "" POPSTACK ;If not NULL, get another
NOTE Done. ;now we're done
EXIT
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 235
=================================================================
PORT
Function Switch to a different COM port.
Declaration PORT PORTNUM
Remarks PORT switches the active COM port. PORTNUM is an
explicit numeric value or variable in the range 1-8. If
the port selected is valid, the current port is closed,
DTR is dropped, the new port is opened with the same
COM parameters as the old port and DTR is raised.
PORT is the script equivalent of the Alt-K command.
This command can be used to detect the active COM port
(the port to which the modem is connected).
Restrictions Valid COM ports must be defined in Setup (Alt-N/M/P).
Example ;
; This assumes a Hayes or compatible modem
;
TIMEOUT 2 TRY2 ;
PORT 1 ; select COM1 first
SEND "AT^M" ; send the ATtention command
WAITFOR "OK" ; look for the response
GOTO ON-LINE! ; if successful, jump!
TRY2: ; next label
TIMEOUT 2 ERROR
PORT 2 ; select COM2
SEND "AT^M" ; send the ATtention command
WAITFOR "OK" ; look for the response
GOTO ON-LINE! ; if successful, jump!
ERROR: ; modem not found
NOTE No Modem
EXIT
ON-LINE!: ; we found the modem so let's
; do something!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 236
=================================================================
PUSH
Function Place an item on the top of the stack.
Declaration PUSH TEXT
Remarks PUSH stores an INTEGER, WORD, STRING or VARIABLE onto
the top of the stack. TEXT can be retrieved later with
the POP command. Please refer to the POP command for
additional details, restrictions, and code example.
See also POP
Example See the POP command.
PUTSCR
Function Restores a screen previously saved with GETSCR.
Declaration PUTSCR
Remarks PUTSCR works in conjunction with the GETSCR command, in
a manner very similar to the PUSH and POP command pair.
PUTSCR restores the screen which was saved by the
GETSCR command at the same nesting level. The entire
physical screen is restored, as opposed to the logical
screen defined with a BOX or WINDOW command.
Restrictions Results are unpredictable if a previous GETSCR has not
been executed prior to the PUTSCR command.
GETSCR/PUTSCR may be nested up to three levels.
See also GETSCR
Example GETSCR ;save the current screen
CLRSCR ;clear the screen
- - - ;do more script commands
PUTSCR ;restore the previously saved screen
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 237
=================================================================
READFILE
Function Read a record from a text file.
Declaration READFILE INDATA
Remarks READFILE command reads one line of text from the file
opened with the OPENFILE command and stores it into the
INDATA variable. See the OPENFILE command for an
explanation and example.
Restrictions The Text file must have been opened with the READ
option or a script error occurs.
See also CLOSEFILE, OPENFILE, WRITEFILE
RETURN
Function Return from a GOSUB or SCRIPT command.
Declaration RETURN
Remarks RETURN returns control to the statement which
immediately follows the GOSUB or SCRIPT command through
which the routine received control.
If there was no previous GOSUB or SCRIPT, RETURN
behaves like an EXIT command. To unconditionally
terminate a script, always use the EXIT command.
See also GOSUB, SCRIPT
Example GOSUB SUB1 ;call the SUB1 subroutine
EXIT ;end the script
SUB1: ;the subroutine SUB1
- - - ;script commands
RETURN ;end of subroutine
;will branch back to the EXIT statement
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 238
=================================================================
SCRIPT
Function Call another script as a subroutine.
Declaration SCRIPT SCRFILE
Remarks SCRIPT passes control to the script identified in
SCRFILE and operates identically to the GOSUB command.
If the script being called includes a RETURN command,
execution of the calling script will resume with the
statement following the SCRIPT command. SCRFILE should
be the name of a script file stored in the directory
specified in Setup (Alt-N/D/S).
Restrictions Up to 40 levels of SCRIPT and GOSUB commands may be
nested.
See also GOSUB, RETURN
Example ; .....Script ONE.SCR..... ;a comment line
NOTE Executing Script ONE.SCR ;display a note
SCRIPT TWO.SCR ;call another script
NOTE Back in ONE.SCR ;display a note
SCRIPT THREE.SCR ;call another script
NOTE Back in ONE.SCR ;display a note
EXIT ;halt execution
; .....Script TWO.SCR..... ;comment line
NOTE Executing Script TWO.SCR
SCRIPT THREE.SCR ;call another script.
NOTE Back in TWO.SCR
RETURN ;return to previous script
; .....Script THREE.SCR..... ;comment line
NOTE Executing Script THREE.SCR
RETURN ;return to previous script
The output of these three scripts (provided ONE.SCR was
executed first) will be:
Executing Script ONE.SCR
Executing Script TWO.SCR
Executing Script THREE.SCR
Back in TWO.SCR
Back in ONE.SCR
Executing Script THREE.SCR
Back in ONE.SCR
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 239
=================================================================
SEND
Function Send data to the COM port.
Declaration SEND STRING
Remarks The text specified by STRING is sent to the COM port
and displayed on the local screen. The cursor will be
positioned after the last character in STRING.
Example SEND "^M" ;send a carriage return (ENTER)
SEND "^~^~ ^~ ^~ ^M" ;pause one second followed by
;3 spaces at .5 second each and
;then ENTER
ASSIGN 0 "^~^~ ^~ ^~ ^M" ;put the above string in $0
SEND $0 ;send it
SEND "$Password^M" ;send Password stored in the
;dialing directory only after a
;valid connect.
SETCOMM
Function Change the current COM port settings.
Declaration SETCOMM PARAMETER [PARAMETER..]
Remarks SETCOMM is the script equivalent of the Alt-P command.
At least one parameter is required; parameters may be
specified in any order.
Valid parameters are:
110 110 baud EVEN Even parity
300 300 baud ODD Odd parity
1200 1200 baud NONE No parity
2400 2400 baud MARK Mark parity
4800 4800 baud SPACE Space parity
9600 9600 baud 7 7 data bits
19200 19200 baud 8 8 data bits
38400 38400 baud 1 1 stop bit
57600 57600 baud 2 2 stop bits
115200 115200 baud
Example SETCOMM 9600 ;change only the baud rate to 9600
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 240
=================================================================
STAMP
Function Write a string to the LOG file.
Declaration STAMP TEXT
Remarks STAMP is similar to NOTE, but the TEXT string is not
displayed on the screen. TEXT is stored into the LOG
file (if open). Any text following the STAMP keyword is
"logged".
See also NOTE
Example NAME_LABEL:
WRITELN " [-------26-chars-max-------]"
WRITE "Enter your name ? "
GETR NAME 26
IF "$NAME" = "" NAME_LABEL ;check for null
IF "$NAME" = "_OFFLINE_" CYCLE ;check offline
STAMP ****************************
STAMP User [$NAME] Logged On
could add the following two lines to the LOG file:
10:37:33 04/10/87 STAMP ****************************
10:37:33 04/10/87 STAMP User [Sysop] Logged On
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 241
=================================================================
STRING
Function Define one or more variable(s)
Declaration STRING VARIABLE [VARIABLE...]
Remarks Up to 60 variables can be defined with the STRING
command. New variables are referenced by prefixing them
with "$" (except where noted).
Restrictions Variables are stored in the order in which they were
defined. All user-defined variable names must start
with a letter.
If two or more variable names share the same beginning
characters, define the longest name first. Otherwise,
only the shortest name will be recognized.
For example, let's define three new variables called
$A, $AA and $AAA. To be able to reference all three,
they must be defined as follows:
STRING AAA, AA, A
See also ASSIGN
Example STRING THIS THAT OTHER ;create three variables
ASSIGN THIS "NEW TEST" ;put "NEW TEST" in $THIS
NOTE [$THIS] [$THAT] [$OTHER] ;display their values
would display:
[NEW TEST] [] []
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 242
=================================================================
SYSTEM
Function Stop the script and exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Declaration SYSTEM X|Y
Remarks SYSTEM unconditionally halts script execution and exits
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. It is the script equivalent of
the Alt-X command.
See also EXIT, RETURN
Example SYSTEM X ;exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE with DTR left
;High
SYSTEM Y ;exit QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE with DTR
;dropped
TIMEOUT
Function Set a WAITFOR timeout value and optional routine label.
Declaration TIMEOUT TIMEVAL [LABEL]
Remarks TIMEOUT controls the length of time WAITFOR commands
will wait for a text string. TIMEVAL is an explicit
value or numeric variable containing the timeout delay
(in seconds). If LABEL is specified, the script will
branch to that routine when the timeout delay expires.
If LABEL is omitted, the script will terminate with a
timeout error.
See also WAITFOR
Example TIMEOUT 3 AGAIN ;set timer to 3 seconds, label
AGAIN
AGAIN: ;here's the label
SEND "ATZ^M" ;send modem reset command
WAITFOR "OK" ;if OK is not seen in 3 seconds,
;goto the label AGAIN (try again)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 243
=================================================================
TURNOFF
TURNON
Function Change QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE operating parameters.
Declaration TURNOFF KEYWORD [KEYWORD...]
TURNON KEYWORD [KEYWORD...]
Remarks TURNON and TURNOFF are ON/OFF switches for QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE functions or facilities which can affect the
operation of QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, even after the
script has terminated.
Following is the list of valid TURNON/TURNOFF keywords
and the equivalent terminal mode command. The third and
fourth columns indicate whether the keyword can be used
with TURNOFF and TURNON. The fifth column provides a
brief description of the keyword.
Keyword Cmd OFF ON Action
------- ------ --- -- -----------------------------
8_BIT Alt-8 x x 8 bit mode
BS_DEL Alt-1 x x Mode of the Backspace key,
On: BS=DEL Off: BS=^H
CAPTURE ^Home x Off only. Closes Capture file
if open
CASE x x Case sensitivity of WHEN and
WAITFOR
ECHO Alt-E x x Local Echo mode (duplex)
LINEFEED ShftTab x x Controls adding LF's to
incoming CR's
LOG Alt-0 x Off only. Closes the LOG file
if open
MUSIC Alt-M x x ANSI Music mode
NOISE Alt-B x x Beeps & Bells (on or off)
ONLINE x x State of carrier detection for
the GET Script commands
PRINT ^PrtSc x x Local print echo mode
SCROLL Alt-U x x Scroll-back capture mode
SPLIT Alt-S x x Split screen mode on or off
XON/XOFF Alt-Z x x XON/XOFF flow control mode
Example TURNON 8_BIT NOISE XON/XOFF
TURNOFF MUSIC ECHO LINEFEED
CAPTURE C:\QMODEM\CAP.TXT ;turn on the capture file
TURNOFF CAPTURE ;close the capture file
TURNOFF LOG ;nothing happens, not open
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 244
=================================================================
UPLOAD
Function Send a file to the other computer.
Declaration UPLOAD PROTOCOL FILENAME [ASCII OPTION...]
Remarks UPLOAD performs two basic types of file transfers;
ASCII and non-ASCII. FILENAME must be a fully qualified
DOS filename, or the file must be located in the
current directory.
Valid protocols are:
A ASCII X Xmodem
C Xmodem CRC R Relaxed Xmodem
O Xmodem-1K F Xmodem-1K/G
Y Ymodem Batch G Ymodem/G Batch
Z Zmodem Batch
All external protocols (defined with Alt-N/P) are also
valid.
For ASCII uploads, additional parameters may be
specified to override the Setup (Alt-N/P/A/T) defaults.
Following are the valid ASCII upload options:
PACECH=[NONE|character]
Specifies a pacing character which must be received
before the next text line is sent. The first line of
the file is always sent regardless of this setting.
PACESPEED=[nnnn]
The delay, in milliseconds (1000 = 1 second) inserted
between each character sent.
XLATE=[ON/OFF]
Specifies whether the outgoing file is (ON) or is not
(OFF) to be translated with the output translate table
(Alt-A-2) prior to being sent.
CR=[NONE/STRIP/ADDLF]
Defines carriage-return (CR) handling. This is normally
not needed unless the receiving computer does not
recognize the standard CR character (ASCII 13).
LF=[NONE/STRIP/ADDCR]
Defines LineFeed (LF) handling. Similar to CR, but
affects the LF character (ASCII 10).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 245
=================================================================
EXPAND=[ON/OFF]
If ON, adds a leading space to null lines (which
contain only a CR/LF pair) so that there is a leading
SPACE. This is a useful feature when uploading messages
to most BBS systems, which interpret a null line as and
end-of-message indication.
EOLCH=[nnn]
Defines the ASCII value of the End-Of-Line character.
It is very important to set this parameter correctly.
Since most ASCII files end each line with a CR/LF
sequence, the LF character should be defined as the
EOLCH (LF is ASCII 10).
See also DOWNLOAD
Example non- UPLOAD O QMODEM.ARC ;send the file QMODEM.ARC using
ASCII ;Xmodem-1K. The file must be in
;the current directory
UPLOAD X C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT ;upload the autoexec.bat
;file from the C: root
;directory using Xmodem
Example SEND"^M" ;send a carriage return
ASCII WAITFOR "Command" ;look for the command line
SEND"E^M" ;command to enter a message
WAITFOR "To [Enter]=all?"
SEND"Sysop^M" ;to the Sysop
WAITFOR "Subject:?"
SEND"A Private msg^M" ;the msg description
WAITFOR "Security:"
SEND"R^M" ;Receiver only
UPLOAD A TEST.DOC PACECH=: EXPAND=ON EOLCH=10
;upload a text file to a
;PCB BBS and use the colon
;as the pace char
SEND "^M^~^~S^M" ;tell the board to save the
;msg
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 246
=================================================================
WAITFOR
Function Wait for a specific string to be received.
Declaration WAITFOR STRING
Remarks WAITFOR waits for the defined text string to be
received on the COM port. WAITFOR will wait the amount
of time specified in the last TIMEOUT command. If no
TIMEOUT command was issued, a default of 60 seconds is
used.
Each WAITFOR command may have a corresponding TIMEOUT
value for explicit control of timing and error
conditions. If this method is selected, all WAITFOR
commands should have an associated TIMEOUT command.
This will minimize unexpected errors (such as an
incorrect branch).
See also TIMEOUT
Example TIMEOUT 3 AGAIN ;set timer to 3 seconds, label
AGAIN
AGAIN: ;here's the label
SEND "ATZ^M" ;send modem reset command
WAITFOR "OK" ;if OK is not seen in 3 seconds,
;goto the label AGAIN (try again)
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 247
=================================================================
WAITUNTIL
Function Wait for a specified time before continuing.
Declaration WAITUNTIL TIME
Remarks WAITUNTIL suspends script execution until a specific
time of day. TIME must be in the same format as
specified in the Alt-N/O/C/T Time Mask.
While WAITUNTIL is in effect, the target TIME and the
current system time are displayed side by side until
they match, at which time the script resumes execution
with the next command.
If this command seems to fail, double-check the Time
Mask and what you have coded in the script.
See also DELAY, PAUSE
Example WAITUNTIL 04:00:00 ;wait till 4 a.m.
DIAL "1 2 3 4" ;dial the numbers
WAITUNTIL 24:00:00 ;will never reach 24:00:00 with 24
;hr time as the default mask!
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 248
=================================================================
WHEN
Function Allows searching for alternate text strings while
WAITFOR is active.
Declaration WHEN STRING1 STRING2(type 1)
WHEN STRING1 LABEL(type 2)
WHEN (type 3)
Remarks WHEN may only be used while a WAITFOR is active.
WHEN (Type 1) sends STRING2 when STRING1 is received
WHEN (Type 2) branches to LABEL when STRING1 is
received.
WHEN (Type 3) immediately cancels all active WHEN
commands.
WHEN can be used in a logon (linked) script for systems
which change certain prompts depending on when you last
called. WILDCAT!, for example, changes prompts if you
call more than once during the same day.
A maximum of 10 WHEN statements can be active at one
time. WHEN statements remain active until they are
explicitly canceled by a blank WHEN, and are not
subjected to the TIMEOUT restrictions which affect
WAITFOR commands.
See also WAITFOR
Example WHEN
WHEN "What is your first name?" "John Friel PS^M"
WHEN "[S]top?" "^M"
WHEN "Would you like to view the bulletin menu?" "N^M"
WHEN "[R]ead mail, [L]ist now or [C]ontinue?" "C^M"
WAITFOR"Command >> ?"
DELAY100
WHEN
The first WHEN (Type 3) clears any pending WHEN
commands. The following WHEN (Type 1) commands identify
all logon prompts and their respective responses. With
this method, only one WAITFOR is needed; WHEN commands
handle all others prompts.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 249
=================================================================
WINDOW
Function Create a logical screen with user defined dimensions.
Declaration WINDOWC1R1C2R2
Remarks WINDOW creates a logical screen window. Unlike the BOX
command, WINDOW does not cause a frame to be drawn on
the screen. For additional information, please refer to
the BOX command.
Restrictions See the BOX command.
See also BOX, CLRSCR, GETSCR, PUTSCR
Example WINDOW 1 1 80 24 ;window the full size of the screen
WINDOW 20 4 60 8 ;window 40 cols wide by 4 lines high
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 250
=================================================================
WRITE
Function Send text to the COM port without a CR/LF.
Declaration WRITESTRING
Remarks WRITE sends text data to the COM port, but does not add
a CR/LF at the end of the string. This is useful when
sending prompts to insure that the cursor remains on
the same line. The WRITELN command is similar, but adds
a CR/LF at the end of the string.
See also WRITELN, DISPLAY, DISPLAYLN, SEND
Example WRITELN " [------------]"
WRITE "Enter your first name ? "
GETR F_NAME 12
WRITELN " "
WRITELN " [--------------------]"
WRITE "Enter your last name ? "
GETR L_NAME 20
WRITELN " "
WRITELN " [------------]"
WRITE "Enter your password ? "
GETR P_WORD 12
The following will be displayed on the receiving computer:
[------------]
Enter your first name ? JOHN
[--------------------]
Enter your last name? FRIEL III
[------------]
Enter your password ? PASSWORD
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 251
=================================================================
WRITELN
Function Send text out the COM port with a CR/LF.
Declaration WRITELNSTRING
Remarks WRITELN is the CR/LF version of the WRITE command.
See also WRITE, DISPLAY, DISPLAYLN, SEND
Example WRITELN " [------------]"
WRITE "Enter your first name ? "
GETR F_NAME 12
WRITELN " "
WRITELN " [--------------------]"
WRITE "Enter your last name? "
GETR L_NAME 20
WRITELN " "
WRITELN " [------------]"
WRITE "Enter your password ? "
GETR P_WORD 12
The following will be displayed on the receiving
computer:
[------------]
Enter your first name ? JOHN
[--------------------]
Enter your last name? FRIEL III
[------------]
Enter your password ? PASSWORD
WRITEFILE
Function Write a line to a text file.
Declaration WRITEFILE WORD|STRING|VARIABLE
Remarks WRITEFILE writes a word, string, or string variable to
the file opened by the OPENFILE command.
Restrictions OPENFILE with the REWRITE or APPEND option must have
been issued first.
See also CLOSEFILE, OPENFILE, READFILE
Example See the OPENFILE command for an explanation and
example.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 252
=================================================================
Script Error Messages
Error messages, while not a pretty thing to see, are important in
fixing the problems you may run across.
CAPTURE Filename not found
The CAPTURE command expected a WORD parameter and it was either
missing or a STRING was specified.
DOWNLOAD Filename expected
The command was not followed by any text or the following text was not
a WORD.
DRIVE Letter A..Z expected
The DRIVE command did not receive a character between A and Z as a
parameter.
EGA value must be 25, 43 or 50
The value passed to the EGA command was not 24, 43 or 50. Use a
correct value.
ERROR opening FILE
An error occurred in OPENFILE. Check the filename and correct.
ERROR Opening Script File
The script file was found, but could not be opened. Make sure the file
is not locked in a network environment.
ERROR reading from FILE
An error occurred in a READFILE command. Make sure that the file
contains valid data.
ERROR writing to FILE
An error occurred in a WRITEFILE command. Make sure the file is not
locked by a network or multi-tasker, and that you are not running out
of disk space, and try again.
File already open
Two OPENFILE commands were issued without an intervening CLOSEFILE.
Only one file may be opened at a time.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 253
=================================================================
FILE not open
READFILE or WRITEFILE was issued before the file was opened with
OPENFILE. Check the script logic.
FILE not open for READ
READFILE was issued against a file opened for REWRITE or APPEND. The
file must be opened for READ.
FILE not open for WRITE/APPEND
WRITEFILE was issued against a file opened for READ. The file must be
opened for WRITE or APPEND.
FKEY Filename does not exist
The filename specified in the LOADKEY command does not exist.
FLUSH keyword not KBD, COM or ALL
The FLUSH command requires the keyword KBD, COM or ALL. Correct and
re-try.
FON Filename does not exist
The filename specified in the LOADFON command does not exist.
GETSCR Nested too deep
GETSCR/PUTSCR commands can be nested 3-deep. A 4th GETSCR was detected
without a corresponding PUTSCR.
GRAPHICS Keyword not found
GRAPHICS was issued without a parameter or with an invalid one.
Correct and re-try.
Insufficient space for String
STRING memory is exhausted. You have exceeded the memory of your
machine.
INTEGER expected
The command expected an INTEGER value (-32768 to 32767). The variable
or string was null or contained non-integer data.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 254
=================================================================
INTEGER value required for INCR or DECR
The VARIABLE argument in an INCR or DECR command did not contain an
integer value. Check script logic and ASSIGN commands and insure that
numeric data is stored into the variable.
Invalid IF Opcode
The IF command requires one of 6 comparison Opcodes. Make sure the
Opcode is correct and that necessary quotes are used.
Invalid KEYWORD or TOKEN
The first word in the line was not a valid KEYWORD, or the KEYWORD was
passed the wrong type of data.
Invalid LABEL or misplaced Colon
A colon ":" was found at the beginning of a line. This may be an
invalid LABEL or the colon needs to be changed to a semicolon if the
line contains a comment.
INVALID OPENFILE mode
An invalid parameter followed the OPENFILE command. Valid OPENFILE
parameters are READ, REWRITE, or APPEND.
Invalid Substitute VARIABLE
The specified VARIABLE name was not found. Make sure the variable is
defined with a STRING command before using it.
Invalid UPLOAD keyword or keyword option
One of the ASCII UPLOAD keywords was misspelled or contains an invalid
parameter. Correct the keyword(s) and parameters and re-try.
LABEL not found
A LABEL was not found. Check the script for a possible omission or
misspelling and try again.
Line too long
A script line exceeds 254 characters. Edit the Script and make sure
lines are less than 254 characters.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 255
=================================================================
LOADFON Filename not found
LOADFON expected a WORD parameter. The parameter was missing or a
STRING was specified instead.
LOADKEY Filename not found
LOADKEY expected a WORD parameter. The parameter was missing or a
STRING was specified instead.
LOG Filename not found
The LOG command expected a WORD parameter and it was either missing or
a STRING was specified.
Off Screen Coordinates
The Row and/or Column argument(s) of a GOTOXY command was (were)
invalid. Since GOTOXY is limited by BOX/WINDOW boundaries, make sure
you reset any WINDOW or BOX commands before assuming a full 80x25
screen.
ON or OFF parameter expected
The DEBUG command can only be followed by the WORD ON or OFF. Correct
and re-try.
PORT selection invalid
PORT expects a WORD in the range 1 to 8. It was either missing out of
range.
RETURN SCRIPT Filename not found
A Calling script was not found when a RETURN command was issued (IE,
it was deleted or renamed). Execution cannot continue. Check to be
sure you are not deleting/renaming the calling script by accident.
SCRIPT Filename not found
A called SCRIPT file was not found. The script filename parameter was
missing, or the file could not be located.
SCRIPT/GOSUB nested too deep
SCRIPT and/or GOSUB commands were nested more than 40 levels. Some
serious thought needs to be put into the script(s) to reduce the
levels of nesting.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 256
=================================================================
SETCOMM Keyword or Letter expected
An invalid parameter was used in a SETCOMM command.
STRING expected
A command required a STRING, but it was either missing or a WORD was
specified.
STRING length 0
A null string was used. The string must be at least 1 character.
STRING not defined
The string variable used in a command was not defined. Define the
variable with the STRING command and try again.
STRING VARIABLE expected
A string variable command parameter was missing, misspelled, or not
defined.
Substitute Line too long
String variable substitution yielded a line longer than 254
characters. Use additional WRITE/DISPLAY/SEND commands to break up the
line into shorter ones.
SYSTEM parameter not "Y" or "X"
"X" or "Y" are the only valid arguments of the SYSTEM command. Correct
and try again.
Target LABEL cannot be a KEYWORD
A reserved script keyword was used as a label. Correct and try again.
Too many PUSHes
More than 40 values were PUSHed onto the stack without any intervening
POPs.
Too many WHEN's defined
The maximum of 10 WHEN commands were active and an additional WHEN was
issued. Use a blank WHEN command to clear unused WHENs and try again.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 257
=================================================================
TURNOFF Keywords(s) not found
A TURNOFF keyword was missing or invalid.
TURNON Keyword(s) not found
A TURNON keyword was missing or invalid.
UPLOAD Filename does not Exist
The UPLOAD filename did not exist. Verify the filename and try again.
UPLOAD Filename expected
The FILENAME argument of the UPLOAD command was not a WORD or was
missing.
WORD expected
A WORD argument was expected, but it was missing or a STRING was used.
WORD or LABEL expected
A WORD or LABEL argument was expected, but it was missing or a STRING
was used.
WORD or STRING expected
A WORD or string argument was expected, but was not found. This is
usually caused by a missing parameter.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 258
=================================================================
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Question: When I start up QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE, the
Online/Offline indicator in the status line always
says ONLINE? Why?
Answer: The modem is sending a signal back to QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE saying that it is connected to another
computer. On Hayes modems and clones that use the
'&' (ampersand) extended commands, there is
usually a command that controls the CD (carrier
detect) signal. The default mode (unfortunately)
is for the CD to be on all the time.
Check to see if your modem is supported in Quick
Modem Config. If so, then use that to configure
your modem and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE. If it not
listed in there, some of these hints may help...
To make things right, send the following command
to your modem from terminal mode:
AT&C1<cr>
You will have to check your modem manual to verify
this command in case it is not quite 100% Hayes
compatible.
Question: I make changes to the Dialing Directory but they
are not saved.
Answer: Changes made to the dialing directory are saved by
pressing the [F10] key. Please take a look at the
status line on the bottom of your screen, which
clearly indicates that F10 saves changes, while
[ESC] aborts changes.
As changes in operating procedures are made,
explanatory displays are updated to reflect them.
Please look at the screen more closely when you
encounter a problem; the solution may be a few
lines away and will save you a telephone call to
us in the process.
Question: Why does QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE turn on HALF Duplex
after I connect to a BBS? What controls the Duplex
mode?
Answer: There are four factors which affect Half and Full
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 259
=================================================================
Duplex (echo):
1. The modem itself is set to echo. On most
modems, ATE1 will cause commands sent to the
modem to be echoed back to the system while
offline only. ATF0 will set local echo ON
after the connection has been established.
Usually, ECHO OFF is the modem default.
2. Doing ALT-E causes QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
itself to provide local echo.
3. Local QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE echo can be set in
the QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE phone directory.
Alt-D, then O to see the alternate screen. The
last column on the right is the Duplex mode
for that directory entry. Once you connect,
you will get echo if that column contains a
"H". Change it to "F" and press F10 to save
the changed directory entry.
4. The Script commands TURNON ECHO and TURNOFF
ECHO can also play a role in setting the local
echo. This is usually the one everyone
overlooks! Check those Linked Scripts in the
dialing directory to see if these are set
wrong. This is the last place usually to look,
but it will pay to be sure!
Question: My HST modem does not connect with 1200 or 2400
non-MNP modems. Either nothing happens, even
though the connection is made, or I get a VOICE
return from the modem.
Answer: The HST always tries to determine if it is talking
to another HST first, then if it is talking to
another MNP modem. In some cases, this process
takes longer than the other modem's
carrier/training sequence (the high-pitch sound
the modem makes when it first answers your call).
As a result, the HST waits forever and eventually
times out with a NO CARRIER condition.
If you receive a VOICE return code, but the other
modem has in fact answered the call, it is
possible that background noise in the connection
is being interpreted by the HST as voice rather
than data.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 260
=================================================================
If you KNOW that the other modem is non-MNP, you
may use the AT&M0 command which effectively
disables the HST's MNP capabilities and makes it
act exactly like a standard 1200/2400 modem
without MNP. The AT&M0 will eliminate many of the
problems you may be experiencing connecting with
slower non-MNP modems.
To correct the VOICE problem, issue the ATX7
command (the previous setting was ATX6 which turns
on the HST's voice-recognition circuitry). This
will prevent the HST from becoming confused.
However, it will also prevent the HST from
recognizing legitimate voice answers.
Question: When dialing out of the phone book, QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE does not switch baud rates to what was
listed in the directory.
Answer: This is directly related to the first Question
dealing with the Online/Offline indicator. If the
indicator is ONLINE when you go to dial from the
phone book (Alt-D), the baud rate will not be
switched because QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE assumes you
are already online! If you are Offline, then the
baud rate is changed before placing the call.
Question: My Hayes 2400B modem will not hang up reliably.
Answer: The Hayes 2400B and many clones come from the
factory with the DTR signal forced TRUE (always
on) and QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE wants to control the
DTR signal. The most reliable method for hanging
up, it to toggle the DTR signal going to the
modem. On the Hayes 2400 (and 2400B) this is done
by sending the following command:
AT&D2<cr>
Then, go into Setup (Alt-N/M/M/H) and change it to
the following:
DTR
Make sure the letters are capitalized and there
are no additional characters, just DTR. Then make
sure you exit and Save the Configuration
(Alt/N/E/S).
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 261
=================================================================
Now, when you press Alt-H, the modem will hang up!
Question: What's Ymodem/G and 1K-Xmodem/G and why is it
these protocols do not show up in the protocol
window when I do an up/download. What does it
take?
Answer: Ymodem/G and 1K-Xmodem/G are protocols which
assume that all error corrections are performed by
the modem hardware. Many modems are now supporting
the MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol) error
detection/correction protocol, and most high-speed
modems use proprietary error correction techniques
at higher speeds. If you have such a modem, you
should activate CTS/RTS Hardware Flow Control via
Setup (Alt-N/M/T/C = ON). This will enable the
Ymodem/G and 1K-Xmodem/G protocols.
Question: What is an Error-Correcting modem?
Answer: Error-correcting modems perform error correction
and recovery on incoming data by themselves. This
is a feature usually implemented in the modem's
internal firmware (ROM, for example). The accepted
standard for internal modem error correction is
MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol), names after
the company (Microcom) who developed it. MNP is
not a "Fixed" standard, it is available in levels
1 thru 6, with MNP level 3 being the most commonly
available implementation.
For two modems to establish an error-free
connection, they must both support the same MNP
level. Higher levels of MNP, however, are
compatible with lower levels of the standard. Two
modems supporting MNP level 3 and communicating at
2400 (using the Bell 2400 standard) should
establish an error-free connection. Error-free
connections are usually indicated by the modem's
verbal or numeric return code upon connect.
A Multitech MNP-equipped modem may, for example,
return a CONNECT 2400/RELIABLE message, while a
USRobotics HST modem would return a CONNECT
2400/ARQ message upon connect. Although many
high-speed modems (IE, 9600bps and above) from
different manufacturers may support the same level
of MNP, they may use radically different encoding
modulation schemes to yield high data transfer
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 262
=================================================================
rates, which makes them incompatible at high
speeds.
For example, the Hayes, Microcom, and USR 9600
modems all support MNP level 3, but are unable to
communicate with each other at speeds higher than
2400 due to the incompatibility of their
proprietary modulation techniques. Most of these
modems will automatically "fall back" to the lower
speed (IE, 2400) where a reliable error-correcting
connection can be made.
Question: I press ENTER in the dialing directory, but it
does not dial the current entry. It dials another
entry. Why?
Answer: You have explicitly tagged entries in the
directory, probably with the space bar, and you
then moved to another directory location where no
tagged entries show. When you press ENTER, QMODEM
4.6 TEST DRIVE dials tagged entries. If NO entries
are tagged, then it dials the current entry. There
is a tagged entry count displayed at the top of
the Alt-D screen. If it is greater than zero, some
entries are tagged.
Question: I inadvertently sorted my directory. How do I get
back to what it was before?
Answer: Undo the sort by pressing Ctrl-U. If you
inadvertently sorted your directory TWICE, you're
stuck with a sorted directory. If you wish to
experiment with the new directory functions, make
a copy of your QMODEM.FON file before you start
QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE.
Question: I created a logon script with QuickLearn and it
does not work.
Answer: It is likely that you captured time- or
environment-dependent information in the script.
For example, one of the prompts captured by
QuickLearn contains the amount of time left during
your online session.
Edit the script manually to remove that part of
the prompt. QuickLearn is quick and easy, but it
is not intelligent. It records everything that
happens between you and the other computer and
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 263
=================================================================
faithfully replicates it in the script, warts and
all.
This can cause problems if prompts change or if
they contain information that's not likely to be
there -- or that will change -- the next time you
call.
Question: The Host mode seems to "run away" as soon as it's
started!
Answer: This is another common problem people are
experiencing. The cause is always that the modem
is not reporting the true state of the CD (Carrier
Detect) signal coming from the modem.
For the Host to operate correctly, the CD signal
is checked to see when a user is online or has
disconnected. Because the Host can be started when
you are already online, this can be disastrous if
the modem is not set up correctly!
The usual symptom is that the Host takes right
off, answering its own questions with the text it
is displaying (or trying to display). This is
because the modem Echo (ATE1) is the default and
the host thinks someone is really online.
Check your status line before pressing Alt-5. If
it says ONLINE all the time, this is the culprit.
To cure the problem:
If your modem has DIP switches, look in the modem
manual for the one that controls the CD signal and
change it so that the modem reports the true state
of the CD.
If your modem does NOT have DIP switches, it must
have what is called NRAM (Non-Volatile RAM) to
store its configuration. Most modems that have
NRAM use the &C command to control the CD signal.
From terminal mode, issue the following:
AT&C1&W
If your modem comes back and says "OK", you are
all set! The status line should then show OFFLINE.
Once the online/offline problem is solved, 99% of
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 264
=================================================================
your Host mode problems will go away.
Question: When dialing out of the phone book, QMODEM 4.6
TEST DRIVE does not switch baud rates to what was
listed in the directory.
Answer: This is directly related to the Online / Offline
indicator. If the indicator is ONLINE when you go
to dial from the phone book (Alt-D), the baud rate
will not be switched because QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE
assumes you are already online! If you are
Offline, then the baud rate is changed before
placing the call.
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 265
=================================================================
INDEX
.CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
.DMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
.FON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 128, 229
.KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 108, 113, 229
.LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
$ATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
$BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 194, 195
$COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 196
$DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
$DLPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
$FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 226, 227
$LAST_COL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
$LAST_ROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
$NOTEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 196, 197
$NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195
$OFFLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164, 226
$ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 227
$PASSWORD . . . . . . 88, 108, 109, 113, 122, 123, 191, 195, 239
$PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195, 196
$SCPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
$SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 195
$SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 196
$SUCCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 226, 227
$TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
$ULPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
# Rings and Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
@DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-110
@EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-111, 185
@EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 130, 131
@FSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 130, 131
@HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 112
@SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109, 112
@SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 110, 151
@SHELLX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-110
@STAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 112
_OFFLINE_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 220, 222, 240
0xE0 Doorway Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-63
16450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
16550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41, 42
1K-Xmodem/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
8_BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 118, 121, 125, 243
80x25 . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 102, 121, 150, 151, 194, 214, 255
80x43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 121, 151, 214
80x50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 214
8250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Abandon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 266
=================================================================
Abort Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32
Alt-0 . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 59, 62, 112, 121, 152, 230, 243
Alt-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 61, 121, 150, 243
Alt-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 102, 121, 150, 202, 214
Alt-4 . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 102, 121, 150, 151, 202, 214
Alt-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 154, 225, 263
Alt-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 121, 151, 243
Alt-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 121, 152
Alt-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13, 14, 17, 51, 53, 74, 244
Alt-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 61, 67, 76, 119, 243
Alt-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 76, 119, 204
Alt-D . . 13, 17, 61, 63, 68, 71, 76, 78, 85, 110, 113, 117, 119,
122, 123, 131, 153, 167, 185, 209, 229, 259,
260, 262, 264
Alt-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 98, 99, 119, 243, 259
Alt-Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 65, 167
Alt-Equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 167
Alt-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 99, 163, 183-185, 192
Alt-G . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 62, 100, 101, 114, 120, 224
Alt-H . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 61-63, 106, 120, 153, 225, 261
Alt-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 107
Alt-J . 2, 3, 13, 17, 62, 108, 109, 113, 120, 122, 151, 153, 185,
216, 229
Alt-K . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 17, 33, 113, 114, 120, 153, 235
Alt-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 114, 120, 153, 203, 214
Alt-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 17, 61, 114, 120, 243
Alt-Minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 135, 167
Alt-N . 2, 12-14, 17, 21, 23-35, 39-51, 53-73, 77, 81, 86-89, 91,
93, 95, 96, 98, 100, 105, 106, 115, 129-131,
136, 139, 140, 143, 145, 148, 150, 155, 157,
162, 166, 167, 189, 193, 194, 196, 202, 212,
235, 238, 244, 247, 260, 261
Alt-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 115, 120, 153, 203
Alt-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15, 17, 114, 116, 120, 239
Alt-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 85, 116-118, 125, 185
Alt-R . . . . . . . 13, 17, 65, 120, 126, 134, 153, 158, 164, 212
Alt-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 101, 120, 128, 129, 243
Alt-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 58, 129
Alt-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 120, 129, 130, 243
Alt-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 17, 59, 121, 130, 185
Alt-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 13, 17, 43, 115, 131, 132
Alt-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 115, 121, 133, 153, 242
Alt-Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 121, 134, 153
Alt-Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 40, 121, 134, 243
ANSI emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 101, 104, 156
ANSI Music . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 16, 17, 61, 63, 70, 71, 243
Answer Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 46
ASCII . . 2, 40, 47, 48, 50-56, 71, 74, 75, 77, 92, 96, 98, 100,
101, 104, 134, 135-137, 145, 147, 150, 151,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 267
=================================================================
153-156, 165, 185, 213, 224, 226, 232, 244,
245, 254
ASSIGN 42, 43, 59, 151, 179, 188, 189, 192, 193, 199, 201, 207,
215, 227, 232, 234, 239, 241, 254
ATWRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 200, 202, 205, 206, 210, 211
Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63, 185
Auto-Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
auto-logon script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 197
Autoexec Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
AUTOEXEC.BAT . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 10, 14, 130, 131, 215, 245
AVATAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101, 104, 224
Backscroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Backspace . 13, 17, 26, 61, 63, 96, 121, 150, 169, 174, 176, 178,
180, 243
Batch . 2, 13, 17, 42-44, 48-50, 56, 57, 135, 136, 138, 140-147,
151, 153, 154, 162, 164, 185, 213, 244
Baud Rate 15, 17, 28, 31, 39, 41, 49, 69, 82, 88, 114, 120, 146,
147, 164, 196, 239, 260, 264
BBS . 1, 4, 5, 9, 28, 29, 36, 40, 49, 54, 55, 77, 81, 83, 86, 91,
92, 97, 99-102, 107, 118, 122-125, 136, 138,
148, 152, 154, 182, 184, 195, 228, 245, 258
BEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 201
Beeps & Bells . . . . . . . 13, 16, 17, 61, 63, 70, 71, 119, 243
Bios Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Blank Line Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-55
BOX . 7, 24, 75, 76, 183, 200, 202, 204, 210, 224, 236, 249, 255
BREAK . 2, 13, 17, 31, 33, 69, 106, 122, 149, 150, 154, 157, 173,
174, 202, 256
browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 118, 121, 126, 150, 243
BS_DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 118, 121, 126, 243
BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 32, 44, 46, 86, 87
Busy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 46
Calibrate Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65
call-waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45, 154, 155
Capture . . 2, 13, 16, 17, 58, 60, 118, 120, 122, 129, 130, 133,
149, 203, 222, 231, 243, 252
Capture Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 129
Capture File . . . . . . . . 2, 13, 17, 122, 149, 203, 231, 243
caret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191
Carriage Return . 26, 51-53, 55, 71, 102, 103, 150, 222, 239, 245
carrier detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 258, 263
CASE . 14, 15, 19, 26, 38, 49, 51, 72, 81, 85, 94, 99, 106, 110,
115, 131, 132, 143, 150, 155, 162, 164, 169,
173, 178, 183, 187, 190, 213, 243, 258
CGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20, 26, 27
Characters . 2, 15, 25, 28-30, 40, 48, 60, 62, 70, 72-76, 88-90,
104, 106, 108, 109, 112, 115, 117, 129, 131,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 268
=================================================================
132, 137, 141, 144, 150-152, 160, 163, 173,
174, 177, 178, 183, 188-192, 194, 201, 208,
217, 219, 220, 222, 241, 254, 256, 260
CHAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 155, 157, 162
CHDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 203, 213, 214, 226
Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 153
Clear Batch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Clear Tags on FKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 114, 149, 152, 154, 235
CLOSEFILE . . . . . . . . 196, 197, 204, 232, 233, 237, 251, 252
CLRSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 204, 221, 232, 236, 249
Color . 8, 19, 23, 24, 76, 78, 102, 105, 156, 174, 194, 200, 205,
206, 210, 211
Color Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
COLORBG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
COLORFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Command After Baud Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Command Before Baud Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Command line parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COMMAND.COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Communication Parameters 13, 15, 27, 28, 30, 34, 36-39, 99, 114, 196
communication ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 33, 113
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 99, 102, 137, 151
COMSPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CONFIG.SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 102
CONNECT . 30-32, 41, 49, 67-69, 76, 85-87, 96, 99, 124, 148, 184,
194, 209, 239, 258, 259, 261
Connect Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31, 41, 87
connect speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32, 41
Connect Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CONTROL . . 2, 16, 28, 29, 33, 40, 50, 54, 56, 60-62, 64, 87, 88,
101, 102, 104, 105, 121, 134, 136, 137, 140,
169-171, 174, 178, 184, 188, 190, 215, 223,
237, 238, 243, 246, 260, 261, 263
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 6, 7, 97, 107, 124, 126, 148
Crash Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 140
Ctrl-End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 69, 149, 168, 173, 202
Ctrl-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 169, 174
Ctrl-Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 58, 149, 168, 173, 203
Ctrl-PrtSc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
CTS/RTS Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 40, 136
Custom Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-25
Cycle Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29, 86, 87
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 28, 30, 82, 116, 196, 239
Data Terminal Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 106
Date Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 193
DEBUG . . . . . . . 2, 17, 100, 104, 186, 188-190, 207, 224, 255
DEBUG_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 224
DEBUG_H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 224
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 269
=================================================================
DECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 227, 254
Default Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Default Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DEFAULT directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Default Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
Default Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29
DEL . 3, 13, 17, 26, 61, 63, 77, 80-82, 88, 90, 93, 94, 98, 102,
103, 109, 110, 118, 121, 126, 130, 150, 169,
174, 243
Delay . 28-30, 32, 54, 64, 65, 69, 86-88, 93, 106, 109, 118, 119,
126, 190, 208, 233, 242, 244, 247
Delphi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DESQview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 25, 26, 41
Destructive Backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DIAL 2, 29-32, 45, 63, 77-79, 81, 83-91, 94-96, 98, 99, 108-110,
119, 182, 191, 194, 209, 227, 229, 247, 260,
262, 264
Dialing Directory 13, 15, 17, 30, 32, 39, 76-78, 80, 83, 88, 92,
94, 95, 117, 131, 167, 185, 195, 239, 258,
259, 262
dialing queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 78, 86
DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45, 131, 132
Dirs . 21-25, 27, 28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42, 44, 47, 48, 51, 53, 56,
58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 66-70, 73
Disk . 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, 14, 40, 41, 57, 64-66, 127, 129, 131,
135, 142, 144, 145, 149, 156, 164-166, 171,
179, 182, 200, 205, 212, 252
DISPLAY . . 2, 13, 15, 19, 20, 22-24, 26, 40, 72, 75, 77, 80, 82,
83, 95, 99, 100, 102, 105, 108, 109, 115,
117, 123, 135, 140, 148, 150-152, 157,
161-163, 165, 183, 187, 189-191, 194-197,
200, 202, 203, 207, 209-211, 214, 216, 217,
219, 221, 227, 228, 231-234, 238, 241, 250,
251, 256, 263
DISPLAYLN . 163, 164, 183, 186-190, 196, 197, 210, 211, 217, 219,
228, 231, 250, 251
dollar sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 193
Doorway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15, 17, 61-63, 165, 167
DOS . 2, 3, 8-10, 13, 14, 17, 19, 43-45, 50, 60, 64, 65, 71, 96,
100, 109, 110, 120, 121, 126-128, 130, 131,
133, 134, 138, 152, 153, 155, 157-159,
164-167, 179, 196, 203, 212, 214, 229, 230,
232, 244
DOS Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
DOS Shell . . 13, 17, 109, 120, 126-128, 130, 133, 134, 164, 212
DOWNLOAD . 2, 5, 9, 11, 13, 17, 36, 40-45, 47-50, 56, 57, 66-68,
115, 122, 135, 136, 138, 140, 141, 145-147,
153, 155-157, 162, 163, 165, 166, 182,
194-196, 213, 226, 227, 245, 252, 261
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 270
=================================================================
Download BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49
Download Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Download Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Download Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 194
Download tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
DRIVE . 1, 2, 4-27, 29, 32-36, 38-45, 47, 49, 50, 54, 55, 57-61,
63-70, 73, 74, 78-80, 82, 85, 88, 90, 95, 96,
98-103, 106, 107, 109, 110, 112-115, 117-121,
126-129, 131, 133, 134, 136-142, 146, 148,
149-155, 158, 159, 162-164, 166, 167, 171,
176, 182-188, 191, 192-194, 203, 212-215,
226, 229, 230, 242, 243, 252, 258, 259, 260,
262, 264
DSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
DTR . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33, 69, 70, 106, 133, 235, 242, 260
Duplex 16, 17, 76, 82, 96, 98, 99, 102, 117, 119, 243, 258, 259
ECHO . 13, 16, 17, 50, 93, 98, 99, 117-119, 121, 125, 165, 170,
243, 259, 263
EGA 14, 17, 19, 26, 77, 102, 121, 128, 150, 151, 183, 202, 214, 252
Elapsed Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72
Elapsed-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
EMS for Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Emulation . 2, 13, 15, 17, 25, 27, 61-63, 76, 100-102, 104, 114,
120, 129, 147, 148, 156, 224
End of Line Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-55
ENQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-63
environment variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 19, 126
EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ERROR 28, 30, 32, 40, 87, 91, 116, 124, 128, 136, 137, 139, 140,
145, 146, 148, 152, 181, 184, 186-189, 201,
207, 221, 227, 229, 234, 235, 237, 242, 246,
252, 261, 262
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 87, 184, 252
Error-Correcting modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 139, 261
error-correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 139
ESC . . 7, 12-14, 17, 21, 22, 24, 32, 70, 73, 75, 77, 81, 83, 86,
88, 90, 92, 93-96, 98, 100, 108, 109, 111,
113-117, 123, 129, 130, 132, 134, 135, 136,
141-145, 147-149, 169, 170, 178-180, 187, 225
EXIST . . 60, 79, 94, 95, 113, 117, 155, 162, 192, 196, 203, 215,
230, 232, 253, 257
EXIT . 12-14, 17, 21-25, 27, 28, 30, 33, 34, 36-39, 42, 44, 47,
48, 51, 53, 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 66-70,
73, 75, 77, 81-83, 86-88, 90, 92, 93-96, 98,
100, 108, 109, 111, 113-117, 121, 123,
126-130, 132-136, 141-145, 147-149, 157,
163-165, 169, 170, 179, 186, 187, 188, 190,
192, 196, 207, 212, 215, 223, 233-235, 237,
238, 242, 260
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 271
=================================================================
EXPNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
External protocols . . . . . . . . . . 48-50, 136, 140, 165, 244
FDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16, 36, 99
FIFO during Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41
File Allocation Window . . . . . . . . 42, 43, 99, 117, 130, 149
File Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
File Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 50, 69, 138, 182, 244
Filename Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49, 152, 163
Files . . 2, 5, 6, 8-11, 17, 21-25, 27, 28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42-45,
47-49, 51, 53, 56-61, 63, 64, 66-70, 73, 76,
81, 84, 91, 92, 94, 95, 108, 110, 112, 113,
127, 128, 130-132, 135-138, 141, 143-145,
155, 156, 159, 162, 163, 165-167, 176, 184,
185, 245
Find Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81-83, 88, 90, 94, 96, 98
FKey 63, 89, 108, 109, 122, 123, 126, 129, 151, 153, 216, 229, 253
flow control . . . . 2, 16, 40, 62, 121, 134, 136, 137, 243, 261
FLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 253
FON Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63, 64, 89, 119
Full Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 98, 99, 102, 119, 259
gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
GEnie . . . . . . . 5, 81, 82, 89, 90, 96, 99, 148, 149, 151, 228
GET 1, 13, 14, 18, 36, 37, 39, 44, 68, 83, 89, 90, 99, 110, 111,
128, 132, 143, 147, 158, 160, 164, 167, 183,
192, 193, 201, 203, 210, 211, 216-220, 222,
225, 228, 234, 243, 259, 262
GETN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 192, 217-220, 222, 228
GETNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 192, 217-220, 222, 228
GETR . . . 163, 164, 183, 192, 217-220, 222, 228, 240, 250, 251
GETSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 210, 211, 221, 236, 249, 253
GETX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 192, 217-220, 222
GOSUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 192, 198, 223, 237, 238, 255
GOTO . 163, 164, 188, 192, 197-199, 207, 218, 220, 223, 225-227,
232, 233, 234, 235, 242, 246
GOTOXY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 224, 255
GRAPHICS . . . . . . . . 102, 105, 118, 120, 125, 152, 224, 253
Growing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26
Guard Alt-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-63
Half Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 98, 99, 258
HANGUP . . . . . . . 17, 30, 32, 33, 62, 120, 148, 159, 225, 226
Hangup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32, 62, 148, 225
Hardware-handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 139
HDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 99
Help Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
High Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 151
High Speed Xmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41
Home 2, 3, 13, 16-18, 89, 97, 102, 103, 105, 111, 122, 124, 132,
148, 168, 172, 180, 182, 243
HOST 1, 11, 13, 14, 17, 21-25, 27, 28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42, 44-48,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 272
=================================================================
51, 53, 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 66-70, 73,
89, 97, 111, 142, 154-167, 225, 263, 264
IF 1, 2, 4, 5, 7-10, 12-16, 18-20, 22, 24, 26, 27, 30-37, 40-45,
47, 48, 49-52, 54-67, 71-73, 76, 77, 79-83,
85-88, 90-92, 94, 95, 97, 98, 99-101, 106,
110-120, 126-130, 132-136, 138-142, 144-147,
149, 150-152, 155-166, 168, 170-174, 176-186,
192-194, 196-198, 200-204, 207, 209, 212,
214-216, 218, 220, 222, 224-238, 240-243,
245-248, 254, 258-264
Implied tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 80
INCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 227, 232, 234, 254
Init Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Initialization Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31, 46
INKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 193, 217-220, 222, 228
Int16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 167
INTEGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 236, 253, 254
Internal Editor 50, 55, 59, 91-93, 110, 130, 131, 155, 156, 168,
171, 176, 179, 185, 186, 187, 191
IRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 30, 33-35, 64, 65, 113, 164
Jump Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Key Definition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 113
Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-63
KEYWORD . . . . . . . 59, 112, 198, 240, 243, 253, 254, 256, 257
LABEL 92, 164, 187, 188, 191, 192, 198, 199, 215, 218, 220, 223,
226, 227, 234, 235, 240, 242, 246, 248, 254,
256, 257
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 192, 198
LAP-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 23, 25
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 23, 25
LF Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Line Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26
Linefeed . . 16, 25, 26, 51-53, 55, 93, 102, 103, 118, 122, 125,
150, 243, 244
Linked Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 183, 184, 259
LIST . . 1-3, 12, 13, 17, 23, 27, 36-39, 45, 59, 61, 70, 82, 83,
103, 104, 111, 115, 119, 121, 130, 132, 135,
143, 144, 153, 156, 162, 163, 166, 180, 181,
190, 243
LOADFON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 229, 253, 255
LOADKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 216, 229, 253, 255
Lock DTE Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41, 196
Log . . 1, 13, 16, 17, 44, 46, 58-61, 63, 99, 106, 109, 112, 114,
121, 133, 147, 148, 152-154, 156, 157, 182,
184, 230, 231, 240, 243, 255
Log File . . . . 13, 61, 109, 112, 121, 147, 152, 230, 240, 243
LOGOFF.HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Logon Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 182, 184
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 273
=================================================================
Macro . . . . . . . . . 3, 108-113, 122, 129, 151, 184, 216, 229
mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 40, 51, 134
margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 141
Max Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Maximum Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
MCI-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Memory . . 8, 20, 25, 26, 43, 60, 64-70, 77, 109, 115, 126, 127,
130, 133, 149, 212, 221, 229, 234, 253
MENU.HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158
minicomputer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MNP . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-37, 40, 91, 136, 139, 140, 259-262
modem cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Modem Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30, 34-39, 111
Monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25
multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MUSIC . . 3, 13, 16, 17, 61, 63, 70, 71, 93, 114, 115, 118, 120,
125, 243
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 41, 66, 96, 252
NO CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32, 86, 158, 259
NO CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NO DIAL TONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32
NOISE . . . . . . . 33, 76, 93, 106, 118, 119, 125, 137, 243, 259
NOTE . . . 16, 20, 28, 39, 42, 59, 60, 68, 71, 72, 75-77, 81-84,
88-92, 94, 95, 96, 105, 110, 112, 118, 126,
131, 132, 183, 194-197, 210, 211, 215, 231,
232, 234, 235, 238, 240, 241
Note Files . . . . . . . . . 59, 76, 81, 84, 91, 92, 94, 95, 131
Notes Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71
Numeric Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NumLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NUMVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 227
Off-Line Xpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 3
Offline 15, 17, 30, 111, 152, 154, 163, 164, 218, 220, 222, 226,
227, 240, 258-260, 263, 264
OK . . 24, 30, 37, 38, 44, 46, 104, 158, 160, 235, 242, 246, 263
OmniView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
on-hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 165
Online 13, 15, 17, 22, 54, 58, 83, 111, 148, 152, 155, 157, 171,
194, 208, 218, 220, 222, 225-227, 233, 243,
258, 260, 262-264
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 22, 58, 155, 171, 208, 233
OPEN . . 12, 21, 44, 62, 128, 144, 154, 163, 166, 182, 197, 203,
204, 230, 231, 232, 240, 243, 252, 253
OPEN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
OPENFILE . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 197, 204, 232, 237, 251-254
Optimum Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65, 212
Options 21-28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42, 44, 47, 48, 50-53, 55, 56, 58,
60, 61, 63, 64, 66-70, 73, 74, 83, 101, 144,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 274
=================================================================
178, 179, 213, 228, 244
Other Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81, 82, 88, 90, 95, 98
Overlay Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overwrite Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Pacing Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-55, 244
Pacing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-55
Parity . . . . . 15, 28-30, 82, 88, 114, 116, 151, 153, 196, 239
PATH= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 50
PAUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 124-126, 208, 233, 239, 247
PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 89, 106
PCBoard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PgDn . 2, 13, 17, 43, 57, 78, 102, 103, 122, 132, 135, 142, 148,
153, 168, 172, 180, 213
PgUp . 2, 13, 17, 42, 77, 78, 81, 122, 132, 135, 142, 144, 145,
148, 154, 168, 172, 180
Phone Book Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71
POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 36, 234, 236
PORT 2, 8, 12, 13, 17, 25, 27-30, 33-41, 48-50, 62, 69, 77, 81,
82, 89, 90, 91, 113, 114, 116, 120, 123, 133,
139, 147, 153, 164, 183, 210, 211, 216-218,
220, 222, 228, 235, 239, 246, 250, 251, 255
Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30, 33, 34, 36-39
Prefix Dial Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31
Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81, 82, 84, 89-91, 96, 123
PRELOG.HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PRINT . 3, 36, 71, 77, 81, 82, 88, 90, 93, 96-98, 107, 118, 121,
125, 169, 177, 210, 211, 243
Printer . . . . . . . . 13, 15-17, 58, 60, 96, 121, 152, 177, 212
Protocol 40, 47-50, 56, 57, 76, 82, 88, 115, 122, 135-138, 140,
142, 143, 145, 146, 152-154, 156, 162, 163,
195, 196, 213, 224, 244, 261
PROTS.HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 162, 163
PS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 33-35, 65
Public Board eXchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Public Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 140
pulse-dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 236
PUTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 210, 211, 221, 236, 249, 253
QFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
QMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 115, 132
QMHOST.BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 165
QMHOST.HDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 167
QMHOST.MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 167
QMHOST.PWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 155
QMHOST.SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
QMHOSTL.SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
QMHOSTPK.EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 166
QMODEM.CNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 20, 22, 73, 145
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 275
=================================================================
QMODEM.EXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 181
QMODEM.FON . . . . . . . 77, 89, 91, 95, 97, 119, 123, 229, 262
QMODEM.HLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
QMODEM.INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
QMODEM.LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 121, 147, 148
QMODEM.OVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
QuickLearn . . . . 13, 17, 77, 79, 81-83, 85, 88, 90, 93-96, 98,
116-119, 122, 125, 182, 185, 197, 262
RAM disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
RBBS-PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
READFILE . . . . . . . . . 196, 197, 204, 232, 233, 237, 251-253
Receive . 1, 40, 42, 49, 51-54, 122, 134, 135, 164, 213, 252, 259
Receive Zmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Redial Cancel Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Redial Hangup Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 124, 148
Relaxed Xmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 213, 244
RETURN 7, 13, 14, 17, 26, 30-32, 46, 51-53, 55, 71, 76, 81, 87,
102, 103, 110, 111, 115, 126-128, 133, 149,
150, 157, 158, 160, 196, 197, 215, 222, 223,
225, 237-239, 242, 244, 245, 255, 259, 261
RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 33, 44, 46
Ring Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 46
ROM BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
RTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 37, 39, 40, 136, 139, 261
Runtime Parms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64, 66-70
RZ.BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
Save Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 116
Save Partials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
screen colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 76
Screen Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 58, 60, 129
screen memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SCRIPT . . . 1, 3, 11, 13, 14, 17, 43, 76, 77, 79, 81-83, 85-91,
93-100, 108, 109, 112, 116-119, 121-123, 125,
151, 154, 156, 159, 163, 164, 166, 167,
182-198, 200-205, 207-209, 212, 213, 215,
221-230, 233, 234, 235-239, 242, 243, 247,
248, 252-256, 259, 262, 263
Scripts . 2, 11, 42, 43, 59, 88, 93, 99, 100, 108, 115, 117, 120,
122, 131, 132, 134, 155, 164, 182-188, 190,
191, 194, 199, 207, 215, 230, 238, 259
SCROLL . 13, 14, 16, 17, 23-25, 27, 58-60, 66, 77, 81, 93, 115,
118, 120, 125, 129, 130, 132, 148, 149, 168,
172, 180, 243
Scrolling Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 102
Select Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SEND . 13, 15, 17, 33, 38, 40, 42, 49, 54, 61, 62, 93, 106, 113,
117, 119, 122, 125, 126, 135, 139, 140, 143,
144, 167, 183, 191-193, 195, 196, 202, 209,
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 276
=================================================================
216, 225, 229, 235, 239, 242, 244-246, 250,
251, 256, 258
Serial Port . 8, 12, 25, 28-30, 33, 40, 41, 48, 49, 62, 69, 133,
139, 147, 164, 210, 211
Session Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 152, 154
SET . . . 2, 9, 10, 12, 15, 23, 25-29, 32, 33, 35, 36, 39-43, 45,
52-57, 60, 62-65, 69, 76, 81, 88, 91, 93, 98,
99, 101, 102, 105, 113, 116, 118, 121, 125,
126, 129, 147, 162, 165, 167, 169, 173, 175,
181, 191, 192, 196, 200, 202, 210-212, 215,
224, 226, 227, 232, 234, 242, 245, 246, 259, 263
SETCOMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 239, 256
SETUP . 2, 11, 13, 17, 19, 21-25, 27, 28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42, 44,
47, 48, 50, 51, 53, 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64,
66-70, 73, 78, 86, 87, 93, 95, 100, 106, 111,
114-116, 122, 130, 131, 136, 139, 140, 143,
148, 150, 151, 155, 194, 196, 212, 235, 238,
244, 260, 261
Share IRQ's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65
Shell . . 2, 13, 17, 39, 41, 43, 64, 65, 109, 110, 120, 126-128,
130, 133, 134, 151, 155, 164, 166, 212
Shift state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109, 216
Shift-Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 26, 150, 179
Shutdown Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45, 166
SideKick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 168
Snow Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26
Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 46, 60, 67-70, 201
speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 76, 114, 201
Speed . 26, 28-32, 35, 37, 39-41, 48, 49, 53-55, 66, 69, 88, 116,
139, 140, 147, 148, 152, 153, 179, 196, 261, 262
SPLIT . . . . 13, 17, 93, 101, 117, 118, 120, 126, 128, 129, 243
Split-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 117, 128, 129
SPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
STAMP . . . . . . 58, 60, 109, 112, 118, 129, 153, 154, 230, 240
Status Line . . 13-15, 17, 18, 21-26, 40, 65, 70, 71, 78, 82, 83,
86, 99, 101, 108, 117, 132, 134, 135, 144,
147-149, 151, 162, 167, 169-171, 174, 178,
186, 188-190, 194, 226, 258, 263
Status Window . . . . . . . . 69, 99, 117, 128-130, 146, 149-152
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 28-30, 82, 88, 114, 239
STRING 7, 15, 29, 31, 32, 42, 45, 46, 72, 84, 88, 94, 106, 109,
112, 119, 122, 129, 141, 157, 168, 177-179,
183, 188, 191-194, 199, 200, 201, 203, 207,
209, 210, 212, 216-218, 222, 229-231, 234,
236, 239-242, 246, 250-257
Strip/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
SUBST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 214
Suffix Dial Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31
SuperEGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 151
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 277
=================================================================
SuperVGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 151
SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43, 64, 65, 75, 127, 212
Sysops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 125
SYSTEM . 5, 8-10, 13, 14, 17, 19, 22, 25, 26, 41, 44-46, 54, 55,
62, 65, 66, 67, 69, 77, 81, 91, 98, 111, 116,
118, 121, 125, 126, 128, 134, 136, 138, 142,
145, 148, 152, 154-158, 161, 162, 167, 182,
184, 193, 196, 198, 200, 213, 214, 242, 247,
256, 259
System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SZ.BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
Tag Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tag Multiple . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81-83, 85, 90, 94, 98, 209
tagged entries . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78, 80-83, 85, 86, 262
TaskView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Televideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 103, 224
Terminal Emulation 13, 15, 17, 27, 62, 100, 101, 114, 120, 129,
147, 148, 224
Terminal Mode 13-15, 17, 18, 26, 40, 63, 67, 111, 133, 157, 158,
166, 167, 183, 215, 243, 258, 263
Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85, 92, 94
Time Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 194, 247
time-of-day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Time/Date Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60
TIMEOUT . . . . . . 28, 29, 93, 118, 126, 187, 235, 242, 246, 248
Timeout Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29, 242
timer . . . . . . . . . 65, 86, 87, 148, 152, 153, 202, 242, 246
Toggles . 16-18, 22, 23, 25, 27, 39, 40, 47, 48, 56, 60, 61, 63,
64, 66-70, 85, 117, 134, 150, 151, 167, 170, 176
tone-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 91
Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53, 74
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42, 53, 55
TSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 128
TTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101, 104, 120, 125, 129, 224
TURNOFF . . . 93, 118-122, 125, 126, 198, 203, 230, 243, 257, 259
TURNON . . . 93, 118-122, 125, 198, 218, 220, 222, 243, 257, 259
TVI925 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101, 103
UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29, 39, 41, 42, 106, 122, 202
Un-tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Untag All . . . . . . . . . . 63, 77, 81-83, 85, 88-90, 94-96, 98
Up Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103, 129, 168, 172, 180
UP-ARROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 148
Upload . 2, 13, 17, 42, 44, 45, 47-50, 55, 57, 67, 68, 115, 122,
135, 140, 141, 142-145, 147, 148, 152-154,
156, 163, 166, 194, 213, 226, 244, 245, 254, 257
Upload BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Upload Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
Upload Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Upload Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 278
=================================================================
USR Courier HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Variables . . 88, 117, 164, 183, 188, 189, 192-194, 198-200, 202,
224, 241
VEGA VGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 110, 151
Verbose Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 45
VGA . 14, 15, 17, 19, 26, 77, 102, 110, 121, 128, 150, 151, 183,
202, 214
Video . 8, 13, 15, 19, 21-28, 30, 34, 36-39, 42, 44, 47, 48, 51,
53, 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 66-70, 73, 101,
103, 105, 110, 116, 128, 150, 151
Video Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Video-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 151
View . 2, 16, 17, 58, 59, 87, 92, 108, 111, 115, 121, 124, 126,
130, 131, 156, 205, 248
VT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 100-102, 120, 150, 224
WAITFOR . . 93, 117-119, 126, 187, 191, 193, 195, 196, 198, 209,
222, 225, 235, 242, 243, 245, 246, 248
WAITUNTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6
WHEN . . 1, 2, 8-10, 12-18, 20-22, 24-35, 39-42, 44, 46-49, 51,
53-58, 60, 61, 62-66, 68-70, 74-76, 79, 80,
82, 85, 88, 89, 91-93, 95-99, 101, 108-110,
112, 113, 115-118, 128-130, 133-136, 138-140,
143, 144, 145, 147, 149-152, 157, 158,
161-163, 166, 167, 169-171, 175, 176-185,
187-192, 194, 198, 199, 207, 208, 213, 222,
224, 233, 242, 243, 245, 248, 250, 255, 256, 258-264
Wildcat . . . . . . . . . 83, 92, 96, 99, 123-125, 148, 195, 248
WINDOW . 8, 12-14, 17, 21-24, 36-39, 42-44, 48, 50, 57, 62, 69,
70, 81-83, 85, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 96, 98,
99, 101, 108, 113-117, 128, 129, 130,
132-136, 141-143, 145-147, 149-152, 163,
169-173, 183, 186, 198, 200, 202, 204, 213,
224, 236, 249, 255, 261
Windows . 8, 14, 24-26, 36, 69, 82, 100, 115, 136, 140, 142, 187
WORD . 10, 15, 31, 32, 43, 46, 51, 55, 109, 113, 147, 154, 155,
168, 169, 171, 174, 176, 177, 185, 199, 201,
203, 212, 229, 230, 236, 250, 251, 252, 254-257
WordStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 130, 185
WRITE . 21, 25, 43, 63, 64, 98, 145, 169, 176, 181-183, 185, 200,
218, 220, 232, 240, 250, 251, 253, 256
Write FBK File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 98
WRITEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 232, 237, 251-253
WRITELN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 218, 220, 240, 250, 251
X.PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
XMODEM . . . . . 135-137, 139, 140, 153, 154, 213, 244, 245, 261
Xmodem-1K . . . . . . . . . 135-137, 139, 140, 153, 213, 244, 245
Xmodem-1K/G . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136, 139, 140, 153, 213, 244
Xmodem-CRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
MSI QMODEM 4.6 TEST DRIVE 279
=================================================================
Xon/Xoff . . . 16, 17, 39, 40, 93, 118, 121, 125, 134, 137, 243
Ymodem . . . 135, 136, 138-140, 145, 146, 152-154, 213, 244, 261
YMODEM batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136, 138, 213, 244
Ymodem/G . . . . 135, 136, 138-140, 145, 152, 153, 213, 244, 261
Zmodem . . . . . . . . 49, 56, 57, 135, 136, 140, 146, 213, 244
Zmodem Auto-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
[ENTER] . 9, 10, 75, 78, 85, 95, 98, 106, 109, 114-117, 125-127,
129, 130, 132, 134, 141, 142, 144, 148,
159-161, 245
[ESC] . . 18, 76, 82, 83, 85-87, 98, 104, 111, 114-116, 133, 149,
157, 186, 258
[Home] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15